Allen-Bradley E300 User Manual
Allen-Bradley E300 is a state-of-the-art electronic overload relay that offers comprehensive protection for your valuable motor assets. With its advanced capabilities, the E300 provides unparalleled protection against various electrical faults, ensuring optimal performance and reliability in demanding industrial environments.
Advertisement
Advertisement
User Manual
E300 Electronic Overload Relay
Bulletin Numbers 193, 592
Important User Information
Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and operation of this equipment before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws, and standards.
Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are required to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.
If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation,
Inc., is prohibited.
Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.
WARNING:
Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
ATTENTION:
Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.
IMPORTANT
Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.
SHOCK HAZARD:
Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD:
Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures.
ARC FLASH HAZARD:
Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL
Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
Allen-Bradley, Rockwell Software, DeviceLogix, RS Logix 5000, Studio 5000, and Rockwell Automation are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Preface
Product Overview
Installation and Wiring
Table of Contents
Chapter 1
Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Communication Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Digital Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Analog Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Communication Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Optional Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Optional Expansion Bus Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Standard Current-based Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Ground Fault Current-based Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Voltage- and Power-based Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Thermal-based Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Chapter 2
Control Module to Sensing Module Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Communication Module to Control Module Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Expansion Bus Digital and Analog I/O Modules and
Expansion Bus Operator Station Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
3
4
Table of Contents
Diagnostic Station
Expansion Bus Network Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
100-C09…-C55 Starter Assembly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
100-C60…-C97 Starter Assembly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
100-D115…-D180 Starter Assembly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
DIN Rail / Panel Mount Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Expansion Bus Peripherals Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Expansion Digital Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Expansion Analog Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Three-Phase Direct On-Line (DOL) and
External Line Current Transformer Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Current Transformer Ratio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Full-voltage Non-reversing Starter (with Network Control). . . . . . 66
Full-Voltage Reversing Starter (with Network Control). . . . . . . . . . 67
Chapter 3
Parameter Group Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Editing a Configuration Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Editing a Numeric Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Editing a Bit Enumerated Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Stopping the Display Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Automatic Trip and Warning Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Table of Contents
Invalid Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Enable Option Match Protection Trip (Parameter 186) . . . . . . . . . 81
Enable Option Match Protection Warning (Parameter 192) . . . . . 82
Control Module Type (Parameter 221) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Sensing Module Type (Parameter 222) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Communication Module Type (Parameter 223) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Operator Station Type (Parameter 224). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Digital I/O Expansion Module 1 Type (Parameter 225) . . . . . . . . . 84
Digital I/O Expansion Module 2 Type (Parameter 226) . . . . . . . . . 85
Digital I/O Expansion Module 3 Type (Parameter 227) . . . . . . . . . 85
Digital I/O Expansion Module 4 Type (Parameter 228) . . . . . . . . . 85
Analog I/O Expansion Module 1 Type (Parameter 229) . . . . . . . . . 86
Analog I/O Expansion Module 2 Type (Parameter 230) . . . . . . . . . 87
Analog I/O Expansion Module 3 Type (Parameter 231) . . . . . . . . . 87
Analog I/O Expansion Module 4 Type (Parameter 232) . . . . . . . . . 88
Option Match Action (Parameter 233) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Device Configuration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Security Configuration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Input Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 196) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Input Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 197) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Input Pt02 Assignment (Parameter 198) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Input Pt03 Assignment (Parameter 199) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Input Pt04 Assignment (Parameter 200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Input Pt05 Assignment (Parameter 201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Output Pt02 Assignment (Parameter 204) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Output Relay Configuration States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Output Relay Protection Fault Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Output Relay Communication Fault Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Output Relay Communication Idle Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Expansion Bus Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Diagnostic Station User-defined Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
5
Table of Contents
6
Operating Modes
Analog I/O Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Analog Output Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Network Start Configuration States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Network Start Communication Fault Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Network Start Communication Idle Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Introduction to Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Chapter 5
Overload (Operator Station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Non-reversing Starter Operating Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Non-reversing Starter (Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Non-reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback. . . . . . . . 173
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control. . . . . . . . . 176
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) –
Two-wire Control with Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control . . . . . . . 181
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) –
Three-wire Control with Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) . . . . . . . . . . 186
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station)
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) –
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback –
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) –
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback –
Non-reversing Starter (Custom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning
Functions
Table of Contents
Reversing Starter Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Reversing Starter (Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Reversing Starter (Operator Station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control. . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control . 245
Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control 250
Reversing Starter (Custom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Two-speed Starter Operating Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Two-speed Starter (Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Two-speed Starter (Network) with Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Two-speed Starter (Operator Station). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback . . . . . . . . . . 271
Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control. . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) –
Two-wire Control with Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control . . . . . . . . . . 287
Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control 296
Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) –
Chapter 6
Ground Fault Current Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Current Imbalance Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Line Undercurrent Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Line Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Voltage Imbalance Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Phase Rotation Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
7
Table of Contents
Commands
8
Metering and Diagnostics
Real Power (kW) Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Reactive Power (kVAR) Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Apparent Power (kVA) Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Thermistor (PTC) Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Contactor Feedback Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Chapter 7
Clear Max. kW Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Clear Max kVAR Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Clear Max kVA Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Chapter 8
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Table of Contents
Percent Thermal Capacity Utilized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Current Warning Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Control Warning Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Firmware Revision Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Expansion Digital Module ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Expansion Analog Module ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Invalid Configuration Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Invalid Configuration Cause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
9
Table of Contents
10
kVARh Generated 10^-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
DeviceLogix™ Functionality
EtherNet/IP Communication
Table of Contents
Trip Snapshot L1-L2 Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Trip Snapshot L2-L3 Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Trip Snapshot L3-L1 Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Trip Snapshot Total Real Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Trip Snapshot Total Reactive Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Trip Snapshot Total Apparent Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Trip Snapshot Total Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
Determining Network Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
EtherNet/IP Node Address Selection Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Assign Network Parameters via the BOOTP/ DHCP Utility . . . 563
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
11
Table of Contents
Firmware Updates
Troubleshooting
Specifications
12
Assign Network Parameters Via a Web Browser and
MAC Scanner Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Other Factors to Consider When Assigning Network Parameters 565
Web Server Security and System Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Permanently Enabling the Web Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Behavior of Modules With Duplicate IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) File Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Automation Controller Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Preconfigured E300 relay Logix Integration with an
Offline E300 relay Logix Integration with Add-on Profile . . . . . . 593
Offline E300 relay Integration with a Generic Profile . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Module Status (MS) LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Network Status (NS) LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Trip/Warn LED Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Appendix A
Electromagnetic Compatibility Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Parameter List
Wiring Diagrams
EtherNet/IP Information
Accessories
Index
Table of Contents
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
Identity Object — CLASS CODE 0x0001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
Message Router — CLASS CODE 0x0002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
Assembly Object — CLASS CODE 0x0004. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
Instance 120 - Configuration Assembly Revision 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Instance 120 - Configuration Assembly Revision 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
Instance 144 – Default Consumed Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
Instance 198 - Current Diagnostics Produced Assembly . . . . . . . . 696
Instance 199 - All Diagnostics Produced Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
Connection Object — CLASS CODE 0x0005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
Discrete Input Point Object — CLASS CODE 0x0008 . . . . . . . . 703
Discrete Output Point Object — CLASS CODE 0x0009 . . . . . . 704
Analog Input Point Object — CLASS CODE 0x000A . . . . . . . . . 706
Parameter Object — CLASS CODE 0x000F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Parameter Group Object — CLASS CODE 0x0010 . . . . . . . . . . . 708
Discrete Output Group Object — CLASS CODE 0x001E . . . . . 708
Control Supervisor Object — CLASS CODE 0x0029. . . . . . . . . . 709
Overload Object — CLASS CODE 0x002c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
Base Energy Object — CLASS CODE 0x004E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
Electrical Energy Object — CLASS CODE 0x004F. . . . . . . . . . . . 712
Wall Clock Time Object — CLASS CODE 0x008B . . . . . . . . . . . 714
DPI Fault Object — CLASS CODE 0x0097 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
DPI Warning Object — CLASS CODE 0x0098. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
MCC Object — CLASS CODE 0x00C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
Appendix E
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
13
Table of Contents
Notes:
14
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Terminology
Additional Resources
Preface
This manual describes how to install, set up, operate, and troubleshoot the E300™
Electronic Overload Relay.
Throughout this manual, we may refer to the E300™ Electronic Overload Relay as
“the E300 relay”. This term may be used interchangeably with “E300 electronic overload relay”; they are synonymous.
These documents contain additional information concerning related products from Rockwell Automation.
Resource
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1
Product Certifications website, http://www.ab.com
Description
Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell
Automation industrial system.
Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other certification details.
You can view or download publications at
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/literature-library/overview.page
.
To order paper copies of technical documentation, contact your local
Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative.
Rockwell Automation Publication XXXX-X.X.X - Month Year
15
Preface
Notes:
16
Rockwell Automation Publication XXXX-X.X.X - Month Year
Overview
Chapter
1
Product Overview
The E300™ Electronic Overload Relay is a microprocessor-based electronic overload relay that is designed to help protect three-phase or single-phase AC electric induction motors that are rated from 0.5…65,000 A. Its modular design, communication options, diagnostic information, simplified wiring, and integration into Logix make the E300 relay the ideal overload for motor control applications in an automation system. The E300 relay provides flexibility, reduces engineering time, and maximizes uptime for important motor starter applications.
Modular Design
You can select the specific options that you need for your motor starter application. the E300 relay consists of three modules: sensing, control, and communication. You can customize each of the three with accessories to tailor the electronic motor overload for your application’s exact needs.
•
Wide current range
•
Sensing capabilities (Current, Ground Fault Current, and/or Voltage)
•
Expansion I/O
•
Operator interfaces
Communication Options
You can select from multiple communication options that integrate with Logixbased control systems. Developers can easily add the E300 relay to Logix-based control systems that use Integrated Architecture tools like Add-on Profiles, Addon Instructions, and Faceplates.
•
EtherNet/IP device-level ring (DLR)
•
DeviceNet
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
17
Chapter 1
Product Overview
Diagnostic Information
The E300 relay provides a wide variety of diagnostic information to monitor motor performance, proactively alert you to possible motor issues, or identify the reason for an unplanned shutdown. Information includes:
•
Voltage, Current, and Energy
•
Trip / Warning Histories
•
% Thermal Capacity Utilization
•
Time to Trip
•
Time to Reset
•
Operational Hours
•
Number of Starts
•
Trip Snapshot
Simplified Wiring
The E300 relay provides an easy means to mount to both IEC and NEMA
Allen-Bradley® contactors. A contactor coil adapter is available for the 100-C contactor, which allows you to create a functional motor starter with only two control wires.
18
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Product Overview
Chapter 1
Catalog Number
Explanation
E300 Electronic Overload Relay modules have their own catalog number.
Sensing Module
193 - ESM - VIG - 30A - C23
592
Bulletin Number
193 IEC Overload Relay
592 NEMA Overload Relay
Module Type
ESM Sensing Module
Sensing Module Type
Sensing Current Range
VIG Current, Ground Fault Current,
Voltage, and Power
IG Current and Ground Fault Current
I Current
30A 0.5…30 A
60A 6…60 A
100A 10…100 A
200A 20…200 A
Sensing Module Mounting Style
C23 Mounts to 100-C09…-C23 Contactor
C55 Mounts to 100-C30…-C55 Contactor
C97 Mounts to 100-C60…-C97 Contactor
D180 Mounts to 100-D115…-D180 Contactor
S2
S3
Mounts to Bulletin 500 NEMA Size 0…2 Contactor
Mounts to Bulletin 500 NEMA Size 3 Contactor
S4
T
P
Mounts to Bulletin 500 NEMA Size 4 Contactor
DIN Rail / Panel Mount with Power Terminals
E3T Replacement DIN Rail / Panel Mount with Power Terminals for an E3 Plus Panel Mount Adapter
DIN Rail / Panel Mount with Pass-thru Power Conductors
CT DIN Rail / Panel Mount with Pass-thru Power Conductors (used with External CTs)
Control Module
193 - EIO - 43 - 120
Bulletin Number
193 IEC Overload Relay
Module Type
EIO I/O Only Control Module
EIOGP I/O and Protection Control Module
(External Ground Fault Sensing and PTC)
I/O Count
63 6 Inputs / 3 Relay Outputs
43 4 Inputs / 3 Relay Outputs
42 4 Inputs / 2 Relay Outputs
22 2 Inputs / 2 Relay Outputs
Control Voltage
24D 24V DC
120 110…120V AC, 50/60 Hz
240 220…240V AC, 50/60 H
Communication Module
193 - ECM - ETR
Bulletin Number
193 IEC Overload Relay
Module Type
ECM Communication Module
Communication Type
ETR EtherNet/IP with Dual Ethernet Ports
DNT DeviceNet
PCM Parameter Configuration Module
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
19
Chapter 1
Product Overview
Digital Expansion Module
193 - EXP - DIO - 42 - 120
Bulletin Number
193 IEC Overload Relay
Module Type I/O Type
EXP Expansion Module DIO Digital I/O
I/O Count
42 4 Inputs / 2 Relay Outputs
Communication Type
120 110…120V AC, 50/60 Hz Inputs
240 220…240V AC, 50/60 Hz Inputs
24D 24V DC Inputs
Analog Expansion Module
193 - EXP - AIO - 31
Bulletin Number
193 IEC Overload Relay
Module Type
I/O Type
EXP Expansion Module
AIO Analog I/O
I/O Count
31 3 Universal Analog Inputs / 1 Analog Output
Bulletin Number
193 IEC Overload Relay
Operator Station
193 - EOS - SCS
Module Type
EOS Operator Station
I/O Type
SCS Starter Control Station
SDS Starter Diagnostic Station
Power Supply
193 - EXP - PS - AC
Bulletin Number
193 IEC Overload Relay
Module Type Function Type
EXP Expansion Module PS Expansion Bus Power Supply
Supply Voltage
AC 110-240V AC, 50/60Hz control voltage
DC 24V DC control voltage
20
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Module Description
Product Overview
Chapter 1
The E300 relay is comprised of three modules. All three modules are required to make a functional overload relay.
•
Sensing Module
•
Control Module
•
Communication Module
Sensing Module
Figure 1 - Sensing Module
The sensing module electronically samples data about the current, voltage, power, and energy that are consumed by the electric motor internal to the module. You can choose from one of three varieties of the sensing modules depending on the motor diagnostic information that is needed for the motor protection application:
•
Current Sensing
•
Current and Ground Fault Current Sensing
•
Current, Ground Fault Current, Voltage, and Power Sensing
The current ranges for each of three varieties of sensing module are as follows:
•
0.5…30 A
•
6…60 A
•
10…100 A
•
20…200 A
You can choose how the sensing module mechanically mounts inside the electrical enclosure. The following mounting mechanisms are available for the sensing module.
•
Mount to the load side of an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 100 IEC Contactor
•
Mount to the load side of an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 500 NEMA
Contactor
•
DIN Rail / Panel Mount with power terminals
•
Replacement DIN Rail / Panel Mount with power terminals for an
Allen-Bradley E3 Plus panel mount adapter
•
DIN Rail / Panel Mount with pass-thru power conductors
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
21
Chapter 1
Product Overview
Control Module
Figure 2 - Control Module
The control module is the heart of the E300 relay and can attach to any sensing module. The control module performs all protection and motor control algorithms and contains the native I/O for the system. The control module has two varieties:
•
I/O only
•
I/O and protection (PTC and External Ground Fault Current Sensing)
The control module is offered in three control voltages:
•
110…120V AC, 50/60Hz
•
220…240V AC, 50/60Hz
•
24V DC
External control voltage is required to power the E300 relay and activate the digital inputs.
Communication Module
Figure 3 - Communication Module
22
The communication module allows the E300 relay to be integrated into an automation system, and it can attach to any control module. All communication modules allow you to set the node address with rotary turn dials, and it provides
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Product Overview
Chapter 1
diagnostic status indicators to provide system status at the panel. the E300 relay supports two network protocols:
•
EtherNet/IP
•
DeviceNet
The E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module has two RJ45 connectors that function as a switch. You can daisy chain multiple E300 relays with Ethernet cable, and the module supports a Device Level Ring (DLR).
Optional Add-On Modules
Optional Expansion I/O
The E300 relay allows you to add more digital and analog I/O to the system via the E300 relay Expansion Bus if the native I/O count is not sufficient for the application on the base relay. You can add any combination of up to four Digital
I/O Expansion Modules that have four inputs (120V AC, 240V AC, or 24V
DC) and two relay outputs.
You can also add up to four Analog I/O Expansion Modules, which have three independent universal analog inputs and one isolated analog output. The Analog
I/O Expansion Modules require Control Module firmware v3.000 or higher. The independent universal analog inputs can accept the following signals:
•
4…20 mA
•
0…20 mA
•
0…10V DC
•
1…5V DC
•
0…5V DC
•
RTD Sensors (Pt 385, Pt 3916, Cu 426, Ni 618, Ni 672, and NiFe 518)
•
Resistance (150
, 750
, 3000
, and 6000
)
The isolated analog output can be programmed to reference a traditional analog signal (4…20 mA, 0…20 mA, 0…10V DC, 1…5V, or 0…10V) to represent the following diagnostic values:
•
Average %FLA
•
%TCU
•
Ground Fault Current
•
Current Imbalance
•
Average L-L Voltage
•
Voltage Imbalance
•
Total kW
•
Total kVAR
•
Total kVA
•
Total Power Factor
•
User-defined Value
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
23
Chapter 1
Product Overview
Power LED
Trip / Warn LED
Optional Operator Station
Figure 4 - Operator Stations
Start Forward / Speed 1
Start Reverse / Speed 2
Local / Remote
LOCA
L
TE
Stop
Reset
0
Control Station
RESET
Power LED
Trip / Warn LED
ESC
SELEC
T
Start Forward / Speed 1
Start Reverse / Speed 2
REMO L
TE
Local / Remote
Diagnostic Station
Stop
Reset
0
RESET
Escape
Up
Select
Enter
Down
The E300 relay offers you the capability to add one operator interface to the
Expansion Bus. You can choose between two types of operator stations: Control
Station or a Diagnostic Station. Both types of operator stations mount into a standard 22 mm push button knockout, and they provide diagnostic status indicators that allow you to view the status of the E300 relay from the outside of an electrical enclosure. Both operator stations provide push buttons that can be used for motor control logic, and they both can be used to upload and download parameter configuration data from the base relay.
The Diagnostic Station contains a display and navigation buttons that allows you to view and edit parameters in the base relay. The Diagnostic Station requires
Control Module firmware v3.000 or higher.
Optional Expansion Bus Power Supply
Figure 5 - Expansion Bus Power Supply
24
The E300 relay expansion bus provides enough current to operate a system that has (1) Digital Expansion Module and (1) Operator Station. An E300 relay system that contains more expansion modules needs supplemental current for the
Expansion Bus. the E300 relay offers you two types of Expansion Bus Power
Supplies: AC (110…240V AC, 50/60 Hz) and DC (24V DC). One Expansion
Bus Power Supply supplies enough current for a fully loaded E300 relay
Expansion Bus (four Digital Expansion Modules, four Analog Expansion
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protection Features
Product Overview
Chapter 1
Modules, and one Operator Station). You can use either Expansion Bus Power
Supply with any combination of Digital and Analog Expansion Modules.
Standard Current-based Protection
All versions of the E300 relay provide the following motor protection functions:
•
Thermal Overload (51)
•
Phase Loss
•
Current Imbalance (46)
•
Undercurrent – load loss (37)
•
Overcurrent – load jam (48)
•
Overcurrent – load stall
•
Start Inhibit (66)
Ground Fault Current-based Protection
The E300 relay sensing modules and control modules with a ground fault current option provides the following motor protection function:
•
Ground Fault – zero sequence method (50N)
Voltage- and Power-based Protection
The E300 relay sensing modules with voltage sensing provides the following motor protection functions:
•
Undervoltage (27)
•
Overvoltage (59)
•
Phase Reversal (47) – voltage-based
•
Over and Under Frequency (81) – voltage-based
•
Voltage Imbalance (46)
•
Over and Under Power (37)
•
Over and Under Leading/Lagging Power Factor (55)
•
Over and Under Reactive Power Generated
•
Over and Under Reactive Power Consumed
•
Over and Under Apparent Power
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
25
Chapter 1
Product Overview
Applications
Thermal-based Protection
The E300 relay provides the following thermal-based motor protection functions:
•
Thermistor – PTC (49)
•
Stator Protection – RTD (49)
•
Bearing Protection – RTD (38)
The E300 relay can be used with the following across the line starter applications:
•
Non-reversing starter
•
Reversing starter
•
Wye (Star) / Delta starter
•
Two-speed motors
•
Low and medium voltage with two or three potential transformers
•
With or without Phase current transformers
•
With or without zero-sequence core balanced current transformer
26
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Chapter
2
Installation and Wiring
Introduction
Receiving
Unpacking/Inspecting
Storing
This chapter instructs you on how to receive, unpack, inspect, and store the
E300™ Electronic Overload Relay. Assembly, installation, and wiring instructions for common applications are also included in this chapter.
It is your responsibility to thoroughly inspect the equipment before accepting the shipment from the freight company. Check the items received against the purchase order. If any items are damaged, it is your responsibility not to accept delivery until the freight agent has noted the damage on the freight bill. If any concealed damage is found during unpacking, it is again your responsibility to notify the freight agent. The shipping container must be left intact and the freight agent should be requested to make a visual inspection of the equipment.
Remove all packing material from around the E300 relay. After you unpack it, check the item’s nameplate catalog number against the purchase order.
Keep the E300 relay in its shipping container before installation. If you will not use the equipment immediately, you must store it according to the following instructions to maintain warranty coverage:
•
Store in a clean, dry location.
•
Store within an ambient temperature range
of -40…+85 °C (-40…+185 °F).
•
Store within a relative humidity range of 0…95%, non-condensing.
•
Do not store where the device could be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere.
•
Do not store in a construction area.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
27
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
General Precautions
If the E300 relay is being deployed in an environment with an ambient
temperature greater than 30 °C (86 °F), see the Environmental Specifications on page 626
for the appropriate temperature derating. In addition to the specific precautions listed throughout this manual, the following general statements must be observed.
To reduce electrical noise interference between the E300 relay and a contactor, you should use an RC surge suppressor on AC-based contactor coils. For Allen-
Bradley® contactors, use the following RC surge suppressors.
Table 1 - Recommended Surge Suppressors
Contactor Type
Bul. 100-C IEC Contactors
Bul. 300 NEMA Contactors
Bul. 500 NEMA Contactors
Surge Suppressor Cat. No.
100-FSC280
100-FSC280
199-FSMA1
ATTENTION:
The E300 relay contains electrostatic discharge (ESD) sensitive parts and assemblies. Status control precautions are required when installing, testing, servicing, or repairing this assembly. Component damage may result if
ESD control procedures are not followed. If you are not familiar with static control procedures, see Allen-Bradley publication 8000-SB001_-en-p,
“Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage”, or any other applicable ESD protection handbook.
ATTENTION:
An incorrectly applied or installed E300 relay can result in damage to the components or reduction in product life. Wiring or application errors (for example, incorrectly calculating the FLA setting, supplying incorrect or inadequate supply voltage, connecting an external supply voltage to the thermistor terminals, or operating or storing in excessive ambient temperatures) may result in malfunction of the E300 relay.
ATTENTION:
Only personnel familiar with the E300 relay and associated machinery should plan to install, start up, and maintain the system. Failure to comply may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
ATTENTION:
The purpose of this user manual is to serve as a guide for proper installation. The National Electrical Code (NEC) and any other governing regional or local code overrules this information. Rockwell Automation cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or proper installation of the E300 relay or associated equipment. A hazard of personal injury and/or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation.
28
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
ATTENTION:
The earth ground terminal of the E300 relay shall be connected to a solid earth ground via a low-impedance connection.
Base Relay Assembly
The following section illustrates the E300 relay base relay assembly instructions.
Control Module to Sensing
Module Assembly
You can connect any E300 relay Control Module to any E300 relay Sensing
Module. The following illustrations show the steps that are required to make this connection.
Figure 6 - Control Module to Sensing Module Assembly
1
2
3
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
29
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
Communication Module to
Control Module Assembly
You can connect any E300 relay Communication Module to any E300 relay
shows the steps required to make this connection.
Figure 7 - Communication Module to Control Module Assembly
2
3
1
30
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
Expansion Bus Peripherals
The E300 relay offers a range of Expansion Digital and Analog I/O modules that simply connect to the E300 relay’s Expansion Bus.
Panel Mount
Hole
DIN Rail Mount
Panel Mount Hole
Expansion Bus Out
Expansion Bus In
Figure 8 - Expansion Bus Peripherals
Removable I/O Terminals
Color
Off
Blinking Green
Green
Red
Status LED
Description
No power applied
Module OK with no connection
Module OK and active
Error Detected
1
2 3 4
4T
1T2T 3T
Module Number Selector
Number Description
1 - 4 Module number
1T - 4T
Module number with expansion bus terminating resistor applied
Note:
If the expansion bus does not have an operator station, then the last expansion module number must be set to terminated.
You can also add one of the two available operator stations to the end of the
Expansion Bus.
Figure 9 - Expansion Operator Stations
Power LED
Trip / Warn LED
Power LED
Trip / Warn LED
Escape
Up
Select
LOCA
L
TE
Start Forward / Speed 1
Start Reverse / Speed 2
Local / Remote
Stop
Reset
0
RESET
Control Station
ESC
SELEC
T
Start Forward / Speed 1
Start Reverse / Speed 2
Local / Remote
Diagnostic Station
REMO L
TE
Stop
Reset
0
RESET
Enter
Down
Expansion Bus Digital and
Analog I/O Modules and
Power Supply Installation
Figure 10 and Figure 11 show how to mount and connect the E300 relay
expansion bus I/O modules, expansion power supplies, and operator stations.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
31
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
Figure 10 - Expansion Bus Digital and Analog I/O Modules and Power Supply
1
Expansion Bus Operator
Station Installation
Figure 11 - Expansion Bus Operator Station
Click
2
2
1.7 N.m
(15 lb-in)
ESC
SELEC
T
REMO L
TE
0
RESET
1
3
800F-AW2
Expansion Bus Network
Installation
32
The E300 relay supports up to (4) Expansion Digital I/O modules, (4)
Expansion Analog I/O modules, and (1) Operation Station. The E300 Base
Relay can supply enough power for (1) Expansion Digital I/O module and (1)
Operator Station. Any other combination of E300relay module on the Expansion Bus.
Expansion Bus peripherals requires an Expansion Bus Power Supply, which connects as the first
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
Set the module number dial of the Expansion Digital Module to a unique digital module number (D1-D4). If the Expansion Digital Module is the last device on the Expansion Bus, set the module number to the value that enables the internal terminating resistor (D1T-D4T). A power cycle is required when changes are made to the module number dial.
Set the module number dial of the Expansion Analog Module to a unique analog module number (A1-A4). If the Expansion Analog Module is the last device on the Expansion Bus, set the module number to the value that enables the internal terminating resistor (A1T-A4T). A power cycle is required when changes are made to the module number dial.
Connect the E300 Base Relay to the Expansion Module’s Input Port using the supplied Expansion Bus cable. Add the next Expansion Module by connecting the supplied Expansion Bus cable to the Output Port of the previous Expansion
Module and into the Input Port of the additional Expansion Module. The
Operator Station is the last device on the E300 relay Expansion Bus; it only has an Input Port with an internal Expansion Bus terminating resistor.
If the user-supplied Expansion Bus cable is not long enough for the installation,
1-meter (Cat. No. 193-EXP-CBL-1M) and 3-meter (Cat. No.
193-EXP-CBL-3M) Expansion Bus cables are available as accessories. The E300 relay expansion bus can support a maximum distance of 5 meters (16 ft.).
Figure 12 - Expansion Bus Network Installation
ESC
SELEC
T
REMO L
TE
0
RESET
1
2
Click
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
33
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
Starter Assembly
The following illustrations show how to assemble an E300 relay as a motor starter with an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 100-C contactor.
5 - 7 lb-in
IN1
IN0
A2
R04
R03
A1
6
100-C09…-C55 Starter Assembly Installation
The starter assembly installation instructions are for use with E300 relay Sensing
Module catalog numbers 193-ESM-___-___-C23 and 193-ESM-___-___-C55
Figure 13 - 100-C09…-C55 Starter Assembly Installation
5
9 - 22 lb-in
4
3
2
7 -11 lb-in
1
34
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
100-C60…-C97 Starter Assembly Installation
The starter assembly installation instructions are for use with E300 relay Sensing
Module catalog numbers 193-ESM-___-___-C97
Figure 14 - 100-C60…-C97 Starter Assembly Installation
0.79 - 1.24 Nm
7 -11 lb-in
8
4 N•m, 35 lb-in
7
0.79 - 1.24 N•m
7 -11 lb-in
2
4
3
1
6
5
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
35
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
1
100-D115…-D180 Starter Assembly Installation
The starter assembly installation instructions are for use with E300 relay Sensing
Module catalog numbers 193-ESM-___-___-D180
Figure 15 - 100-D115…-D180 Starter Assembly Installation
Supplied with Overload Relay
M8 x 25
x 3
M8 Washer
M8 Nut
M5 x 12
x 3 x 3 x 4
1
Supplied with Contactor
100-D115E, -D140E, -D180E
100-D115, -D140, -D180
22 N·m (195 lb-in)
2
2
2 N•m
(18 lb-in)
3
36
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Starter Dimensions
37 (1.47) FROM
CONTACTOR
MTG. HOLE
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
45
(1.76)
Approximate dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.
Figure 16 - E300 Sensing Module 193-ESM-___-__-C23 with 100-C09…-C23 Contactor
87
(3.40)
35
(1.37) n 5 (0.18)
67 (2.65)
190 (7.49)
(ADD 5 mm (0.19 in.)
FOR CONTACTOR COIL
ON LINE SIDE)
60 (2.3
152 (5.98)
122 (4.81)
122 (4.81)
37 (1.48) FROM
CONTACTOR
MTG. HOLE
45
(1.76)
29 (1.14)
FROM
CONTACTOR
MTG. HOLE
122
(4.78)
Figure 17 - E300 Sensing Module 193-ESM-___-__-C55 with 100-C30…-C37 Contactor
104
(4.10)
35
(1.374) n 5 (0.18)
67 (2.65)
190 (7.49)
(ADD 5 mm (0.19 in.)
FOR CONTACTOR COIL
ON LINE SIDE)
60 (2.36)
152 (5.98)
29 (1.13)
FROM
CONTACTOR
MTG. HOLE
122
(4.78)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
37
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
37 (1.48) FROM
CONTACTOR
MTG. HOLE
152 (5.98)
34 (1.34)
FROM
CONTACTOR
MTG. HOLE
54
(2.12)
Figure 18 - E300 Sensing Module 193-ESM-___-__-C55 with 100-C43…-C55 Contactor
107
(4.21)
45 (1.75) n 5 (0.18)
190 (7.49)
(ADD 5 mm (0.19 in.)
FOR CONTACTOR COIL
ON LINE SIDE)
67 (2.65)
60 (2.
45 (1.76)
122
(4.82)
Figure 19 - E300 Sensing Module 193-ESM-___-__-C97 with 100-C60…-C97 Contactor
(ADD 0.24 FOR
CONTACTOR COIL
ON LINE SIDE)
29.5
5.10)
FROM
CONTACTOR
MTG. HOLE
38.9
(1.53)
FROM
CONTACTOR
MTG. HOLE
38
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
6.57
(166/8)
405.4
(15.96)
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
119.8
(4.72)
Figure 20 - E300 Sensing Module 193-ESM-___-__-D180 with 100-D115…-D180 Contactor
155
(6.10)
100
(3.94)
10
(0.39)
110.5
(4.35) 8
(0.32) n. 5.5
(0.22) n 11.5
(0.45)
145
(5.71)
326.8
(12.87)
74.5
(2.93)
FROM
CONTACTOR
MTG. HOLE
22
(0.86) n. 5.5
(0.22)
52.5
(2.07)
93
(3.66)
M8
39
(1.54)
120
(4.72)
61.4
(2.42)
10
(0.39)
FROM
CONTACTOR
MTG. HOLE
151.4
(5.96)
42.6
(1.68) 105
(4.13)
Figure 21 - E300
Terminal Covers
Sensing Module 193-ESM-___-__-D180 with 100-D115…-D180 Contactor and
155
(6.10) n 5.5
(0.22)
100
(3.94)
55.8
(2.20)
8
(0.32) n 11.5
(0.45) 145
(5.71)
74.5
(2.93)
FROM
CONTACTOR
MTG. HOLE n 5.5
(0.22)
93
(3.66)
52.5
(2.07)
204.6
(8.06)
61.4
(2.42)
FROM
CONTACTOR
MTG. HOLE
151.4
(5.96)
105
(4.13)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
39
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
Figure 22 - E300 Sensing Module 592-ESM-___-__-S2 with NEMA Contactor Size 0 and Size 1
90
(3.56) n 6 (0.22)
157 (6.17)
180 (7.06)
249 (9.78)
40
12 (0.46)
35 (1.38)
125
(4.91)
70
(2.75)
Figure 23 - E300 Sensing Module 592-ESM-___-__-S2 with NEMA Contactor Size 2
100
(3.94) n 6 (0.22)
184 (7.24)
219 (8.63)
276 (10.85)
12 (0.46)
40 (1.58)
80
(3.15)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
125
(4.91)
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
Figure 24 - E300 Sensing Module 592-ESM-___-__-S3 with NEMA Contactor Size 3
138.2
(5.44)
11.35
(0.45)
161.6
(6.36)
19.9
(0.78)
368
(14.49)
219.9
(8.66)
274.1
(10.79)
121
(4.76)
139.85
(5.51)
155.45
(6.12)
138.4
(5.45)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
41
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
Figure 25 - E300 Sensing Module 592-ESM-___-__-S4 with NEMA Contactor Size 4
11.4
(0.45)
189.9
(7.48)
25.2
(0.99)
414
(16.30)
250
(9.84)
312.7
(12.31)
130.1
(5.12)
160.2
(6.31)
187.5
(7.38) n 8.7
(0.34)
5 PLCS
161.7
(6.37)
DIN Rail / Panel Mount
Dimensions
11.35
(0.45)
39
(1.03)
135
(5.32) with mtg. feet
30.1
(1.19)
Approximate dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.
Figure 26 - E300 Sensing Module 193-ESM-___-30A-T and 193-ESM-___-60A-T
shown with panel mount feet accessory n 4.8 (0.189) q
4.5
(0.18)
116.2
(4.58) w/o mtg. feet
125
(4.921)
5
(0.197)
42
45
(1.76)
124
(4.88)
Mount feet accessory Cat. No.: 140M-C-N45
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
120.7
(4.75) w/o feet
148 (5.83)
45
(1.764)
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
Figure 27 - E300 Sensing Module 193-ESM-___-30A-E3T and 193-ESM-___-60A-E3T
126
(4.94)
6 (0.24)
30
(1.18)
9 (0.33)
46 (1.81)
4 (0.16) q
4 (0.14)
135 (5.32)
6 (0.217)
101 (3.96)
4 (0.154) n 5 (0.17)
8 (0.30) q
11.4
(0.45)
36.6
(1.44) w/o feet
41.2
(1.62) with feet
Figure 28 - E300 Sensing Module 193-ESM-___-100A-T
Shown with panel mount accessory feet
Cat. No. 193-ESM-SA-100
60
(2.36)
139.96
(5.51) with feet q
52.9
(2.08)
130
(5.12)
71.6
(2.82)
141
(5.55) n 5.58
(0.23)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
43
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
139.9
(5.51)
41.4
(1.63)
71.6
(2.82)
39
(1.54)
119.8
(4.72)
41.2
(1.62)
Figure 29 - E300 Sensing Module 193-ESM-___-100A-E3T
17.7
(0.70)
5.5
(0.22) q
76.6
(3.02)
4.05
(0.16)
141.5
(5.57)
Figure 30 - E300 Sensing Module 193-ESM-___-200A-T
42.6
(1.68)
(105)
105
(4.13)
60
(2.36)
135.7
(5.34)
22
(0.86)
FROM
MTG. HOLE
M8
63.9
(2.51)
FROM
MTG. HOLE
119.8
(4.72)
151.4
(5.96)
Figure 31 - E300 Sensing Module 193-ESM-___-200A-T with Terminal Covers
105
(4.13)
130
(5.12) n 5.5
(0.22)
93
(3.66)
211
(8.32)
22
(0.86)
FROM
MTG. HOLE n 5.5
(0.22)
93
(3.66)
44
63.9
(2.51)
FROM
MTG. HOLE
151.4
(5.96)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Pass-thru Modules
Dimensions
11.35
(0.45) from mounting foot mounting hole to reset button
21.5
(0.85) from mounting foot mounting hole to reset button
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
Approximate dimensions are shown in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.
Figure 32 - E300 Sensing Module 193-ESM-___-30A-P, 193-ESM-___-60A-P, and
193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT
shown with panel mount feet acessory
Cat. No. 140M-CN-45 n 4.8
(0.19)
106.3
(4.18) w/o mtg. feet
30.2
(1.19) q
102
(4.00) w/ mtg. feet
91.5
(3.60)
108
(4.25) w/ mtg. feet
106.3
(4.18) w/o mtg. feet
45
(1.76) q
11.6
(0.46)
21.4
(0.84) w/o feet
123.5
(4.86)
3-pin connector only with
Cat. No. 193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT
Figure 33 - E300 Sensing Module 193-ESM-___-100A-P
shown with panel mount accessory feet Cat. No. 193-ESM-SA-100
26.3
(1.04) with feet q
38.8
(1.53)
109.9
(4.33) with feet
71.6
(2.82) n 5.8
(0.23)
140.9
(5.55)
60
(2.36)
5
(0.20)
100
(3.94)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
45
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
119.8
(4.72)
Figure 34 - E300 Sensing Module 193-ESM-___-200A-P
109.5
(4.31)
22
(0.86) from mtg. hole
2.2
(0.09)
63.9
(2.51) from mtg. hole n 21
(0.83)
151.4
(5.96)
105
(4.13) n 5.5
(0.22)
93
(3.66)
Expansion Bus Peripherals
Dimensions
Approximate dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.
Figure 35 - E300 Digital Expansion Module 193-EXP-DIO-___
22.5
(0.89)
2 x 4.5 (0.18) dia.
98 (3.86) 87 (3.43)
80.75 (3.18)
120
(4.73)
46
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
98 (3.86)
87 (3.43)
22.5
(0.89)
Figure 36 - E300 Expansion Analog Module 193-EXP-AIO
2 x 4.5 (0.18) dia.
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
80.75 (3.18)
98
(3.86)
87
(3.43)
45
(1.77)
120
(4.73)
Figure 37 - E300 Expansion Power Supply 193-EXP-PS-___
4x 4.5 (0.18) dia
120
(4.73)
80.75 (3.18)
12
(0.47)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
47
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
100
(3.94)
Figure 38 - E300 Starter Control Station 193-EOS-SCS
18.5
(0.73)
13.5
(0.53)
45 (1.77)
100
(3.94)
Figure 39 - E300 Starter Diagnostic Station 193-EOS-SDS
18.5
(0.73)
13.5 (0.53)
70
(2.76)
22.5 (0.89) dia.
22.5 (0.89) dia.
Terminals
48
Sensing Module
Wire Type
Table 2 - E300 Sensing Module Wire Size and Torque Specifications
Stranded/Solid [AWG]
Conductor Torque
Single
Multiple
Flexible-Stranded with Ferrule Metric Single
Coarse-Stranded/Solid Metric
Multiple
Single
Multiple
Cat. No.
193-ESM-_ _ _-30A-_ _ _
193-ESM-_ _ _-60A-_ _ _
592-ESM-_ _ _-30A-_ _ _
592-ESM-_ _ _-60A-_ _ _
#14…6 AWG
22 lb-in.
#10…6 AWG
30 lb-in.
2.5…16 mm
2
2.5 N•m
6…10 mm
2
3.4 N•m
2.5…25 mm
2
2.5 N•m
6…16 mm
2
3.4 N•m
193-ESM-_ _ _-100A-_ _ _
592-ESM-_ _ _-100A-_ _ _
#12…1 AWG
35 lb-in.
#6…2 AWG
35 lb-in.
4…35 mm
2
4 N•m
4…25 mm
2
4 N•m
4…50 mm
2
4 N•m
4…35 mm
2
4 N•m
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
Table 3 - E300 Sensing Module Wire 3-Pole Terminal Block Specifications
3-Pole Terminal Block Cat. No.
Conductor Torque
100-DTB180 Single
Multiple
Cat. No.
193-ESM-_ _ _-200A-_ _ _
#6 AWG…250 MCM
90…110 lb.-in.
16…120 mm
2
10…12 N•m
6…1/0 AWG
90…110 lb.-in.
16…50 mm
2
10…12 N•m
Table 4 - E300 Sensing Module Terminal Lug Kit Specifications
Terminal Lug Kit Cat. No.
Conductor Torque
100-DL180 Single
Cat. No.
193-ESM-_ _ _-200A-_ _ _
#6 AWG…250 MCM
90…110 lb.-in.
16…120 mm
2
10…12 N•m
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
49
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
Power / PTC
Terminals
Control Module
Figure 40 - E300 Control Module Terminal Designations
193-EIO-63- _ _ _ 193-EIOGP-42- _ _ _
A1 A1
A2 IN2
IN3 IN4
IN5
A1 A1
A2 IN2
IN3 IT1
IT2
R13
R14
R23 R24
R13
R14
S1 S2
193-EIO-43- _ _ _
A1 A1
A2 IN2
IN3
R13
R14
R23 R24
193-EIOGP-22- _ _ _
A1 A1
A2 IT1
IT2
R13
R14
S1 S2
Communication
Module Latch
Expansion Bus Connector
Relay / Ground Fault
Terminals
Sensing Module Latch
IN1
IN0
A2
R04
R03
A1
Input / Output
Terminals
50
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Table 5 - E300 Control Module Wire Size and Torque Specifications
Wire Type
Stranded/Solid [AWG]
Conductor Torque
Single
Flexible-Stranded with Ferrule
Metric
Multiple
(stranded only)
Single
Multiple
Coarse-Stranded/Solid Metric Single
Multiple
Cat. No.
193-EIO-_ _-_ _ _
193-EIOGP-_ _-_ _ _
24...12 AWG
4lb-in
24...16 AWG
4 lb-in
0.25…2.5 mm
2
0.45 N•m
0.5...0.75 mm
2
0.45 N•m
0.2...2.5 mm
2
0.45 N•m
0.2...1.5 mm
2
0.45 N•m
Figure 41 - Control Module Wiring
193-EIOGP-_ _-_ _ _
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
193-EIO-_ _-_ _ _
A1 R03 R04 A2
IN0
IN1
RELAY 0
Additional Inputs for 193-EIO-63-_ _ _
A1 R03 R04 A2
IN0
IN1
RELAY 0
Additional Inputs for 193-EIOGP-42-_ _ _
A1 A1
A2
(+) (-)
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
RELAY 1 RELAY 2
PE R13 R14 R23 R24 A1 A1 A2
(+) (-)
IN2
IN3
IT1
PTC
IT2
PE R13
RELAY 1
R14 S1
Ground
Fault
S2
+t
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
51
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
Expansion Digital Module
Figure 42 - E300 Expansion Digital Module Terminal Designations
IN2 IN3
IN0 IN1 INC
Table 6 - E300 Expansion Digital Module Wire Size and Torque Specifications
Wire Type
Stranded/Solid [AWG]
Flexible-Stranded with Ferrule Metric
Coarse-Stranded/Solid Metric
Conductor Torque
Single
Multiple
(stranded only)
Single
Multiple
Single
Multiple
Cat. No.
193-EXP-DIO-42-_ _ _
24...12 AWG
5 lb-in
24...16 AWG
5 lb-in
0.25…2.5 mm
2
0.55 N•m
0.5...0.75 mm
2
0.55 N•m
0.2...2.5 mm
2
0.55 N•m
0.2...1.5 mm
2
0.55 N•m
52
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Figure 43 - E300 Expansion Digital Module Wiring Diagram
R04 R14 RC3
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
+
Source
-
IN0 IN1 IN2 IN3 INC
Expansion Analog Module
Figure 44 - E300 Expansion Analog Module Terminal Designations
OUT+OUT-
IN2+ IN2- RS2
IN1+ IN1- RS1
IN0+ IN0- RS0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
53
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
Table 7 - E300 Expansion Analog Module Wire Size and Torque Specifications
Wire Type
Stranded/Solid [AWG]
Flexible-Stranded with Ferrule Metric
Coarse-Stranded/Solid Metric
Conductor Torque
Single
Multiple
(stranded only)
Single
Multiple
Single
Multiple
Cat. No.
193-EXP-AIO-31
24...12 AWG
5 lb-in
24...16 AWG
5 lb-in
0.25…2.5 mm
0.55 N•m
2
0.5...0.75 mm
2
0.55 N•m
0.2...2.5 mm
2
0.55 N•m
0.2...1.5 mm
2
0.55 N•m
Figure 45 - E300 Expansion Analog I/O Modules 193-EXP-AIO-__
Analog Current Input
+
24V DC
Power
Supply
-
Current
Input
Device
INx+
INx-
Analog Voltage Input
+V INx+
-V
INx-
2 Wire RTD
INx+
3 Wire RTD
INx+
INx-
RSx
INx-
Analog Voltage or Current Output
Out+
Out-
+
Device
-
54
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Expansion Power Supply
Figure 46 - E300 Expansion Power Supply Terminal Designations
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
A1 A2
Table 8 - E300 Expansion Power Supply Wire Size and Torque Specifications
Wire Type
Stranded/Solid [AWG]
Flexible-Stranded with Ferrule Metric
Coarse-Stranded/Solid Metric
Conductor Torque
Single
Multiple
(stranded only)
Single
Multiple
(stranded only)
Single
Multiple
(stranded only)
Cat. No.
193-EXP-PS-_ _
24...12 AWG
5 lb-in
24...16 AWG
5 lb-in
0.25…2.5 mm
2
0.55 N•m
0.5...0.75 mm
2
0.55 N•m
0.2...2.5 mm
2
0.55 N•m
0.2...1.5 mm
2
0.55 N•m
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
55
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
Figure 47 - E300 Expansion Power Supply Wiring Diagram
A1 A2
+
-
Grounding
The following grounding recommendations are provided to help ensure EMC requirements during installation
.
•
The earth ground terminal of the E300 relay is a convenience terminal for the green shield wire of the Cat. No. 193-ECM-ETR. The E300 Control
Module does not make an electrical connection to this terminal.
•
Wire the green shield wire of the Cat. No. 193-ECM-ETR into the earth ground terminal of the E300 control module.
•
Installations that employ an external ground fault sensor shall ground the cable shield at the sensor with no connection made at the E300 relay.
•
The PTC thermistor cable shield shall be grounded at the E300 relay with no connection made at the opposite end.
Short-Circuit Ratings
The E300 relay is suitable for use on circuits capable of delivering not more than the RMS symmetrical amperes listed in the following tables.
Table 9 - Standard Fault Short Circuit Ratings per UL60947-4-1 and CSA 22.2 No. EN60947-4-1
Sensing Module Cat. No.
Contactor Cat. No. Max. Starter FLC [A] Max. Available Fault
193-ESM-___-30A-P — — 5000
193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT
193-ESM-___-30A-T
193-ESM-___-30A-E3T
193-ESM-___-60A-P — —
193-ESM-___-60A-T
193-ESM-___-60A-E3T
193-ESM-___-30A-C23
193-ESM-___-30A-C55
193-ESM-___-60A-C55
100-C09
100-C12
100-C16
100-C23
100-C30
100-C37
100-C43
100-C55
43
55
30
37
16
23
9
12
600 110
225
90
200
200
Max. Listed Circuit
Breaker Size [A]
110
225
90
200
200
56
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
Sensing Module Cat. No.
Contactor Cat. No. Max. Starter FLC [A] Max. Available Fault
592-ESM-___-30A-S2 500_-A_
500_-B_
18
27
5000
592-ESM-___-60A-S2
193-ESM-___-100A-P
193-ESM-___-100A-T
193-ESM-___-100A-E3T
193-ESM-___-100A-C97
500_-C_
—
45
— 10,000
100-C60
100-C72
100-C85
100-C97
85
97
60
72
592-ESM-___-100A-S3
193-ESM-___-200A-P
193-ESM-___-200A-T
193-ESM-___-200A-D180
500_-D_
—
90
—
592-ESM-___-200A-S4
100-D115
100-D140
100-D180
500_-E_
115
140
180
135
600
600
Table 10 - Short Circuit Ratings per EN60947-4-1
Overload Relay with Sensing Module Cat. No.
Prospective Short-
Circuit Current, I r
[A]
3,000 193-ESM-___-30A-C23
193-ESM-___-30A-C55
193-ESM-___-30A-E3T
592-ESM-___-30A-S2
193-ESM-___-60A-C55
193-ESM-___-60A-E3T
592-ESM-___-60A-S2
193-ESM-___-30A-T
193-ESM-___-60A-T
193-ESM-___-30A-P
193-ESM-___-60A-P
193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT
193-ESM-___-100A-C97
193-ESM-___-100A-E3T
193-ESM-___-100A-P
193-ESM-___-100A-T
592-ESM-___-100A-S3
193-ESM-___-200A-D180
193-ESM-___-200A-P
193-ESM-___-200A-T
592-ESM-___-200A-S4
5,000
10,000
100
175
400
350
350
600
300
400
Max. Listed Circuit
Breaker Size [A]
100
175
400
350
350
600
250
175
Conditional Short-Circuit
Current, I q
[A]
100,000
Maximum Voltage [V]
690
100,000
100,000
690
690
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
57
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
Sensing Module Cat. No.
193-ESM-___-30A-C23
193-ESM-___-30A-C55,
193-ESM-___-60A-C55
193-ESM-___-100A-C97
193-ESM-___-200A-D180
Contactor Cat. No.
100-C60
100-C72
100-C85
100-C97
100-D115
100-D140
100-D180
100-C09
100-C12
100-C16
100-C23
100-C30
100-C37
100-C43
100-C55
Table 11 - High Fault Short Circuit Ratings Using Standalone Overload Relays When Protected by
Fuses per UL60947-4-1 and CSA 22.2 No. EN60947-4-1
Sensing Module Cat. No.
193-ESM-___-30A-P
193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT
193-ESM-___-30A-T
193-ESM-___-30A-E3T
193-ESM-___-60A-P
193-ESM-___-60A-T
193-ESM-___-60A-E3T
193-ESM-___-100A-P
193-ESM-___-100A-T
193-ESM-___-100A-E3T
193-ESM-___-200A-P
193-ESM-___-200A-T
Max. Starter FLC [A]
30
60
100
200
Max. Available Fault
Current [A]
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
Max. Voltage [V]
600
600
600
600
Class J or CC Fuse [A]
60
100
225
400
Table 12 - High Fault Short Circuit Ratings per UL60947-4-1 and CSA 22.2 No. EN60947-4-1 with
Bul. 100-C and 100-D IEC contactors that are protected by fuses
Max. Starter FLC [A]
115
140
180
85
97
60
72
43
55
30
37
16
23
9
12
Max. Available Fault
Current [A]
100,000
Max. Voltage [V]
600
Class J or CC Fuse [A]
200
250
300
80
100
150
200
70
80
50
50
30
30
20
20
58
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
Overload Relay with
Sensing Module Cat. No.
193-ESM-___-30A-C23
193-ESM-___-30A-C23
193-ESM-___-30A-C23
Contactor Cat. No.
100-C09
100-C12
100-C16
100-C23
100-C09
100-C12
100-C16
100-C23
100-C09
100-C12
100-C16
100-C23
Table 13 - Short Circuit Ratings per UL60947-4-1 and CSA 22.2 No. EN60947-4-1 with Bul. 100-C IEC contactors that are protected by Bul. 140U-D circuit breakers
Max. Starter FLC[A]
16
23
9
12
16
23
9
12
16
23
9
12
Max. Available Fault
Current [A]
65,000
35,000
5,000
Max. Voltage [V]
480Y/277V
600Y/347V
600Y/347V
Max. Circuit Breaker
Cat. No. 140U-D6D3-
C30 (30 A)
C30 (30 A)
C30 (30 A)
Sensing Module Cat.
No.
193-ESM-___-30A-C55
193-ESM-___-60A-C55
193-ESM-___-100A-
C97
Contactor Cat.
No.
100-C30
100-C37
100-C43
100-C55
100-C60
100-C72
100-C85
100-C97
Max. Starter
FLC [A]
85
97
60
72
43
55
30
37
Table 14 - High Fault Short Circuit Ratings using Bul. 140MG Circuit Protectors per UL60947-4-1 and CSA 22.2 No. EN60947-4-1
Max. Available Fault Current [kA] Circuit Protector Cat.
480V AC 600V AC
No.
65 25 140MG-H8P-C50
140MG-H8P-C50
140MG-H8P-C50
140MG-H8P-C80
140MG-H8P-D12
140MG-H8P-D12
140MG-H8P-D12
140MG-H8P-D12
Max. Circuit
Protector Current [A]
50
50
50
80
125
125
125
125
Min. Enclosure Size
[in.]
24 x 20 x 8 with two hinges and two multi-turn screw-type latches
24 x 20 x 8 with two hinges and two multi-turn screw-type latches
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
59
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
Table 15 - High Fault Short Circuit Ratings using listed Circuit Breakers per UL60947-4-1 and CSA 22.2 No. EN60947-4-1
Sensing Module Cat. No.
Contactor Cat. No.
Max. Starter FLC [A] Max. Available Fault
193-ESM-___-30A-P
193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT
— — 100,000
193-ESM-___-30A-T
193-ESM-___-30A-E3T
193-ESM-___-60A-P
193-ESM-___-60A-T
193-ESM-___-60A-E3T
193-ESM-___-30A-C23
— —
100-C09
100-C12
100-C16
9
12
16
193-ESM-___-30A-C55
193-ESM-___-60A-C55
592-ESM-___-30A-S2
592-ESM-___-60A-S2
100-C23
100-C30
100-C37
100-C43
100-C55
500_-A_
500_-B_
500_-C_
23
30
37
43
55
18
27
45
600 100
Min. Enclosure
Volume [in
3
]
1547
2142
Table 16 - High Fault Short Circuit Ratings using Bul. 140G circuit breakers per UL60947-4-1 and
CSA 22.2 No. EN60947-4-1
Sensing Module Cat. No.
Contactor Cat. No. Max. Starter FLC [A]
193-ESM-___-100A-C97
193-ESM-___-200A-D180
592-ESM-___-200A-S4
100-C60
100-C72
100-C85
100-C97
100-D115
100-D140
100-D180
500_-E_
60
72
85
97
115
140
180
135
Max. Available Fault Current [kA]
480V 600V
65 25
65 25
Circuit Breaker Cat.
No.
140G-J6_3-D25
Max. Circuit Breaker
Current [A]
250
140G-J6_3-D25 225
22 14 140G-J6_3-D17 175
Table 17 - High Fault Short Circuit Ratings per UL60947-4-1 and CSA 22.2 No. EN60947-4-1 with
Bul. 500 line NEMA contactors that are protected by fuses
Overload Relay with Sensing Module
Cat. No.
592-ESM-___-30A-S2
592-ESM-___-30A-S2
592-ESM-___-30A-S2
592-ESM-___-60A-S2
592-ESM-___-100A-S3
592-ESM-___-200A-S4
Contactor Size
00
0
1
2
3
4
Max. Starter FLC [A]
9
18
27
45
90
135
Max. Available Fault
Current [A]
100,000
Max. Voltage
[V]
600
240
600
240
600
240
600
240
600
240
600
60
200
100
300
200
30
60
30
100
Max. UL Fuse [A]
R J
—
30
20
30
30
100
50
200
100
350
200
500
400
60
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Fuse Coordination
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
The following tables list Type I and Type II Fuse Coordination when used with
Bulletin 100-C and 100-D and Bulletin 500 NEMA Size 00… 4 Contactors.
ATTENTION:
Select the motor branch circuit protection that complies with the
NEC and any other governing regional or local codes.
Overload Relay with
Sensing Module Cat. No.
193-ESM-___-30A-C23
193-ESM-___-30A-C55,
193-ESM-___-60A-C55
193-ESM-___-100A-C97
193-ESM-___-200A-D180
Overload Relay with Sensing
Module Cat. No.
592-ESM-___-30A-S2
592-ESM-___-30A-S2
592-ESM-___-60A-S2
592-ESM-___-100A-S3
592-ESM-___-200A-S4
Table 18 - Type 1 and Type II fuse coordination with Bul. 100-C and 100-D contactors per
EN60947-4-1
Contactor Cat.
No.
100-C09
100-C12
100-C16
100-C23
100-C30
100-C37
100-C43
100-C55
100-C60
100-C72
100-C85
100-C97
100-D115
100-D140
100-D180
60
72
85
43
55
97
115
140
180
Max. Starter
FLC[A]
9
12
16
23
30
37
Prospective Short-Circuit
Current, I r
[A]
1000
3,000
5,000
5,000
10,000
Conditional Short-
Circuit Current, I q
[A]
100,000
100,000
Max. Voltage
[V]
600
600
70
80
80
100
150
200
200
250
300
Type I Class J or
CC Fuse [A]
20
20
30
40
50
50
70
80
80
100
150
200
200
250
300
Type II Class J or CC Fuse [A]
15
20
30
40
50
50
Table 19 - Type 1 and Type II fuse coordination with Bul. 500 NEMA contactors
per EN60947-4-1
Contactor Size Max. Starter FLC[A]
0
1
2
3
4
18
27
45
90
135
Prospective Short-
Circuit Current, I r
[A]
3,000
5,000
10,000
Conditional Short-
Circuit Current, I
[A] q
100,000
Max. Voltage
[V]
Type I Class J
Fuse [A]
Type II Class J
Fuse [A]
600
240
600
200
500
400
30
30
60
200
500
400
30
30
60
Typical Motor Connections
ATTENTION:
When working on energized circuits, DO NOT rely on voltage and current information that is provided by the E300 relay for personal safety.
Always use a portable voltage or current measurement device to measure the signal locally.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
61
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
Three-Phase Direct On-Line (DOL) and Single-Phase Full-voltage
The following wiring diagram illustrates the E300 relay typical motor connections in a three-phase DOL and single-phase full-voltage applications.
Figure 48 - E300 DOL and Single-Phase Full-voltage Connections
Three-Phase Direct-On-Line
Single-Phase Full-Voltage
S.C.P.D.
S.C.P.D.
L 1 L 2
E300
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
L 3
T1
T2
T3
M
L 1 L 2
E300
2/T1 4/T2
6/T3
T1 T2
M
External Line Current
Transformer Application
Current Transformer Ratio
The following E300 relay sensing module catalog numbers can be used with step down current transformers:
•
193-ESM-IG-30A-E3T
•
193-ESM-IG-30A-T
•
193-ESM-IG-30A-P
•
193-ESM-I-30A-E3T
•
193-ESM-I-30A-T
•
193-ESM-I-30A-P
•
193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT
CT Primary (Parameter 263) and CT Secondary (Parameter 264) allows you to identify the turns ratio of the step down current transformers in use. Based on these two configuration parameters, the E300 relay automatically adjusts the measured current. Use the primary current for your FLA settings.
62
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
Table 20 - CT Primary (Parameter 263)
CT Primary (Parameter 263)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
Table 21 - CT Secondary (Parameter 264)
CT Secondary (Parameter 264)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
5
1
65535
UINT
2
1
Amps
5
1
65535
UINT
2
1
Amps
ATTENTION:
Improper configuration of the CT Ratio parameters can make the
E300 relay report inaccurate motor operational data and possible motor damage.
IMPORTANT
The E300 relay trip on a configuration fault when the FLA setting is outside of the legal range of the selected CT Ratio settings. The TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes red 3-long, 8-short blinking pattern.
Provide one CT for each motor phase and connect the CT’s secondary leads to the appropriate sensing module power terminals. Selected CTs must provide the required volt amperes to the secondary load, which includes the E300 Sensing
Module burden of 0.1VA at the rated secondary current and the wiring burden.
The CT must be rated for Protective Relaying to accommodate the high inrush currents associated with motor startup and must be accurate to within ≤±2% over its normal operating range. Typical CT ratings include the following:
•
ANSI USA
•
CSA (Canada)
•
IEC (Europe)
•
Class C5 BO.1
•
Class 10L5
•
5VA Class SP10
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
63
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
64
ATTENTION:
The improper selection of a current transformer can result in the
E300 relay reporting inaccurate motor operational data and possible motor damage. The selected current transformer must be rated for protective relaying applications.
Figure 49 - External Current Transformer Connection
IEC NEMA
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
K1
Primary
Current
Transformers
L1/1 L2/3 L3/5
E300
T1/2 T2/4 T3/6
Primary
Current
Transformers
L1/1 L2/3 L3/5
E300
T1/2 T2/4 T3/6
M
T1
T2
M
T3
The E300 relay voltage-based sensing modules support a wide variety of power systems.
lists the power systems supported by the specific sensing module.
Table 22 - Supported Power Systems
Catalog Number Connection Type Power System
193-ESM-VIG-__-__
592-ESM-VIG-__-__
Direct
193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT Direct
3 PT
2 PT
Single Phase
Delta
Wye
Grounded B Phase Delta
Single Phase
Delta
Wye
Grounded B Phase Delta
Delta
Wye
Single Phase
Open Delta
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
Voltage Mode
Voltage Mode (Parameter 252) determines the method for how voltage is monitored E300 relay. Select the connection type for the appropriate power
system. See Appendix C for wiring diagrams when using step-down potential
transformers with the 193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT sensing module.
Table 23 - Voltage Mode (Parameter 352)
Default Value
Range
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
0 = Delta direct or with PTs
0 = Delta direct or with PTs
1 = Wye direct or with PTs
2 = Delta with Delta to Wye PTs
3 = Wye with Delta to Wye PTs
4 = Delta with Wye to Delta PTs
5 = Wye with Wye to Delta PTs
USINT
Potential (Voltage) Transformer Ratio
The E300 relay sensing module catalog number 193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT can be used with step down potential (voltage) transformers. PT Primary (Parameter
353) and PT Secondary (Parameter 354) allows you to identify the turns ratio of the step down potential (voltage) transformers in use. The E300 relay automatically adjusts the measured voltage based on these two configuration parameters. Use the primary voltage for your voltage protection settings.
Table 24 - PT Primary (Parameter 353)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
480
1
65535
UINT
2
1
Volts
Table 25 - PT Secondary (Parameter 354)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
480
165535
UINT
2
1
Volts
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
65
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
Control Circuits
ATTENTION:
Do not exceed the ratings of the E300 relay’s output and trip relay.
If the coil current or voltage of the contactor exceeds the overload relay’s ratings, an interposing relay must be used.
ATTENTION:
When the power is applied to the E300 relay’s A1 and A2 terminals, the N.O. relay contact that is assigned as a Trip Relay closes after approximately 2 seconds if no trip condition exists.
ATTENTION:
More control circuit protection may be required. See the applicable electrical codes.
The E300 relay can provide motor control logic for many different types of motor starters (see
for more information on Operating Modes). By default, the E300 relay is configured for the Overload-Network operating mode.
The following wiring diagrams are typical control circuits for Non-Reversing and
Reversing Motor starters that use the Overload-Network operating mode when
Relay 0 (terminals R03 and R04) is configured to be a normally closed Trip Relay.
Full-voltage Non-reversing Starter (with Network Control)
Figure 50 - NEMA Nomenclature
Relay 1
R13 R14
A1
M
A2
Relay 0
Configured as a
Trip Relay
1
R03 R04
1
Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
66
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
Figure 51 - CENELEC Nomenclature
L1
Relay 1 R13
R14
Relay 0 Configured as a Trip Relay 2
R03
R04
K
A1
A2
N
2 Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
Full-Voltage Reversing Starter (with Network Control)
Figure 52 - NEMA Nomenclature
Relay 1
REV
R13 R14
Relay 0 Configured as a
Trip Relay
1
A1 A2
FOR
95 96
Relay 2
R23 R24
FOR
1
Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
67
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
Figure 53 - CENELEC Nomenclature
L1
R03
Relay 0
Configured as a
Trip Relay
2
R04
Relay 1
R13
R14
Relay 2
R23
R24
K2
K1
A1
K1
A2
K2
A1
A2
N
2
Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
68
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Chapter
3
Diagnostic Station
Introduction
Navigation Keys
Key
Displaying a Parameter
The E300™ Electronic Overload Relay supports a Diagnostic Station on the E300
Expansion Bus (requires Control Module firmware v3.000 and higher). The
Diagnostic Station allows you to view any E300 relay parameter and edit any configuration parameter. This chapter explains the navigation keys on the
Diagnostic Station, how to view a parameter, how to edit a configuration parameter, and the Diagnostic Station programmable display sequence.
The E300 Diagnostic Station has five navigation keys that are used to navigate through the display menu system and edit configuration parameters.
Name Description
Up Arrow
Down Arrow
Scroll through the display parameters or groups.
Increment or decrement values.
Escape
Select
Enter
Back one step in the navigation menu.
Cancel a change to a configuration parameter value
Select the next bit when viewing a bit enumerated parameter.
Select the next digit when editing a configuration value.
Select the next bit when editing a bit enumerated parameter.
Start the navigation menu.
Advance one step in the navigation menu.
Display the description for a bit enumerated parameter.
Edit a configuration parameter value.
Save the change to the configuration parameter value.
The E300 Diagnostic Station allows you to view parameters by using a group menu system or by a linear list. To start the navigation menu, press the key.
The menu prompts you to view parameters by groups, parameters in a linear list, or E300 relay system information.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
69
Chapter 3
Diagnostic Station
Parameter Group Navigation
To start the navigation menu, press the key. Use the select the Groups navigation method and press .
or keys to
Use the
.
or keys to select the parameter group to display and press
70
Use the group.
or keys to view the parameters that are associated with that
When viewing a bit enumerated parameter, press each bit. Press to view the next bit. Press
to view the description of
to return to the parameter.
Press to return to the parameter group navigation system.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Diagnostic Station
Chapter 3
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout
(Parameter 436) defines, the Diagnostic Station automatically returns to its programmable display sequence.
Linear List Navigation
To start the navigation menu, press the key. Use the select the Linear List navigation method and press .
or keys to
Use the and press
or
.
and keys to select the parameter number to display
Use the or keys to view the next sequential parameter.
When viewing a bit enumerated parameter, press each bit. Press to view the next bit. Press
to view the description of
to return to the parameter.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
71
Chapter 3
Diagnostic Station
72
Press to return to the linear list navigation system.
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout
(Parameter 436) defines, the E300 Diagnostic Station automatically returns to its programmable display sequence.
System Info
The E300 Diagnostic Station can display firmware revision information, view the time and date of the E300 relay virtual clock, and edit the time and date of the
E300 relay virtual clock. To view E300 relay system information, start the navigation menu by pressing
System Info and press .
key. Use the or keys to select
Use the or keys to view the E300 relay system information.
To edit the system date or time, press
keys to select the new value. Press
to save the new system values or press restore the previous system values.
to modify the value. Use the or
to select the next system value. Press
to cancel the modification and
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Diagnostic Station
Chapter 3
Editing Parameters
Press to return to the navigation menu.
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout
(Parameter 436) defines, the E300 Diagnostic Station automatically cancels the modification, restores the previous value, and returns to its programmable display sequence.
Editing a Configuration Parameter
The E300 Diagnostic Station allows you to edit configuration parameters by using a group menu system or by a linear list. To start the navigation menu, press the key. You are prompted to view parameters by groups, parameters in a linear list, or E300 relay system information. Choose the appropriate method and navigate to the parameter to be modified.
Editing a Numeric Parameter
To edit a configuration parameter, press the the or values or press
key to modify the value. Use
keys to select the new value. Press to save the new system
to cancel the modification and restore the previous value.
Press to return to the navigation menu.
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout
(Parameter 436) defines, the E300 Diagnostic Station automatically cancels the modification, restores the previous value, and returns to its programmable display sequence.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
73
Chapter 3
Diagnostic Station
Editing a Bit Enumerated Parameter
When editing a bit enumerated parameter, press the key to view the description of each bit. Use the
Press to edit the next bit. Press
or keys to select the new bit value.
to save the new value or press cancel the modification and restore the previous value.
to
Programmable Display
Sequence
Press to return to the navigation menu.
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout
(Parameter 436) defines, the Diagnostic Station automatically cancels the modification, restores the previous value, and returns to its programmable display sequence.
Display Sequence
The Diagnostic Station of the E300 relay sequentially displays up to seven screens every 5 seconds.
•
Three-phase current
•
Three-phase voltage
•
Total power
•
User-defined screen 1
•
User-defined screen 2
•
User-defined screen 3
•
User-defined screen 4
The three-phase voltage and total power screens are only included in the sequence when the E300 relay has a voltage, current, and ground fault current
(VIG)-based Sensing Module.
74
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Diagnostic Station
Chapter 3
The user-defined screens allow you to select up to two parameters per screen.
See Diagnostic Station User-defined Screens on page 114 to configure the
Screen# and Parameter# (Parameters 428…435).
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout
(Parameter 436) defines, the Diagnostic Station automatically cancels any editing modifications, restores the previous value, and returns to its programmable display sequence.
Stopping the Display Sequence
To stop the display sequence, press sequence through the displays. Press sequence.
. Use the or keys to manually
to return to the automatic display
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout
(Parameter 436) defines, the Diagnostic Station automatically returns to its programmable display sequence.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
75
Chapter 3
Diagnostic Station
Automatic Trip and Warning
Screens
When the E300 relay is in a trip or warning state, the E300 Diagnostic Station automatically displays the trip or warning event.
Press any of the navigation keys ( the automatic display sequence.
, , , , or ) to return to
When the trip or warning event clears, the E300 Diagnostic Station automatically returns to its programmable display sequence.
If another parameter is displayed and you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout (Parameter 436) defines, the Diagnostic Station automatically returns to the trip or warning screen if the trip or warning event is not cleared.
76
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Introduction
Device Modes
Chapter
4
System Operation and Configuration
This chapter provides instructions about how to operate and configure an E300™
Electronic Overload Relay system. This chapter includes settings for Device
Modes, Option Match, Security Policy, I/O Assignments, Expansion Bus Fault,
Emergency Start, and an introduction to Operating Modes.
The E300 relay has five device modes to validate configuration of the device and limit when you can configure the E300 relay, perform a firmware update, and issue commands.
•
Administration Mode
•
Ready Mode
•
Run Mode
•
Test Mode
•
Invalid Configuration Mode
Administration Mode
Administration Mode is a maintenance mode for the E300 relay that allows you to configure parameters, modify security policies, enable web servers (see
page 568 to enable the EtherNet/IP web server), perform firmware updates, and
issue commands.
Follow these steps to enter into Administration Mode:
1.
Set the rotary dials on the E300 Communication Module to the following values
–
For EtherNet/IP set the rotary dials to 0-0-0
–
For DeviceNet set the rotary dials to 7-7
2.
Cycle power on the E300 relay
After commissioning activities and maintenance tasks are completed, return the
E300 relay back to Ready or Run Mode by setting the rotary dials of the E300 communication module back to its previous positions and then cycle power.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
77
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
Ready Mode
Ready Mode is a standby mode for the E300 relay in which the relay is ready to help protect an electric motor and no electrical current has been detected. You can modify configuration parameters, update firmware, and issue commands if the appropriate security policies are enabled. The Power LED on the
Communication Module and Operator Stations flash green and bit 14 in Device
Status 0 (Parameter 20) is set to 1 when the device is in Ready Mode.
Table 26 - Ready Mode Bit Function Detail — Device Status 0 (Parameter 20)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Trip Present
X
X
Function
Warning Present
Invalid Configuration
X
X
X
X
Current Present
GFCurrent Present
Voltage Present
Emergency Start Enabled
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
DeviceLogix Enabled
Feedback Timeout Enabled
Operator Station Present
Voltage Sensing Present
Intern Ground Fault Sensing Present
Extern Ground Fault Sensing Present
PTC Sensing
Ready
Reserved
Run Mode
Run Mode is an active mode for the E300 relay in which the relay is sensing electrical current and is actively protecting an electric motor. Only non-motor protection configuration parameters can be modified if the appropriate security policies are enabled. The Power LED on the Communication Module and
Operator Stations is solid green and bits 3, 4, and/or 5 in Device Status 0
(Parameter 20) are set to 1 when the device is in Run Mode.
78
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Table 27 - Run Mode Bit Function Detail — Device Status 0 (Parameter 20)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
Function
X Trip Present
Warning Present
X
X
X
X
Invalid Configuration
Current Present
GFCurrent Present
Voltage Present
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Emergency Start Enabled
DeviceLogix Enabled
Feedback Timeout Enabled
Operator Station Present
Voltage Sensing Present
Intern Ground Fault Sensing Present
Extern Ground Fault Sensing Present
PTC Sensing
Ready
Reserved
Test Mode
Test Mode is used by installers of motor control centers who are testing and commissioning motor starters with an automation system. A digital input of the
E300 relay is assigned to monitor the Test position of the motor control center enclosure. The Input Assignments (Parameters 196…201) are described later in this chapter.
Anyone who commissions motor starters in an automation system can put their motor control center enclosure into the Test position to activate Test Mode and verify that the digital inputs and relay outputs of the E300 relay are operating properly with the motor starter without energizing power to the motor. If the
E300 relay senses current or voltage in Test Mode, it generates a Test Mode Trip.
Invalid Configuration Mode
Invalid Configuration Mode is an active mode for the E300 relay in which the relay is in a tripped state due to invalid configuration data. Invalid Configuration
Parameter (Parameter 38) indicates the parameter number that is causing the fault. Invalid Configuration Cause (Parameter 39) identifies the reason for
Invalid Configuration Mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
79
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
Table 28 - Invalid Configuration Cause (Parameter 39)
3
4
5
Code
0
1
2
Description
No Error
Value over maximum value
Value under minimum value
Illegal value
L3 Current detected (for single-phase applications)
CopyCat error
The Trip/Warn LED on the Communication Module and Operator Stations flashes a pattern of red, 3 long and 8 short blinks, and bits 0 and 2 in Device
Status 0 (Parameter 20) are set to 1 when the device is in Invalid Configuration
Mode.
Table 29 - Invalid Configuration Mode Bit Function Detail — Device Status 0 (Parameter 20)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Trip Present
X
X
Function
Warning Present
Invalid Configuration
X
X
X
X
Current Present
GFCurrent Present
Voltage Present
Emergency Start Enabled
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
DeviceLogix Enabled
Feedback Timeout Enabled
Operator Station Present
Voltage Sensing Present
Intern Ground Fault Sensing Present
Extern Ground Fault Sensing Present
PTC Sensing
Ready
Reserved
To return to Ready/Run Mode, place a valid configuration value in the parameter that is identified by Invalid Configuration Parameter (Parameter 38) and Invalid
Configuration Cause (Parameter 39). Reset the trip state of the E300 relay by pressing the blue reset button on the Communication Module, via network communication, with the internal web server of the EtherNet/IP communication module, or by an assigned digital input.
Option Match
80
Due to the modular nature of the E300 relay, you can enable the Option Match feature to ensure that the options that were expected for the motor protection application are the ones that are present on the E300 relay system. You can configure an option mismatch to cause a protection trip or provide a warning within the E300 relay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Enable Option Match Protection Trip (Parameter 186)
To enable the Option Match feature to cause a protection trip in the event of an option mismatch, place a (1) in bit position 8 of Parameter 186 (Control Trip
Enable). You can select the specific option match features to cause a protection trip in Parameter 233 (Option Match Action).
Table 30 - Enable Option Match Protection Trip Bit Function Detail— Control Trip Enable
(Parameter 186)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Test Trip Enable
X
X PTC Trip Enable
DeviceLogix Trip Enable
X
X
X
X
Operator Station Trip Enable
Remote Trip Enable
Blocked Start Trip Enable
Hardware Fault Trip Enable
X
X
X
X
X
X
Configuration Trip Enable
Option Match Trip Enable
Feedback Timeout Trip Enable
Expansion Bus Trip Enable
Reserved
Reserved
Nonvolatile Memory Trip Enable
Ready
Reserved
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
81
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
Enable Option Match Protection Warning (Parameter 192)
To enable the Option Match feature to cause a warning in the event of an option mismatch, place a (1) in bit position 8 of Parameter 192 (Control Warning
Enable). You can select the specific option match features to cause a warning in
Parameter 233 (Option Match Action).
Table 31 - Enable Option Match Protection Warning Bit Function Detail— Control Warning
Enable (Parameter 192)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
X
X
X
X
X
Function
Reserved
Reserved
DeviceLogix Warning Enable
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Option Match Warning Enable
Feedback Timeout Warning Enable
Expansion Bus Warning Enable
Number Of Starts Warning Enable
Operating Hours Warning Enable
Reserved
Control Module Type (Parameter 221)
The E300 relay offers six different control modules. Place the value of the expected control module into Parameter 221. A value of (0) disables the Option
Match feature for the control module.
Table 32 - Control Module Type (Parameter 221)
Code Description
0 Ignore
1 6 Inputs, 24V DC / 3 Relay Outputs
2 4 Inputs, 110-120V AC 50/60Hz / 3 Relay Outputs
Control Module Cat. No.
—
193-EIO-63-24D
193-EIO-43-120
3 4 Inputs, 220-240V AC 50/60Hz / 3 Relay Outputs
4 4 Inputs, 24V DC / 2 Relay Outputs / External Ground Fault / PTC
193-EIO-43-240
193-EIOGP-42-24D
5 2 Inputs, 110-120V AC 50/60Hz / 2 Relay Outputs / External Ground Fault / PTC 193-EIOGP-22-120
6 2 Inputs, 220-240V AC 50/60Hz / 2 Relay Outputs / External Ground Fault / PTC 193-EIOGP-22-240
82
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Sensing Module Type (Parameter 222)
The E300 relay offers 12 different sensing modules. Place the value of the expected sensing module into Parameter 222. A value of (0) disables the Option
Match feature for the sensing module.
Table 33 - Sensing Module Type (Parameter 222)
9
10
7
8
11
12
5
6
3
4
Code
0
1
2
Description
Ignore
Voltage / Current 0.5…30 A / Ground Fault
Voltage / Current 6…60 A / Ground Fault
Voltage / Current 10…100 A / Ground Fault
Voltage / Current 20…200 A / Ground Fault
Current 0.5…30 A / Ground Fault
Current 6…60 A / Ground Fault
Current 10…100 A / Ground Fault
Current 20…200 A / Ground Fault
Current 0.5…30 A
Current 6…60 A
Current 10…100 A
Current 20…200 A
Sensing Module Cat. No.
—
193-ESM-VIG-30A-__ or 592-ESM-VIG-30A-__
193-ESM-VIG-60A-__ or 592-ESM-VIG-60A-__
193-ESM-VIG-100A-__ or 592-ESM-VIG-100A-__
193-ESM-VIG-200A-__ or 592-ESM-VIG-200A-__
193-ESM-IG-30A-__ or 592-ESM-IG-30A-__
193-ESM-IG-60A-__ or 592-ESM-IG-60A-__
193-ESM-IG-100A-__ or 592-ESM-IG-100A-__
193-ESM-IG-200A-__ or 592-ESM-IG-200A-__
193-ESM-I-30A-__ or 592--ESM-I-30A-__
193-ESM-I-60A-__ or 592--ESM-I-60A-__
193-ESM-I-100A-__ or 592--ESM-I-100A-__
193-ESM-I-200A-__ or 592--ESM-I-200A-__
Communication Module Type (Parameter 223)
The E300 relay offers two different communication modules. Place the value of the expected communication module into Parameter 223. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for the communication module.
Table 34 - Communication Module Type (Parameter 223)
Code Description
0
1
2
Ignore
EtherNet/IP with Dual Port Switch supporting DLR
DeviceNet
Communication Module Cat. No.
—
193-ECM-ETR
193-ECM-DNT
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
83
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
Operator Station Type (Parameter 224)
The E300 relay offers two different types of operator stations. Place the value of the expected operator station into Parameter 224. A value of (0) disables the
Option Match feature for the operator station. A value of (1),
“No Operator
Station”
, makes the operator station not allowed on the Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting an operator station to the E300 relay system.
Table 35 - Operator Station Type (Parameter 224)
Code Description
0 Ignore
1
2
3
No Operator Station (Operator Station Not Allowed)
Control Station
Diagnostic Station with LCD
Operator Station Cat. No.
—
—
193-EOS-SCS
193-EOS-SDS
Digital I/O Expansion Module 1 Type (Parameter 225)
The E300 relay supports up to four additional Digital I/O expansion modules.
This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 1. There are three different types of
Digital I/O expansion modules. Place the value of the expected Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 1 into Parameter 225. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this Digital I/O expansion module. A value of (1),
“No Digital I/O Expansion Module”
, makes the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 1 not allowed on the Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting a Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital
Module 1 to the E300 relay system.
Table 36 - Digital I/O Expansion Module 1 Type (Parameter 225)
Code Description
0
1
2
Ignore
No Digital I/O Expansion Module (Digital I/O Expansion
Module Not Allowed)
4 Inputs, 24V DC / 2 Relay Outputs
3
4
4 Inputs, 110-120V AC 50/60Hz / 2 Relay Outputs
4 Inputs, 220-240V AC 50/60Hz / 2 Relay Outputs
Digital I/O Expansion Module Cat. No.
—
—
193-EXP-DIO-42-24D
193-EXP-DIO-42-120
193-EXP-DIO-42-240
84
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Digital I/O Expansion Module 2 Type (Parameter 226)
The E300 relay supports up to four additional Digital I/O expansion modules.
This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 2. There are three different types of
Digital I/O expansion modules. Place the value of the expected Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 2 into Parameter 226. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this Digital I/O expansion module. A value of (1),
“No Digital I/O Expansion Module”
, makes the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 2 not allowed on the Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting a Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 2 to the E300 relay system.
Table 37 - Digital I/O Expansion Module 2 Type (Parameter 226)
Code Description
0
1
2
Ignore
No Digital I/O Expansion Module (Digital I/O Expansion
Module Not Allowed)
4 Inputs, 24V DC / 2 Relay Outputs
3
4
4 Inputs, 110-120V AC 50/60Hz / 2 Relay Outputs
4 Inputs, 220-240V AC 50/60Hz / 2 Relay Outputs
Digital I/O Expansion Module Cat. No.
—
—
193-EXP-DIO-42-24D
193-EXP-DIO-42-120
193-EXP-DIO-42-240
Digital I/O Expansion Module 3 Type (Parameter 227)
The E300 relay supports up to four additional Digital I/O expansion modules.
This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 3. There are three different types of
Digital I/O expansion modules. Place the value of the expected Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 3 into Parameter 227. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this Digital I/O expansion module. A value of (1),
“No Digital I/O Expansion Module”
, makes the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 3 not allowed on the Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting a Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 3 to the E300 relay system.
Table 38 - Digital I/O Expansion Module 3 Type (Parameter 227)
2
3
4
Code Description
0 Ignore
1
No Digital I/O Expansion Module (Digital I/O Expansion
Module Not Allowed)
4 Inputs, 24V DC / 2 Relay Outputs
4 Inputs, 110-120V AC 50/60Hz / 2 Relay Outputs
4 Inputs, 220-240V AC 50/60Hz / 2 Relay Outputs
Digital I/O Expansion Module Cat. No.
—
—
193-EXP-DIO-42-24D
193-EXP-DIO-42-120
193-EXP-DIO-42-240
Digital I/O Expansion Module 4 Type (Parameter 228)
The E300 relay supports up to four additional Digital I/O expansion modules.
This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Digital I/O
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
85
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration expansion module set to Digital Module 4. There are three different types of
Digital I/O expansion modules. Place the value of the expected Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 4 into Parameter 228. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this Digital I/O expansion module. A value of (1),
“No Digital I/O Expansion Module ”
, makes the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 4 not allowed on the Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting a Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital
Module 4 to the E300 relay system.
Table 39 - Digital I/O Expansion Module 4 Type (Parameter 228)
Code Description
0
1
2
Ignore
No Digital I/O Expansion Module (Digital I/O Expansion
Module Not Allowed)
4 Inputs, 24V DC / 2 Relay Outputs
3
4
4 Inputs, 110-120V AC 50/60Hz / 2 Relay Outputs
4 Inputs, 220-240V AC 50/60Hz / 2 Relay Outputs
Digital I/O Expansion Module Cat. No.
—
—
193-EXP-DIO-42-24D
193-EXP-DIO-42-120
193-EXP-DIO-42-240
Analog I/O Expansion Module 1 Type (Parameter 229)
The E300 relay supports up to four additional Analog I/O expansion modules.
This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 1. There is one type of Analog I/O expansion module. Place the value of the expected Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 1 into Parameter 229. A value of (0) disables the Option
Match feature for this Analog I/O expansion module. A value of (1),
“No Analog
I/O Expansion Module”
, makes the Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog
Module 1 not allowed on the Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting an Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 1 to the E300 relay system.
Table 40 - Analog I/O Expansion Module 1 Type (Parameter 229)
Code Description
0 Ignore
1
2
No Analog I/O Expansion Module (Analog I/O Expansion
Module Not Allowed)
3 Universal Analog Inputs / 1 Analog Output
Analog I/O Expansion Module Cat. No.
—
—
193-EXP-AIO-31
86
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Analog I/O Expansion Module 2 Type (Parameter 230)
The E300 relay supports up to four additional Analog I/O expansion modules.
This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 2. There is one type of Analog I/O expansion module. Place the value of the expected Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 2 into Parameter 230. A value of (0) disables the Option
Match feature for this Analog I/O expansion module. A value of (1),
“No Analog
I/O Expansion Module”
, makes the Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog
Module 2 not allowed on the Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting an Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 2 to the E300 relay system.
Table 41 - Analog I/O Expansion Module 2 Type (Parameter 230)
Code Description
0
1
2
Ignore
No Analog I/O Expansion Module (Analog I/O Expansion
Module Not Allowed)
3 Universal Analog Inputs / 1 Analog Output
Analog I/O Expansion Module Cat. No.
—
—
193-EXP-AIO-31
Analog I/O Expansion Module 3 Type (Parameter 231)
The E300 relay supports up to four additional Analog I/O expansion modules.
This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 3. There is one type of Analog I/O expansion module. Place the value of the expected Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 3 into Parameter 231. A value of (0) disables the Option
Match feature for this Analog I/O expansion module. A value of (1),
“No Analog
I/O Expansion Module”
, makes the Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog
Module 3 not allowed on the Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting an Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 3 to the E300 relay system.
Table 42 - Analog I/O Expansion Module 3 Type (Parameter 231)
Code Description
0 Ignore
1
2
No Analog I/O Expansion Module (Analog I/O Expansion
Module Not Allowed)
3 Universal Analog Inputs / 1 Analog Output
Analog I/O Expansion Module Cat. No.
—
—
193-EXP-AIO-31
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
87
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
Analog I/O Expansion Module 4 Type (Parameter 232)
The E300 relay supports up to four additional Analog I/O expansion modules.
This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 4. There is one type of Analog I/O expansion module. Place the value of the expected Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 4 into Parameter 232. A value of (0) disables the Option
Match feature for this Analog I/O expansion module. A value of (1),
“No Analog
I/O Expansion Module”
, makes the Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog
Module 4 not allowed on the Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting an Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 4 to the E300 relay system.
Table 43 - Analog I/O Expansion Module 4 Type (Parameter 232)
Code Description
0
1
2
Ignore
No Analog I/O Expansion Module (Analog I/O Expansion
Module Not Allowed)
3 Universal Analog Inputs / 1 Analog Output
Analog I/O Expansion Module Cat. No.
—
—
193-EXP-AIO-31
Option Match Action (Parameter 233)
The Option Match feature for the E300 relay allows you to specify an action when there is an option mismatch—Protection Trip or Warning. Place a (0) in the appropriate bit position for a warning, and place a (1) in the appropriate bit position to cause a protection trip if there is an option mismatch.
Table 44 - Option Match Action (Parameter 233) Bit Function Detail
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Control Module Mismatch Action
X
X
X
Sensing Module Mismatch Action
Communication Module Mismatch
Action
Operator Station Mismatch Action
X Digital Module 1 Mismatch Action
X
X
X
X
Digital Module 2 Mismatch Action
Digital Module 3 Mismatch Action
Digital Module 4 Mismatch Action
Analog Module 1 Mismatch Action
X
X
X Analog Module 2 Mismatch Action
Analog Module 3 Mismatch Action
Analog Module 4 Mismatch Action
Security Policy
88
The E300 relay has a security policy that can be used to prevent anyone with malicious intent to potentially damage a motor or piece of equipment. By default,
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
you can only modify the security policy when the E300 relay is in Administration
to learn how to enable Administration Mode).
Table 45 - Security Policy (Parameter 211) Bit Function Detail
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Device Configuration Enable
X
X Device Reset Enable
Firmware Update Enable
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
X
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Security Policy Config Enable
Device Configuration Policy
The Device Configuration Policy allows you to send external message instructions via a communication network to write values to configuration parameters. When this policy is disabled, all external message instructions with configuration data return a communication error when the E300 relay is in Ready
Mode or Run Mode.
Device Reset Policy
The Device Reset Policy allows you to send external message instruction via a communication network to perform a soft device reset when the E300 relay is in
Ready Mode. When this policy is disabled, all external reset message instructions return a communication error when the E300 relay is in Ready Mode or Run
Mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
89
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
I/O Assignments
Firmware Update Policy
The Firmware Update Policy allows you to update the internal firmware of the communication module and control module via ControlFlash when the E300 relay is in Ready Mode. When this policy is disabled, firmware updates return a communication error when the E300 relay is in Ready Mode or Run Mode.
Security Configuration Policy
The Security Configuration Policy allows you to modify the Security Policy of the E300 relay in Ready Mode. When this policy is disabled, the Security Policy can only be modified when the E300 relay is in Administration Mode.
The E300 relay has native digital inputs and relay outputs in the Control Module.
This I/O can be assign to dedicated functions. The following sections list the function assignments for the available Control Module I/O.
Input Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 196)
Input Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 196) allows you to assign this digital input for the following functions:
3
9
10
7
8
4
5
6
11
12
13
0
1
2
Value
Table 46 - Input Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 196)
Assignment
Normal
Trip Reset
Remote Trip
Activate FLA2
Force Snapshot
Emergency Start
Test Mode
L1 Line Loss Arm
L2 Line Loss Arm
L3 Line Loss Arm
L1 L2 Line Loss Arm
Description
Function as a digital input
Reset the E300 relay when it is in a tripped state
Force the E300 relay to go into a tripped state
Use the value in FLA2 Setting (Parameter 177) for the current-based protection algorithms
Force the E300 relay to update its Snapshot log
Issue an Emergency Start command
Enable Test Mode monitoring
Activate L1 Line Loss Protection
Activate L2 Line Loss Protection
Activate L3 Line Loss Protection
Activate L1 and L2 Line Loss Protection
L2 L3 Line Loss Arm
L1 L3 Line Loss Arm
Activate L2 and L3 Line Loss Protection
Activate L1 and L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L2 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L1, L2, and L3 Line Loss Protection
90
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Input Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 197)
Input Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 197) allows you to assign this digital input for the following functions:
3
9
10
7
8
4
5
6
11
12
13
0
1
2
Value
Table 47 - Input Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 197)
Assignment
Normal
Trip Reset
Remote Trip
Activate FLA2
Description
Function as a digital input
Reset the E300 relay when it is in a tripped state
Force the E300 relay to go into a tripped state
Use the value in FLA2 Setting (Parameter 177) for the current-based protection algorithms
Force the E300 relay to update its Snapshot log Force Snapshot
Emergency Start
Test Mode
L1 Line Loss Arm
L2 Line Loss Arm
Issue an Emergency Start command
Enable Test Mode monitoring
Activate L1 Line Loss Protection
Activate L2 Line Loss Protection
L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L2 Line Loss Arm Activate L1 and L2 Line Loss Protection
L2 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L2 and L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L1 and L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L2 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L1, L2, and L3 Line Loss Protection
Input Pt02 Assignment (Parameter 198)
Input Pt02 Assignment (Parameter 198) allows you to assign this digital input for the following functions:
Table 48 - Input Pt02 Assignment (Parameter 198)
0
1
2
3
10
11
8
9
12
13
6
7
4
5
Value Assignment
Normal
Trip Reset
Remote Trip
Activate FLA2
Force Snapshot
Emergency Start
Test Mode
L1 Line Loss Arm
L2 Line Loss Arm
L3 Line Loss Arm
Function as a digital input
Description
Reset the E300 relay when it is in a tripped state
Force the E300 relay to go into a tripped state
Use the value in FLA2 Setting (Parameter 177) for the current-based protection algorithms
Force the E300 relay to update its Snapshot log
Issue an Emergency Start command
Enable Test Mode monitoring
Activate L1 Line Loss Protection
Activate L2 Line Loss Protection
Activate L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L2 Line Loss Arm Activate L1 and L2 Line Loss Protection
L2 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L2 and L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L1 and L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L2 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L1, L2, and L3 Line Loss Protection
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
91
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
92
Input Pt03 Assignment (Parameter 199)
Input Pt03 Assignment (Parameter 199) allows you to assign this digital input for the following functions:
Table 49 - Input Pt03 Assignment (Parameter 199)
3
9
10
7
8
4
5
6
11
12
13
0
1
2
Value Assignment
Normal
Trip Reset
Remote Trip
Activate FLA2
Description
Function as a digital input
Reset the E300 relay when it is in a tripped state
Force the E300 relay to go into a tripped state
Use the value in FLA2 Setting (Parameter 177) for the current-based protection algorithms
Force the E300 relay to update its Snapshot log Force Snapshot
Emergency Start
Test Mode
L1 Line Loss Arm
L2 Line Loss Arm
Issue an Emergency Start command
Enable Test Mode monitoring
Activate L1 Line Loss Protection
Activate L2 Line Loss Protection
L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L2 Line Loss Arm Activate L1 and L2 Line Loss Protection
L2 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L2 and L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L1 and L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L2 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L1, L2, and L3 Line Loss Protection
Input Pt04 Assignment (Parameter 200)
Input Pt04 Assignment (Parameter 200) allows you to assign this digital input for the following functions:
Table 50 - Input Pt04 Assignment (Parameter 200)
0
1
2
3
11
12
9
10
13
6
7
4
5
8
Value Assignment
Normal
Trip Reset
Remote Trip
Activate FLA2
Description
Function as a digital input
Reset the E300 relay when it is in a tripped state
Force the E300 relay to go into a tripped state
Use the value in FLA2 Setting (Parameter 177) for the current-based protection algorithms
Force the E300 relay to update its Snapshot log
Issue an Emergency Start command
Force Snapshot
Emergency Start
Test Mode
L1 Line Loss Arm
L2 Line Loss Arm
Enable Test Mode monitoring
Activate L1 Line Loss Protection
Activate L2 Line Loss Protection
L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L2 Line Loss Arm Activate L1 and L2 Line Loss Protection
L2 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L2 and L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L1 and L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L2 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L1, L2, and L3 Line Loss Protection
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Input Pt05 Assignment (Parameter 201)
Input Pt05 Assignment (Parameter 201) allows you to assign this digital input for the following functions:
3
9
10
7
8
4
5
6
11
12
13
0
1
2
Value
Table 51 - Input Pt05 Assignment (Parameter 201)
Assignment
Normal
Trip Reset
Remote Trip
Activate FLA2
Force Snapshot
Emergency Start
Test Mode
L1 Line Loss Arm
L2 Line Loss Arm
L3 Line Loss Arm
L1 L2 Line Loss Arm
Description
Function as a digital input
Reset the E300 relay when it is in a tripped state
Force the E300 relay to go into a tripped state
Use the value in FLA2 Setting (Parameter 177) for the current-based protection algorithms
Force the E300 relay to update its Snapshot log
Issue an Emergency Start command
Enable Test Mode monitoring
Activate L1 Line Loss Protection
Activate L2 Line Loss Protection
Activate L3 Line Loss Protection
Activate L1 and L2 Line Loss Protection
L2 L3 Line Loss Arm
L1 L3 Line Loss Arm
Activate L2 and L3 Line Loss Protection
Activate L1 and L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L2 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L1, L2, and L3 Line Loss Protection
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
93
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202)
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) allows you to assign this relay output for the following functions:
Table 52 - Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202)
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Assignment
Normal
Trip Relay
Control Relay
Trip Alarm
Warning Alarm
Monitor L1 Trip Relay
(1)
Monitor L1 Control Relay
Monitor L2 Control Relay
Monitor L3 Control Relay
Description
Function as a relay output
Function as a normally closed contact until the E300 relay is in a tripped state in which the relay opens. The Trip
Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a combination Normal and Trip Relay. The Control Relay is in a normally open state until the relay is commanded to close by communication or via a DeviceLogix program. When the E300 relay enters into a tripped state, the Control Relay opens and remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a normally open contact until the E300 relay is in a tripped state in which the relay closes. The Trip
Alarm remains closed until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a normally open contact until the E300 relay is in a protection warning state in which the relay closes.
The Warning Alarm remains closed until the protection warning clears.
Function as a normally closed contact until the E300 relay is in a tripped state for a L1 Under Current, L1 Over
Current, or L1 Line Loss in which the relay opens. The Trip Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a normally closed contact until the E300 relay is in a tripped state for a L2 Under Current, L2 Over
Current, or L2 Line Loss in which the relay opens. The Trip Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a normally closed contact until the E300 relay is in a tripped state for a L3 Under Current, L3 Over
Current, or L3 Line Loss in which the relay opens. The Trip Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a combination Normal and Trip Relay. The Control Relay is in a normally open state until the relay is commanded to close by communication or via a DeviceLogix program. When the E300 relay is in a tripped state for a L1 Under Current, L1 Over Current, or L1 Line Loss, the relay opens. The Control Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a combination Normal and Trip Relay. The Control Relay is in a normally open state until the relay is commanded to close by communication or via a DeviceLogix program. When the E300 relay is in a tripped state for a L2 Under Current, L2 Over Current, or L2 Line Loss, the relay opens. The Control Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a combination Normal and Trip Relay. The Control Relay is in a normally open state until the relay is commanded to close by communication or via a DeviceLogix program. When the E300 relay is in a tripped state for a L3 Under Current, L3 Over Current, or L3 Line Loss, the relay opens. The Control Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
(1) Requires Control Module firmware v3.000 or higher
94
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203)
Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203) allows you to assign this relay output for the following functions:
Table 53 - Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203)
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Assignment
Normal
Trip Relay
Control Relay
Trip Alarm
Warning Alarm
Monitor L1 Trip Relay
Monitor L2 Trip Relay
Monitor L3 Trip Relay
(1)
Monitor L1 Control Relay
Monitor L2 Control Relay
Monitor L3 Control Relay
Description
Function as a relay output
Function as a normally closed contact until the E300 relay is in a tripped state in which the relay opens. The Trip
Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a combination Normal and Trip Relay. The Control Relay is in a normally open state until the relay is commanded to close by communication or via a DeviceLogix program. When the E300 relay enters into a tripped state, the Control Relay opens and remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a normally open contact until the E300 relay is in a tripped state in which the relay closes. The Trip
Alarm remains closed until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a normally open contact until the E300 relay is in a protection warning state in which the relay closes.
The Warning Alarm remains closed until the protection warning clears.
Function as a normally closed contact until the E300 relay is in a tripped state for a L1 Under Current, L1 Over
Current, or L1 Line Loss in which the relay opens. The Trip Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a normally closed contact until the E300 relay is in a tripped state for a L2 Under Current, L2 Over
Current, or L2 Line Loss in which the relay opens. The Trip Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a normally closed contact until the E300 relay is in a tripped state for a L3 Under Current, L3 Over
Current, or L3 Line Loss in which the relay opens. The Trip Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a combination Normal and Trip Relay. The Control Relay is in a normally open state until the relay is commanded to close by communication or via a DeviceLogix program. When the E300 relay is in a tripped state for a L1 Under Current, L1 Over Current, or L1 Line Loss, the relay opens. The Control Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a combination Normal and Trip Relay. The Control Relay is in a normally open state until the relay is commanded to close by communication or via a DeviceLogix program. When the E300 relay is in a tripped state for a L2 Under Current, L2 Over Current, or L2 Line Loss, the relay opens. The Control Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a combination Normal and Trip Relay. The Control Relay is in a normally open state until the relay is commanded to close by communication or via a DeviceLogix program. When the E300 relay is in a tripped state for a L3 Under Current, L3 Over Current, or L3 Line Loss, the relay opens. The Control Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
(1) Requires Control Module firmware v3.000 or higher
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
95
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
Output Pt02 Assignment (Parameter 204)
Output Pt02 Assignment (Parameter 204) allows you to assign this relay output for the following functions:
Table 54 - Output Pt02 Assignment (Parameter 204)
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Assignment
Normal
Trip Relay
Control Relay
Trip Alarm
Warning Alarm
Monitor L1 Trip Relay
(1)
Monitor L1 Control Relay
Monitor L2 Control Relay
Monitor L3 Control Relay
Description
Function as a relay output
Function as a normally closed contact until the E300 relay is in a tripped state in which the relay opens. The Trip
Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a combination Normal and Trip Relay. The Control Relay is in a normally open state until the relay is commanded to close by communication or via a DeviceLogix program. When the E300 relay enters into a tripped state, the Control Relay opens and remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a normally open contact until the E300 relay is in a tripped state in which the relay closes. The Trip
Alarm remains closed until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a normally open contact until the E300 relay is in a protection warning state in which the relay closes.
The Warning Alarm remains closed until the protection warning clears.
Function as a normally closed contact until the E300 relay is in a tripped state for a L1 Under Current, L1 Over
Current, or L1 Line Loss in which the relay opens. The Trip Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a normally closed contact until the E300 relay is in a tripped state for a L2 Under Current, L2 Over
Current, or L2 Line Loss in which the relay opens. The Trip Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a normally closed contact until the E300 relay is in a tripped state for a L3 Under Current, L3 Over
Current, or L3 Line Loss in which the relay opens. The Trip Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a combination Normal and Trip Relay. The Control Relay is in a normally open state until the relay is commanded to close by communication or via a DeviceLogix program. When the E300 relay is in a tripped state for a L1 Under Current, L1 Over Current, or L1 Line Loss, the relay opens. The Control Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a combination Normal and Trip Relay. The Control Relay is in a normally open state until the relay is commanded to close by communication or via a DeviceLogix program. When the E300 relay is in a tripped state for a L2 Under Current, L2 Over Current, or L2 Line Loss, the relay opens. The Control Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a combination Normal and Trip Relay. The Control Relay is in a normally open state until the relay is commanded to close by communication or via a DeviceLogix program. When the E300 relay is in a tripped state for a L3 Under Current, L3 Over Current, or L3 Line Loss, the relay opens. The Control Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
(1) Requires Control Module firmware v3.000 or higher
Table 55 - Activate FLA2 with Output Relay (Parameter 209)
Activate FLA2 with Output Relay (Parameter 209) allows you to activate the value in FLA2 Setting (Parameter 177) for the current-based protection algorithms when the assigned output relay is in an energized state.
Table 56 - Activate FLA2 with Output Relay (Parameter 209)
2
3
Value
0
1
Description
Disable
Pt00 Output
Pt01 Output
Pt02 Output
Output Relay Configuration
States
When assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/Control & Trip
Relay, you can configure the E300 relay's output relays to go to a specific safe state when one of following events occur:
•
Protection Fault Mode - when a trip event occurs
96
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
•
Communication Fault Mode - when network communication is lost or an error occurs
•
Communication Idle Mode - when a network scanner changes to Idle mode or a PLC changes to Program mode
IMPORTANT
It is important that you fully understand the use of these parameters and the order of their priority under the conditions of a protection trip, communication fault, and communication idle event.
The default setting for these three modes is to Open/de-energize all E300 output relays that are assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/Control
& Trip Relay.
The E300 output relay states when assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/Control & Trip Relay follow this priority order:
Table 57 - Output Relay Priority
Priority
1
2
3
4
Normal/General Purpose Relay
Output Protection Fault State
Output Communication Fault State
Output Final Fault State
Output Communication Idle State
Control/Control & Trip Relay
Output Communication Fault State
Output Final Fault State
Output Communication Idle State
Output Relay Protection Fault Modes
When the E300 relay has a trip event, you can configure the E300 output relays to go to a specific state (Open or Closed) or ignore the trip event and continue to operate as normal. The parameters that are listed on the following pages configure the Protection Fault Mode for each E300 output relay.
Output Relay 0 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
Output Relay 0 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304) defines how Output
Relay 0 when assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay responds when a trip event occurs.
Table 58 - Output Relay 0 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
Value
0
1
Assignment
GoToPrFltValue
IgnoreIfPossible
Description
Set to Output Relay 0 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
Continue to operate as commanded via the network or DeviceLogix
Output Relay 0 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
Output Relay 0 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305) defines which state
Output Relay 0 should go to when a trip event occurs.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
97
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
Table 59 - Output Relay 0 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Output Relay 0
Close Output Relay 0
Output Relay 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
Output Relay 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310) defines how Output
Relay 1 responds when a trip event occurs when this parameter is assigned as a
Normal/General Purpose Relay.
Table 60 - Output Relay 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
Value
0
1
Assignment
GoToPrFltValue
IgnoreIfPossible
Description
Set to Output Relay 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
Continue to operate as commanded via the network or DeviceLogix
Output Relay 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
Output Relay 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311) defines which state
Output Relay 1 should go to when a trip event occurs.
Table 61 - Output Relay 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Output Relay 1
Close Output Relay 1
Output Relay 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
Output Relay 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316) defines how Output
Relay 2 responds when a trip event occurs when this parameter is assigned as a
Normal/General Purpose Relay.
Table 62 - Output Relay 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
Value
0
1
Assignment
GoToPrFltValue
IgnoreIfPossible
Description
Set to Output Relay 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
Continue to operate as commanded via the network or DeviceLogix
Output Relay 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
Output Relay 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317) defines which state
Output Relay 2 should go to when a trip event occurs.
Table 63 - Output Relay 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Output Relay 2
Close Output Relay 2
98
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Protection Fault Action (Parameter
322) defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 1 responds when a trip event occurs.
Table 64 - Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
Value
0
1
Assignment
GoToPrFltValue
IgnoreIfPossible
Description
Set to Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Protection Fault Value
(Parameter 323)
Continue to operate as commanded via the network or DeviceLogix
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Protection Fault Value
(Parameter 323) defines which state both output relays should go to when a trip event occurs.
Table 65 - Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Close Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Protection Fault Action (Parameter
328) defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 2 responds when a trip event occurs.
Table 66 - Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
Value
0
1
Assignment
GoToPrFltValue
IgnoreIfPossible
Description
Set to Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Protection Fault Value
(Parameter 329)
Continue to operate as commanded via the network or DeviceLogix
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Protection Fault Value (Parameter
329) defines which state both output relays should go to when a trip event occurs.
Table 67 - Digital Expansion Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Close Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Protection Fault Action (Parameter
334) defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 3 responds when a trip event occurs.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
99
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
100
Table 68 - Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
Value
0
1
Assignment
GoToPrFltValue
IgnoreIfPossible
Description
Set to Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Protection Fault Value
(Parameter 335)
Continue to operate as commanded via the network or DeviceLogix
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Protection Fault Value (Parameter
335) defines which state both output relays should go to when a trip event occurs.
Table 69 - Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Close Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Protection Fault Action (Parameter
340) defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 4 responds when a trip event occurs.
Table 70 - Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
Value
0
1
Assignment
GoToPrFltValue
IgnoreIfPossible
Description
Set to Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Protection Fault Value
(Parameter 341)
Continue to operate as commanded via the network or DeviceLogix
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Protection Fault Value (Parameter 341)
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Protection Fault Value (Parameter
341) defines which state both output relays should go to when a trip event occurs.
Table 71 - Digital Expansion Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 341)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Close Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Output Relay Communication Fault Modes
When the E300 relay loses communication, experiences a communication bus fault, or has a duplicate node address, you can configure the E300 output relays with the Communication Fault Mode parameters to go to a specific state (Open or Closed) or hold the last state.
An E300 relay with firmware revision v5.000 or higher supports the Fault Mode
Output State Duration feature, which can be used with redundant network scanners or control systems. The Fault Mode Output State Duration is the time
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
that the E300 output relays can go to a temporary state (Open, Closed, or Hold
Last State) when a communication fault occurs. Configure this temporary state by using the Communication Fault Mode parameters.
If communication between the E300 relay and a network scanner or control system is not restored within the Fault Mode Output State Duration time
(Parameter 561), the E300 output relays go to a final fault state (Open or
Closed), which you configure by using the Final Fault Mode parameters.
If communication between the E300 relay and a network scanner or control system is restored within the Fault Mode Output State Duration time (Parameter
561), the E300 output relays resume with the state commanded by the network scanner or control system.
The parameters that are listed on the following pages configure the
Configuration Fault Mode for each E300 output relay.
Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561) is available in E300 relay firmware v5.000 and higher. This parameter defines the amount of time in seconds that the E300 relay remains in the Communication Fault Mode state when a communication fault occurs. A value of (0) represents forever.
If communication between the E300 relay and a network scanner or control system is not restored within the Fault Mode Output State Duration time the
E300 output relays go to the final fault state, which you configure by using the
Final Fault Mode parameters.
Table 72 - Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0 = Forever
127
SINT
1
1
Sec
Output Relay 0 Communication Fault Action (Parameter 306)
Output Relay 0 Communication Fault Action (Parameter 306) defines how
Output Relay 0 responds when a communication fault occurs when this parameter is assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/Control &
Trip Relay.
Table 73 - Output Relay 0 Communication Fault Action (Parameter 306)
Value
0
1
Assignment
GoToCommFltValue
HoldLastState
Description
Set to Output Relay 0 Communication Fault Value (Parameter 307)
Hold the last commanded state from the network or DeviceLogix
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
101
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
102
Output Relay 0 Communication Fault Value (Parameter 307)
Output Relay 0 Communication Fault Value (Parameter 307) defines which state
Output Relay 0 should go to when a communication fault occurs.
Table 74 - Output Relay 0 Communication Fault Value (Parameter 307)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Output Relay 0
Close Output Relay 0
Output Relay 0 Final Fault Value (Parameter 562)
Output Relay 0 Final Fault Value (Parameter 562) is available in E300 relay firmware v5.000 and higher. This parameter defines which state Output Relay 0 should go to when communication is not restored with the time defined in Fault
Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561).
Table 75 - Output Relay 0 Final Fault Value (Parameter 562)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Output Relay 0
Close Output Relay 0
Output Relay 1 Communication Fault Action (Parameter 312)
Output Relay 1 Communication Fault Action (Parameter 312) defines how
Output Relay 1 responds when a communication fault occurs when this parameter is assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/Control &
Trip Relay.
Table 76 - Output Relay 1 Communication Fault Action (Parameter 312)
Value
0
1
Assignment
GoToCommFltValue
HoldLastState
Description
Set to Output Relay 1 Communication Fault Value (Parameter 313)
Hold the last commanded state from the network or DeviceLogix
Output Relay 1 Communication Fault Value (Parameter 313)
Output Relay 1 Communication Fault Value (Parameter 313) defines which state
Output Relay 1 should go to when a communication fault occurs.
Table 77 - Output Relay 1 Communication Fault Value (Parameter 313)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Output Relay 1
Close Output Relay 1
Output Relay 1 Final Fault Value (Parameter 563)
Output Relay 1 Final Fault Value (Parameter 563) is available in E300 relay firmware v5.000 and higher. This parameter defines which state Output Relay 1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
should go to when communication is not restored with the time defined in Fault
Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561).
Table 78 - Output Relay 1 Final Fault Value (Parameter 563)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Output Relay 1
Close Output Relay 1
Output Relay 2 Communication Fault Action (Parameter 317)
Output Relay 2 Communication Fault Action (Parameter 317) defines how
Output Relay 2 responds when a communication fault occurs when this parameter is assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/Control &
Trip Relay.
Table 79 - Output Relay 2 Communication Fault Action (Parameter 318)
Value
0
1
Assignment
GoToCommFltValue
HoldLastState
Description
Set to Output Relay 2 Communication Fault Value (Parameter 319)
Hold the last commanded state from the network or DeviceLogix
Output Relay 2 Communication Fault Value (Parameter 319)
Output Relay 2 Communication Fault Value (Parameter 319) defines which state
Output Relay 2 should go to when a communication fault occurs.
Table 80 - Output Relay 2 Communication Fault Value (Parameter 319)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Output Relay 2
Close Output Relay 2
Output Relay 2 Final Fault Value (Parameter 564)
Output Relay 2 Final Fault Value (Parameter 564) is available in E300 relay firmware v5.000 and higher. This parameter defines which state Output Relay 2 should go to when communication is not restored with the time defined in Fault
Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561).
Table 81 - Output Relay 2 Final Fault Value (Parameter 564)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Output Relay 2
Close Output Relay 2
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Fault Action (Parameter 324)
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Fault Action
(Parameter 324) defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 1 responds when a communication fault occurs.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
103
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
Table 82 - Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Fault Action (Parameter 324)
Value
0
1
Assignment
GoToCommFltValue
HoldLastState
Description
Set to Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Fault
Value (Parameter 325)
Hold the last commanded state from the network or DeviceLogix
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Fault Value (Parameter 325)
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Fault Value
(Parameter 325) defines which state both output relays should go to when a communication fault occurs.
Table 83 - Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Fault Value (Parameter 325)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Close Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Final Fault Value (Parameter 565)
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Final Fault Value (Parameter 565) is available in E300 relay firmware v5.000 and higher. This parameter defines which state both output relays should go to when communication is not restored with the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561).
Table 84 - Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Final Fault Value (Parameter 565)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Close Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Fault Action (Parameter 330)
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Fault Action
(Parameter 330) defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 2 responds when a communication fault occurs.
Table 85 - Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Fault Action (Parameter 330)
Value
0
1
Assignment
GoToCommFltValue
HoldLastState
Description
Set to Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Fault
Value (Parameter 331)
Hold the last commanded state from the network or DeviceLogix
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Fault Value (Parameter 331)
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Fault Value
(Parameter 331) defines which state both output relays should go to when a communication fault occurs.
104
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Table 86 - Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Fault Value (Parameter 331)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Close Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Final Fault Value (Parameter 566)
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Final Fault Value (Parameter 566) is available in E300 relay firmware v5.000 and higher. This parameter defines which state both output relays should go to when communication is not restored with the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561).
Table 87 - Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Final Fault Value (Parameter 566)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Close Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Fault Action (Parameter 336)
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Fault Action
(Parameter 336) defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 3 responds when a communication fault occurs.
Table 88 - Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Fault Action (Parameter 336)
Value
0
1
Assignment
GoToCommFltValue
HoldLastState
Description
Set to Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Fault
Value (Parameter 337)
Hold the last commanded state from the network or DeviceLogix
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Fault Value (Parameter 337)
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Fault Value
(Parameter 337) defines which state both output relays should go to when a communication fault occurs.
Table 89 - Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Fault Value (Parameter 337)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Close Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Final Fault Value (Parameter 567)
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Final Fault Value (Parameter 567) is available in E300 relay firmware v5.000 and higher. This parameter defines which state both output relays should go to when communication is not restored with the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
105
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
106
Table 90 - Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Final Fault Value (Parameter 567)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Communication Fault Action (Parameter 342)
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Communication Fault Action
(Parameter 342) defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 4 responds when a communication fault occurs.
Table 91 - Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Communication Fault Action (Parameter 342)
Value
0
1
Assignment
GoToCommFltValue
HoldLastState
Description
Set to Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Fault
Value (Parameter 343)
Hold the last commanded state from the network or DeviceLogix
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Communication Fault Value (Parameter 343)
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Communication Fault Value
(Parameter 343) defines which state both output relays should go to when a communication fault occurs.
Table 92 - Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Communication Fault Value (Parameter 343)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Close Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Final Fault Value (Parameter 568)
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Final Fault Value (Parameter 568) is available in E300 relay firmware v5.000 and higher. This parameter defines which state both output relays should go to when communication is not restored with the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561).
Table 93 - Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Final Fault Value (Parameter 568)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Close Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Output Relay Communication Idle Modes
When a network scanner goes into Idle mode or a PLC goes into Program mode while communicating with an E300 relay, you can configure the E300 output relays to go to a specific state (Open or Close) or hold the last state. The parameters that are listed on the following pages configure the Communication
Idle Mode for each E300 output relay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Output Relay 0 Communication Idle Action (Parameter 308)
Output Relay 0 Communication Idle Action (Parameter 308) defines how
Output Relay 0 when assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/
Control & Trip Relay responds when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a programmable logic controller (PLC) goes into Program Mode.
Table 94 - Output Relay 0 Communication Idle Action (Parameter 308)
Value
0
1
Assignment
GoToCommFltValue
HoldLastState
Description
Set to Output Relay 0 Communication Idle Value (Parameter 309)
Hold the last commanded state from the network or DeviceLogix
Output Relay 0 Communication Idle Value (Parameter 309)
Output Relay 0 Communication Idle Value (Parameter 309) defines which state
Output Relay 0 should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a
PLC goes into Program Mode.
Table 95 - Output Relay 0 Communication Idle Value (Parameter 309)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Output Relay 0
Close Output Relay 0
Output Relay 1 Communication Idle Action (Parameter 314)
Output Relay 1 Communication Idle Action (Parameter 314) defines how
Output Relay 1 when assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/
Control & Trip Relay responds when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a
PLC goes into Program Mode.
Table 96 - Output Relay 1 Communication Idle Action (Parameter 314)
Value
0
1
Assignment
GoToCommIdlValue
HoldLastState
Description
Set to Output Relay 1 Communication Idle Value (Parameter 315)
Hold the last commanded state from the network or DeviceLogix
Output Relay 1 Communication Idle Value (Parameter 315)
Output Relay 1 Communication Idle Value (Parameter 315) defines which state
Output Relay 1 should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a
PLC goes into Program Mode.
Table 97 - Output Relay 1 Communication Idle Value (Parameter 315)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Output Relay 1
Close Output Relay 1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
107
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
Output Relay 2 Communication Idle Action (Parameter 320)
Output Relay 2 Communication Idle Action (Parameter 320) defines how
Output Relay 2 when assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/
Control & Trip Relay responds when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a
PLC goes into Program Mode.
Table 98 - Output Relay 2 Communication Idle Action (Parameter 320)
Value
0
1
Assignment
GoToCommIdlValue
HoldLastState
Description
Set to Output Relay 2 Communication Idle Value (Parameter 321)
Hold the last commanded state from the network or DeviceLogix
Output Relay 2 Communication Idle Value (Parameter 321)
Output Relay 2 Communication Idle Value (Parameter 321) defines which state
Output Relay 2 should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a
PLC goes into Program Mode.
Table 99 - Output Relay 2 Communication Idle Value (Parameter 321)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Output Relay 2
Close Output Relay 2
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Idle Action (Parameter 326)
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Idle Action
(Parameter 326) defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 1 responds when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into
Program Mode.
Table 100 - Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Idle Action (Parameter 326)
Value
0
1
Assignment
GoToCommIdlValue
HoldLastState
Description
Set to Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Idle
Value (Parameter 327)
Hold the last commanded state from the network or DeviceLogix
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Idle Value (Parameter 327)
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Idle Value
(Parameter 327) defines which state both output relays should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode.
Table 101 - Output Relay 2 Communication Idle Value (Parameter 327)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Close Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
108
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Idle Action (Parameter 332)
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Idle Action
(Parameter 332) defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 2 responds when network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program
Mode.
Table 102 - Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Idle Action (Parameter 332)
Value
0
1
Assignment
GoToCommIdlValue
HoldLastState
Description
Set to Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Idle
Value (Parameter 333)
Hold the last commanded state from the network or DeviceLogix
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Idle Value (Parameter 333)
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Idle Value
(Parameter 333) defines which state both output relays should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode.
Table 103 - Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Idle Value (Parameter 333)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Close Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Idle Action (Parameter 338)
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Idle Action
(Parameter 338) defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 3 responds when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into
Program Mode.
Table 104 - Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Idle Action (Parameter 338)
Value
0
1
Assignment
GoToCommIdlValue
HoldLastState
Description
Set to Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Idle
Value (Parameter 339)
Hold the last commanded state from the network or DeviceLogix
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Idle Value (Parameter 339)
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Idle Value
(Parameter 339) defines which state both output relays should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode.
Table 105 - Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Idle Value (Parameter 339)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Close Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
109
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
Expansion Bus Fault
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Communication Idle Action (Parameter 344)
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Communication Idle Action
(Parameter 344) defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 4 responds when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into
Program Mode.
Table 106 - Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Communication Idle Action (Parameter 344)
Value
0
1
Assignment
GoToCommIdlValue
HoldLastState
Description
Set to Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Idle
Value (Parameter 345)
Hold the last commanded state from the network or DeviceLogix
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Communication Idle Value (Parameter 345)
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Communication Idle Value
(Parameter 345) defines which state both output relays should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode.
Table 107 - Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Communication Idle Value (Parameter 345)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Open
Closed
Description
Open Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Close Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
The expansion bus of the E300 relay can be used to expand the I/O capabilities of the device with the addition of digital and analog expansion I/O modules. The
Expansion Bus Fault allows you to have the E300 relay go into a Trip or Warning state when established Expansion Bus communication is disrupted between the
Control Module and any digital and analog expansion I/O modules.
The Expansion Bus Fault is used when the Option Match feature is not enabled for the digital and/or analog expansion I/O modules. The Expansion Bus Fault only monitors for communication disruptions between the Control Module and digital and/or analog expansion I/O modules. Expansion bus communication disruptions between the Control Module and Operator Station do not affect the
Expansion Bus fault.
Expansion Bus Trip
Expansion Bus Trip is enabled by setting Control Trip Enable (Parameter 186) bit 10 to 1. When communication is disrupted between the Control Module and digital and/or analog expansion I/O modules, the E300 relay goes into a tripped
110
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
state in which the Trip/Warn LED on the Communication Module and
Operator station blinks a red 3 long and 11 short blinking pattern.
Table 108 - Expansion Bus Trip Bit Function Detail— Control Trip Enable (Parameter 186)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Function
X Test Trip Enable
PTC Trip Enable
DeviceLogix Trip Enable
Operator Station Trip Enable
Remote Trip Enable
Blocked Start Trip Enable
Hardware Fault Trip Enable
Configuration Trip Enable
Option Match Trip Enable
Feedback Timeout Trip Enable
Expansion Bus Trip Enable
Reserved
Reserved
Nonvolatile Memory Trip Enable
Ready
Reserved
To return to Ready/Run Mode, verify that the expansion bus cables are properly plugged into the Bus In and Bus Out ports of all expansion modules. When all of the expansion I/O modules’ status LEDs are solid green, reset the trip state of the
E300 relay by pressing the blue reset button on the Communication Module, via network communication, with the internal web server of the EtherNet/IP communication module, or by an assigned digital input.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
111
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
Expansion Bus Warning
Expansion Bus Warning is enabled by setting Control Warning Enable
(Parameter 192) bit 10 to 1. When communication is disrupted between the
Control Module and digital and/or analog expansion I/O modules, the E300 relay goes into a warning state in which the Trip/Warn LED on the
Communication Module and Operator station blinks a yellow 3 long and 11 short blinking pattern.
Table 109 - Expansion Bus Warning Bit Function Detail— Control Warning Enable (Parameter
192)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Function
Reserved
PTC Warning Enable
DeviceLogix Warning Enable
Operator Station Warning Enable
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Option Match Warning Enable
Feedback Timeout Warning Enable
Expansion Bus Warning Enable
Number Of Starts Warning Enable
Operating Hours Warning Enable
Reserved
To return to Ready/Run Mode, verify that the expansion bus cables are properly plugged into the Bus In and Bus Out ports of all expansion modules. When all of the expansion I/O modules’ status LEDs are solid green, the warning state of the
E300 relay automatically clears.
Emergency Start
In an emergency, it may be necessary to start a motor even if a protection fault or a communication fault exists. The trip condition may be the result of a thermal overload condition or the number of starts exceeded its configuration. These conditions can be overridden using the Emergency Start feature of the E300 relay.
IMPORTANT
Activating Emergency Start inhibits overload and blocked start protection.
Running in this mode can cause equipment overheating and fire.
To enable the Emergency Start feature in the E300 relay, set the Emergency Start
Enable (Parameter 216) to Enable.
112
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Table 110 - Emergency Start (Parameter 216)
Value
0
1
Description
Disable
Enable
Configure one of the Ptxx Input Assignments (Parameters 196…201) to
Emergency Start and activate the corresponding digital input.
Table 111 - Emergency Start Input PTXX Assignment (Parameters 196…201)
3
4
5
0
1
2
Value Assignment
Normal
Trip Reset
Remote Trip
Activate FLA2
Force Snapshot
Emergency Start
Description
Function as a digital input
Reset the E300 relay when it is in a tripped state
Force the E300 relay to go into a tripped state
Use the value in FLA2 Setting (Parameter 177) for the current-based protection algorithms
Force the E300 relay to update its Snapshot log
Issue an Emergency Start command
You can also use a network command to activate the Emergency Start feature. For the EtherNet/IP communication module, you would set the Emergency Start bit
to 1 in Output Assembly 144. See EtherNet/IP Communication on page 559 for
more information on EtherNet/IP communication.
When the Emergency Start feature is active, the following actions occur in the
E300 relay:
•
Protection trips are ignored
•
Output relays configured as Trip Relays are put into closed state
•
Normal operation resumes with any Normal or Control Relay assigned output relay
•
The Emergency Start Active bit is set to 1 in Device Status 0
(Parameter 20) bit 6
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
113
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
Table 112 - Emergency Start Bit Function Detail— Device Status 0 (Parameter 20)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
Function
X Trip Present
Warning Present
X
X
X
X
Invalid Configuration
Current Present
GFCurrent Present
Voltage Present
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Emergency Start Enabled
DeviceLogix Enabled
Feedback Timeout Enabled
Operator Station Present
Voltage Sensing Present
Intern Ground Fault Sensing Present
Extern Ground Fault Sensing Present
PTC Sensing
Ready
Reserved
Language
The E300 relay with firmware v5.000 and higher supports multiple languages for its Diagnostic Station and web server. Parameter text is displayed in the selected language.
Language (Parameter 212)
Language (Parameter 212) displays the E300 relay parameter text is displayed in the selected language.
Table 113 - Language (Parameter 212)
4
5
2
3
Value
0
1
6
7
8
Assignment
English
Francais
Espanol
Italiano
Deutsch
Portugues
Chinese
Japanese
Korean
Description
Displays parameter text in English
Displays parameter text in French
Displays parameter text in Spanish
Displays parameter text in Italian
Displays parameter text in German
Displays parameter text in Portuguese
Displays parameter text in Chinese
Displays parameter text in Japanese
Displays parameter text in Korean
Diagnostic Station Userdefined Screens
The Diagnostic Station has four user-defined screens that are part of the its display sequence, in which you can define up to two parameters per screen.
114
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
User-defined Screen 1
User-defined Screen 1 – Parameter 1
User-defined Screen 1 - Parameter 1 (Parameter 428) is the E300 parameter number to display for the first parameter in user-defined screen 1. You can select one of the 560 available E300 relay parameters.
Table 114 - Screen 1 - Parameter 1 (Parameter 428)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
0
560
UINT
2
1
User-defined Screen 1 – Parameter 2
User-defined Screen 1 - Parameter 2 (Parameter 429) is the E300 parameter number to display for the second parameter in user-defined screen 1. You can select one of the 560 available E300 relay parameters.
Table 115 - Screen 1 - Parameter 2 (Parameter 429)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
50
0
560
UINT
2
1
User-defined Screen 2
User-defined Screen 2 – Parameter 1
User-defined Screen 2 - Parameter 1 (Parameter 430) is the E300 parameter number to display for the first parameter in user-defined screen 2. You can select one of the 560 available E300 relay parameters.
Table 116 - Screen 2 - Parameter 1 (Parameter 430)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
2
0
560
UINT
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
115
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
User-defined Screen 2 – Parameter 2
User-defined Screen 2 - Parameter 2 (Parameter 431) is the E300 parameter number to display for the second parameter in user-defined screen 2. You can select one of the 560 available E300 relay parameters.
Table 117 - Screen 2 - Parameter 2 (Parameter 431)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
3
0
560
UINT
User-defined Screen 3
User-defined Screen 3 – Parameter 1
User-defined Screen 3 - Parameter 1 (Parameter 432) is the E300 parameter number to display for the first parameter in user-defined screen 3. You can select one of the 560 available E300 relay parameters.
Table 118 - Screen 3 - Parameter 1 (Parameter 432)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
51
0
560
UINT
2
1
User-defined Screen 3 – Parameter 2
User-defined Screen 3 - Parameter 2 (Parameter 433) is the E300 parameter number to display for the second parameter in user-defined screen 3. You can select one of the 560 available E300 relay parameters.
Table 119 - Screen 3 - Parameter 2 (Parameter 433)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
52
0
560
UINT
2
1
116
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
User-defined Screen 4
User-defined Screen 4 – Parameter 1
User-defined Screen 4 - Parameter 1 (Parameter 434) is the E300 parameter number to display for the first parameter in user-defined screen 4. You can select one of the 560 available E300 relay parameters.
Table 120 - Screen 4 - Parameter 1 (Parameter 434)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
38
0
560
UINT
2
1
User-defined Screen 4 – Parameter 2
User-defined Screen 4 - Parameter 2 (Parameter 435) is the E300 parameter number to display for the second parameter in user-defined screen 4. You can select one of the 560 available E300 relay parameters.
Screen 4 - Parameter 2 (Parameter 435)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
39
0
560
UINT
2
1
Display Timeout
Display Timeout (Parameter 436) defines the time duration in which there is no display navigation activity, and the E300 Diagnostic Station returns to its normal display sequence. Any configuration parameters that were left in an edit state are canceled. A value of zero disables the display timeout function.
Table 121 - Display Timeout (Parameter 436)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
300
0
65535
UINT
2
1
Seconds
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
117
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
Analog I/O Expansion
Modules
The E300 relay supports up to four Analog I/O Expansion Modules on the E300
Expansion Bus. The E300 Analog Expansion Module has three independent universal inputs and one analog output.
Analog Input Channels
The universal analog inputs can accept the following analog signals:
•
Current
–
4…20 mA
–
0…20 mA
•
Voltage
–
0…10V DC
–
1…5V DC
–
0…5V DC
•
2-Wire or 3-Wire RTD Sensors
–
100 Ω, 200 Ω, 500 Ω, 1000 Ω Pt 385
–
100 Ω, 200 Ω, 500 Ω, 1000 Ω Pt 3916
–
10 Ω Cu 426
–
100 Ω Ni 618
–
120 Ω Ni 672
–
604 Ω NiFe 518
•
Resistance
–
0…150 Ω
–
0…750 Ω
–
0…3000 Ω
–
0…6000 Ω (PTC and NTC Sensors)
The analog inputs can report data in four different formats. Table 122 through
Table 125 display the data ranges for all of the available analog input types for the
four available data formats.
Table 122 - Analog Input Data Format for Current Input Type
Input Range Input Value Condition
4…20 mA
0…20 mA
21.00 mA
20.00 mA
4.00 mA
3.00 mA
21.00 mA
20.00 mA
0.00 mA
0.00 mA
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
0
0
Engineering
Units
21000
20000
4000
3000
21000
20000
0
0
Engineering
Units x 10
2100
2000
400
300
2100
2000
Raw /
Proportional PID
32767
32767
17407
16383
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
0
-1024
17202
16383
0
0
118
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Table 123 - Analog Input Data Format for Voltage Input Type
Input Range Input Value Condition
0…10 V DC
1…5 V DC
0…5V DC
10.50V DC
10.00V DC
0.00V DC
0.00V DC
5.25V DC
5.00V DC
1.00V DC
0.50V DC
5.25V DC
5.00V DC
0.00V DC
0.00V DC
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
0
0
1000
500
5250
5000
Engineering
Units
10500
10000
0
0
5250
5000
0
0
100
50
525
500
0
0
525
500
Engineering
Units x 10
1050
1000
RTD
100 Ω, 200 Ω,
500 Ω, 1000 Ω
Pt 385
RTD
100 Ω, 200 Ω,
500 Ω, 1000 Ω
Pt 3916
RTD
10 Ω Cu 426
RTD
100 Ω Ni 618
-328.0 °F
260.0 °C
260.0 °C
-100.0 °C
-100.0 °C
500.0 °F
500.0 °F
-148.0 °F
-148.0 °F
260.0 °C
260.0 °C
-100.0 °C
-100.0 °C
500.0 °F
500.0 °F
-148.0 °F
-148.0 °F
-328.0 °F
630.0 °C
630.0 °C
-200.0 °C
-200.0 °C
1166.0 °F
1166.0 °F
-328.0 °F
850.0 °C
850.0 °C
-200.0 °C
-200.0 °C
1562.0 °F
1562.0 °F
-328.0 °F
Input Range Input Value Condition
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Table 124 - Analog Input Data Format for RTD Input Type
5000
-1480
-1480
2600
2600
-1000
11660
-3280
-3280
2600
2600
-1000
-1000
5000
-1000
5000
5000
-1480
-1480
15620
-3280
-3280
6300
6300
-2000
-2000
11660
Engineering
Units
8500
8500
-2000
-2000
15620
500
-148
-148
260
260
-100
260
-100
-100
500
1166
-328
-328
260
-100
500
500
-148
-148
630
-200
-200
1166
1562
-328
-328
630
Engineering
Units x 10
850
850
-200
-200
1562
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
Raw /
Proportional
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
Raw /
Proportional PID
32767
32767
17202
16383
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
0
0
17407
16383
0
0
0
-2048
17202
16383
PID
0
0
0
16383
16383
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
119
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
120
Input Range Input Value Condition
RTD
120 Ω Ni 672
RTD
100 Ω NiFe
518
200.0 °C
200.0 °C
-100.0 °C
-100.0 °C
392.0 °F
392.0 °F
-148.0 °F
-148.0 °F
260.0 °C
260.0 °C
-80.0 °C
-80.0 °C
500.0 °F
500.0 °F
-112.0 °F
-112.0 °F
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
-1120
-1120
2000
2000
-1000
-1000
3920
3920
-1480
-1480
Engineering
Units
2600
2600
-800
-800
5000
5000
-100
-100
392
392
-112
-112
200
200
-148
-148
-80
-80
500
500
Engineering
Units x 10
260
260
Table 125 - Analog Input Data Format for Resistance Input Type
Input Range Input Value Condition
Resistance
0-150 Ω
Resistance
0-750 Ω
Resistance
0-3000 Ω
Resistance
0-6000 Ω
(PTC / NTC)
150.00 Ω
150.00 Ω
0.00 Ω
0.00 Ω
750.0 Ω
750.0 Ω
0.0 Ω
0.0 Ω
3000.0 Ω
3000.0 Ω
0.0 Ω
0.0 Ω
6000 Ω
6000 Ω
0 Ω
0 Ω
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
0
0
0
0
30000
30000
Engineering
Units
15000
15000
0
0
7500
7500
6000
6000
0
0
0
0
0
0
3000
3000
0
0
750
750
Engineering
Units x 10
1500
1500
600
600
0
0
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
Raw /
Proportional
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
Raw /
Proportional
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
PID
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
PID
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
16383
16383
0
0
Analog Output Channel
The isolated analog output can be programmed to provide one of the following analog output signal types:
•
Current
–
4…20 mA
–
0…20 mA
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
•
Voltage
–
0…10V DC
–
1…5V DC
–
0…5V DC
The analog outputs can report data as a percent of range.
and
display the data ranges for all available analog output types.
Table 126 - Analog Output Data Format for Current Output Type
Output Range
4…20 mA
0…20 mA
Output Signal
21.000 mA
20.000 mA
4.000 mA
3.000 mA
21.00 mA
20.00 mA
0.00 mA
0.00 mA
Condition
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
% Range
106.25%
100.00%
0.00%
-6.25%
105.00%
100.00%
0.00%
0.00%
Table 127 - Analog Output Data Format for Voltage Output Type
Output Range
0…10 V DC
1…5 V DC
0…5 V DC
Output Value
10.50V DC
10.00V DC
0.00V DC
0.00V DC
5.25V DC
5.00V DC
1.00V DC
0.50V DC
5.25V DC
5.00V DC
0.00V DC
0.00V DC
Condition
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
% Range
105.00%
100.00%
0.00%
0.00%
106.25%
100.00%
0.00%
-6.25%
105.00%
100.00%
0.00%
0.00%
The analog output can be used to communicate E300 diagnostic information via an analog signal to distributed control systems, programmable logic controllers, or panel-mounted analog meters. The analog output can represent one of the following E300 diagnostic parameters:
•
Average %FLA
•
%TCU
•
Ground Fault Current
•
Current Imbalance
•
Average L-L Voltage
•
Voltage Imbalance
•
Total kW
•
Total kVAR
•
Total kVA
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
121
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
•
Total Power Factor
•
User-defined Value
Table 128 - Analog Output Selection Type
Output Selection
Average % FLA
Scaled Average % FLA
% TCU
Ground Fault Current
Internal, 0.50…5.00 A
External, 0.02…0.10 A
External, 0.10…0.50 A
External, 0.20…1.00 A
External, 1.00…5.00 A
Current Imbalance
Average L-L Voltage
Voltage Imbalance
Total kW
Total kVAR
Total kVA
Total Power Factor
User-defined Value
Low Range
0%
0%
0%
0.50 A
0.02 A
0.10 A
0.20 A
1.00 A
0%
0V
0%
0 kW
5.25V DC
5.00V DC
-50% (Lagging)
-32768
122
High Range
100%
200%
100%
5.00 A
0.10 A
0.50 A
1.00 A
5.00 A
100%
(PT Primary) V
100%
(FLA1 x PT Primary x 1.732) V
(FLA1 x PT Primary x 1.732) V
(FLA1 x PT Primary x 1.732) V
+50% (Leading)
32767
Update Rate
Analog Input Channels
The performance for the input channels of the E300 Analog I/O Expansion
Module is dependent on the filter setting for each channel. The total scan time for the input channels of the module is determined by adding the conversion time for all enabled input channels.
Table 129 - Analog Input Channel Conversion Time
Input Type
Current, Voltage,
2-Wire RTD, Resistance
3-Wire RTD
Filter Frequency
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Conversion Time
153 ms
512 ms
65 ms
37 ms
306 ms
1024 ms
130 ms
74 ms
Example:
•
Channel 00 is configured for a 3-wire RTD and 4 Hz filter (conversion time = 1024 ms).
•
Channel 01 is configured for 17 Hz voltage (conversion time = 153 ms).
•
Channel 02 is configured for 62 Hz current (conversion time = 65 ms).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
The E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module input channel scan time is 1242 ms
(1024+153+65).
Analog Output Channel
The E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module output channel update rate is 10 ms.
Analog Module 1
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Type
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Type (Parameter 437) defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 00 of Analog Module 1 monitors.
Table 130 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Type (Parameter 437)
12
13
10
11
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
Value
0
1
18
19
20
16
17
14
15
21
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
100Pt385
200Pt385
500Pt385
1000Pt385
100Pt3916
200Pt3916
500Pt3916
1000Pt3916
10Cu426
100Ni618
120Ni672
604NiFe518
150ohm
750ohm
3000ohm
6000ohm
Description
Disable the analog input
Read an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Read an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Read a 100 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 10 Ω Cu 426 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Ni 618 RTD Sensor
Read a 120 Ω Ni 672 RTD Sensor
Read a 604 Ω NiFe 518 RTD Sensor
Read a resistance signal from 0…150 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…750 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…3000 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…6000 Ω. This setting can be used with PTC and NTC sensors.
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Format
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Format (Parameter 438) defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
123
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
124
Table 131 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Format (Parameter 438)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
EngUnits
EngUnitsTimes10
RawProportional
ScaledForPID
Description
Engineering Units (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Engineering Units x 10 (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Raw / Proportional (-32768…+32767)
Scaled for PID (0…16383)
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit (Parameter 439) defines the temperate unit for RTD sensor readings.
Table 132 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit (Parameter 439)
Value
0
1
Assignment
DegreesC
DegreesF
Description
Report RTD Temperature Data in °C
Report RTD Temperature Data in °F
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency (Parameter 440) defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module.
Table 133 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency (Parameter 440)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Description
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 17 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 4 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 62 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 470 Hz
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State (Parameter 441) defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit. Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Table 134 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State (Parameter 441)
1
2
Value
0
Assignment
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Description
Reports the high limit of the input channel type
Reports the low limit of the input channel type
Reports zero
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 442) defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Table 135 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 442)
Value
0
1
Assignment
3-Wire
2-Wire
Description
Scan a 3-wire RTD sensor
Scan a 2-wire RTD sensor
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Type
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Type (Parameter 446) defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 01 of Analog Module 1 monitors.
Table 136 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Type (Parameter 446)
12
13
10
11
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
Value
0
1
18
19
20
16
17
14
15
21
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
100Pt385
200Pt385
500Pt385
1000Pt385
100Pt3916
200Pt3916
500Pt3916
1000Pt3916
10Cu426
100Ni618
120Ni672
604NiFe518
150ohm
750ohm
3000ohm
6000ohm
Description
Disable the analog input
Read an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Read an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Read a 100 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 10 Ω Cu 426 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Ni 618 RTD Sensor
Read a 120 Ω Ni 672 RTD Sensor
Read a 604 Ω NiFe 518 RTD Sensor
Read a resistance signal from 0…150 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…750 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…3000 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…6000 Ω. This setting can be used with PTC and NTC sensors.
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Format
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Format (Parameter 447) defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported.
Table 137 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Format (Parameter 447)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
EngUnits
EngUnitsTimes10
RawProportional
ScaledForPID
Description
Engineering Units (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Engineering Units x 10 (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Raw / Proportional (-32768…+32767)
Scaled for PID (0…16383)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
125
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
126
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit (Parameter 448) defines the temperate unit for RTD sensor readings.
Table 138 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit (Parameter 448)
Value
0
1
Assignment
DegreesC
DegreesF
Description
Report RTD Temperature Data in °C
Report RTD Temperature Data in °F
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency (Parameter 449) defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module.
Table 139 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency (Parameter 449)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Description
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 17 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 4 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 62 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 470 Hz
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State (Parameter 450) defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit. Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Table 140 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State (Parameter 450)
1
2
Value
0
Assignment
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Description
Reports the high limit of the input channel type
Reports the low limit of the input channel type
Reports zero
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 451) defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor.
Table 141 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 451)
Value
0
1
Assignment
3-Wire
2-Wire
Description
Scan a 3-wire RTD sensor
Scan a 2-wire RTD sensor
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Type
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Type (Parameter 455) defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 02 of Analog Module 1 monitors.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Table 142 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Type (Parameter 455)
13
14
11
12
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Value
0
17
18
15
16
19
20
21
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
100Pt385
200Pt385
500Pt385
1000Pt385
100Pt3916
200Pt3916
500Pt3916
1000Pt3916
10Cu426
100Ni618
120Ni672
604NiFe518
150ohm
750ohm
3000ohm
6000ohm
Description
Disable the analog input
Read an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Read an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Read a 100 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 10 Ω Cu 426 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Ni 618 RTD Sensor
Read a 120 Ω Ni 672 RTD Sensor
Read a 604 Ω NiFe 518 RTD Sensor
Read a resistance signal from 0…150 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…750 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…3000 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…6000 Ω. This setting can be used with PTC and NTC sensors.
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Format
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Format (Parameter 456) defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported.
Table 143 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Format (Parameter 456)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
EngUnits
EngUnitsTimes10
RawProportional
ScaledForPID
Description
Engineering Units (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Engineering Units x 10 (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Raw / Proportional (-32768…32767)
Scaled for PID (0 …16383)
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit (Parameter 457) defines the temperate unit for RTD sensor readings.
Table 144 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit (Parameter 457)
Value
0
1
Assignment
DegreesC
DegreesF
Description
Report RTD Temperature Data in °C
Report RTD Temperature Data in °F
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
127
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
128
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency (Parameter 458) defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module.
Table 145 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency (Parameter 458)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Description
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 17 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 4 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 62 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 470 Hz
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State (Parameter 459) defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit. Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Table 146 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State (Parameter 459)
Value
0
1
2
Assignment
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Description
Reports the high limit of the input channel type
Reports the low limit of the input channel type
Reports zero
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 460) defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor.
Table 147 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 460)
Value
0
1
Assignment
3-Wire
2-Wire
Description
Scan a 3-wire RTD sensor
Scan a 2-wire RTD sensor
Analog Module 1 – Output Channel 00 Type
Analog Module 1 – Output Channel 00 Type (Parameter 464) defines the type of analog signal that Output Channel 00 of Analog Module 1 provides.
Table 148 - Analog Module 1 – Output Channel 00 Type (Parameter 464)
4
5
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
Description
Disable the analog input
Provide an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Provide an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Provide an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Provide an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Provide an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
1
2
Value
0
3
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Analog Module 1 – Output Channel 00 Selection
Analog Module 1 – Output Channel 00 Selection (Parameter 465) defines the
E300 relay parameter that Output Channel 00 represents.
Table 149 - Analog Module 1 – Output Channel 00 Selection (Parameter 465)
5
6
3
4
1
2
Value
0
9
10
7
8
11
Assignment
AveragePCTFLA
ScaledAvgPctFLA
PercentTCU
GFCurrent
CurrentImbalance
AvgLLVoltage
VoltLLImbalance
TotalkW
TotalkVA
Total kVAR
TotalPF
UserDLXData
Description
Average %FLA (0…100%)
Scaled Average %FLA (0…200%)
%TCU (0…100%)
Ground Fault Current (Ground Fault Type Range)
Current Imbalance (0…100%)
Average L-L Voltage (0…PT Primary)
Voltage Imbalance (0…100%)
Total kW (0…FLA x PT Primary x 1.732)
Total kVA (0…FLA x PT Primary x 1.732)
Total kVAR (0…FLA x PT Primary x 1.732)
Total Power Factor (-50% Lagging…+50% Leading)
User-defined Value (-32768…32767)
Analog Module 1 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action
Analog Module 1 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action (Parameter
466) defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output
Channel 00 provides when there is an E300 Expansion Bus fault.
Table 150 - Analog Module 1 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action (Parameter 466)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
Zero
Maximum
Minimum
HoldLastState
Description
Provide an analog signal of zero
Provide an analog signal equal to the high limit
Provide an analog signal equal to the low limit
Provide the last known analog signal
Analog Module 1 – Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action
Analog Module 1 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action (Parameter
467) defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output
Channel 00 provides when the E300 is in a tripped state.
Table 151 - Analog Module 1 – Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 467)
Assignment
Ignore
Maximum
Minimum
HoldLastState
Description
Continue providing the appropriate analog signal
Provide an analog signal equal to the high limit
Provide an analog signal equal to the low limit
Provide the analog signal at the time of the fault
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
129
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
130
Analog Module 2
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Type
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Type (Parameter 468) defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 00 of Analog Module 2 monitors.
Table 152 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Type (Parameter 468)
13
14
11
12
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Value
0
17
18
15
16
19
20
21
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
100Pt385
200Pt385
500Pt385
1000Pt385
100Pt3916
200Pt3916
500Pt3916
1000Pt3916
10Cu426
100Ni618
120Ni672
604NiFe518
150ohm
750ohm
3000ohm
6000ohm
Description
Disable the analog input
Read an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Read an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Read a 100 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 10 Ω Cu 426 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Ni 618 RTD Sensor
Read a 120 Ω Ni 672 RTD Sensor
Read a 604 Ω NiFe 518 RTD Sensor
Read a resistance signal from 0…150 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…750 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…3000 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…6000 Ω. This setting can be used with PTC and NTC sensors.
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Format
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Format (Parameter 469) defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported.
Table 153 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Format (Parameter 469)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
EngUnits
EngUnitsTimes10
RawProportional
ScaledForPID
Description
Engineering Units (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Engineering Units x 10 (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Raw / Proportional (-32768 - 32767)
Scaled for PID (0 - 16383)
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit (Parameter 470) defines the temperate unit for RTD sensor readings.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Table 154 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit (Parameter 470)
Value
0
1
Assignment
DegreesC
DegreesF
Description
Report RTD Temperature Data in °C
Report RTD Temperature Data in °F
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency (Parameter 471) defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module.
Table 155 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency (Parameter 471)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Description
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 17 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 4 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 62 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 470 Hz
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State (Parameter 472) defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit. Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Table 156 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State (Parameter 472)
1
2
Value
0
Assignment
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Description
Reports the high limit of the input channel type
Reports the low limit of the input channel type
Reports zero
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 473) defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor.
Table 157 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 473)
Value
0
1
Assignment
3-Wire
2-Wire
Description
Scan a 3-wire RTD sensor
Scan a 2-wire RTD sensor
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Type
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Type (Parameter 477) defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 01 of Analog Module 2 monitors.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
131
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
Value
0
1
Table 158 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Type (Parameter 477)
13
14
11
12
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Value
0
17
18
15
16
19
20
21
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
100Pt385
200Pt385
500Pt385
1000Pt385
100Pt3916
200Pt3916
500Pt3916
1000Pt3916
10Cu426
100Ni618
120Ni672
604NiFe518
150ohm
750ohm
3000ohm
6000ohm
Description
Disable the analog input
Read an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Read an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Read a 100 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 10 Ω Cu 426 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Ni 618 RTD Sensor
Read a 120 Ω Ni 672 RTD Sensor
Read a 604 Ω NiFe 518 RTD Sensor
Read a resistance signal from 0…150 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…750 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…3000 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…6000 Ω. This setting can be used with PTC and NTC sensors.
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Format
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Format (Parameter 478) defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported.
Table 159 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Format (Parameter 478)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
EngUnits
EngUnitsTimes10
RawProportional
ScaledForPID
Description
Engineering Units (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Engineering Units x 10 (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Raw / Proportional (-32768…32767)
Scaled for PID (0…16383)
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit (Parameter 479) defines the temperate unit for RTD sensor readings.
Table 160 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit (Parameter 479)
Assignment
DegreesC
DegreesF
Description
Report RTD Temperature Data in °C
Report RTD Temperature Data in °F
132
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency (Parameter 480) defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module.
Table 161 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency (Parameter 480)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Description
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 17 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 4 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 62 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 470 Hz
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State (Parameter 481) defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit. Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Table 162 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State (Parameter 481)
Value
0
1
2
Assignment
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Description
Reports the high limit of the input channel type
Reports the low limit of the input channel type
Reports zero
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 482) defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor.
Table 163 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 482)
Value
0
1
Assignment
3-Wire
2-Wire
Description
Scan a 3-wire RTD sensor
Scan a 2-wire RTD sensor
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Type
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Type (Parameter 486) defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 02 of Analog Module 2 monitors.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
133
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
Table 164 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Type (Parameter 486)
13
14
11
12
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Value
0
17
18
15
16
19
20
21
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
100Pt385
200Pt385
500Pt385
1000Pt385
100Pt3916
200Pt3916
500Pt3916
1000Pt3916
10Cu426
100Ni618
120Ni672
604NiFe518
150ohm
750ohm
3000ohm
6000ohm
Description
Disable the analog input
Read an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Read an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Read a 100 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 10 Ω Cu 426 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Ni 618 RTD Sensor
Read a 120 Ω Ni 672 RTD Sensor
Read a 604 Ω NiFe 518 RTD Sensor
Read a resistance signal from 0…150 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…750 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…3000 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…6000 Ω. This setting can be used with PTC and NTC sensors.
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Format
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Format (Parameter 487) defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported.
Table 165 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Format (Parameter 487)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
EngUnits
EngUnitsTimes10
RawProportional
ScaledForPID
Description
Engineering Units (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Engineering Units x 10 (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Raw / Proportional (-32768 …32767)
Scaled for PID (0…16383)
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit (Parameter 488) defines the temperate unit for RTD sensor readings.
Table 166 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit (Parameter 488)
Value
0
1
Assignment
DegreesC
DegreesF
Description
Report RTD Temperature Data in °C
Report RTD Temperature Data in °F
134
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency (Parameter 489) defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module.
Table 167 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency (Parameter 489)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Description
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 17 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 4 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 62 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 470 Hz
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State (Parameter 490) defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit. Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Table 168 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State (Parameter 490)
Value
0
1
2
Assignment
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Description
Reports the high limit of the input channel type
Reports the low limit of the input channel type
Reports zero
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 491) defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor.
Table 169 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 491)
Value
0
1
Assignment
3-Wire
2-Wire
Description
Scan a 3-wire RTD sensor
Scan a 2-wire RTD sensor
Analog Module 2 – Output Channel 00 Type
Analog Module 2 – Output Channel 00 Type (Parameter 464) defines the type of analog signal that Output Channel 00 of Analog Module 2 provides.
Table 170 - Analog Module 2 – Output Channel 00 Type (Parameter 495)
4
5
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
Description
Disable the analog input
Provide an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Provide an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Provide an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Provide an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Provide an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
135
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
Analog Module 2 – Output Channel 00 Selection
Analog Module 2 – Output Channel 00 Selection (Parameter 496) defines the
E300 relay parameter that Output Channel 00 represents.
Table 171 - Analog Module 2 – Output Channel 00 Selection (Parameter 496)
8
9
6
7
10
11
4
5
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
AveragePCTFLA
ScaledAvgPctFLA
PercentTCU
GFCurrent
CurrentImbalance
AvgLLVoltage
VoltLLImbalance
TotalkW
TotalkVA
Total kVAR
TotalPF
UserDLXData
Description
Average %FLA (0…100%)
Scaled Average %FLA (0…200%)
%TCU (0…100%)
Ground Fault Current (Ground Fault Type Range)
Current Imbalance (0…100%)
Average L-L Voltage (0… PT Primary)
Voltage Imbalance (0… 100%)
Total kW (0…FLA x PT Primary x 1.732)
Total kVA (0…FLA x PT Primary x 1.732)
Total kVAR (0…FLA x PT Primary x 1.732)
Total Power Factor (-50% Lagging…+50% Leading)
User-defined Value (-32768… 32767)
Analog Module 2 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action
Analog Module 2 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action (Parameter
497) defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output
Channel 00 provides when there is an E300 Expansion Bus fault.
Table 172 - Analog Module 2 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action (Parameter 497)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
Zero
Maximum
Minimum
HoldLastState
Description
Provide an analog signal of zero
Provide an analog signal equal to the high limit
Provide an analog signal equal to the low limit
Provide the last known analog signal
Analog Module 2 – Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action
Analog Module 2 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action (Parameter
498) defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output
Channel 00 provides when the E300 is in a tripped state.
Table 173 - Analog Module 2 – Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 498)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
Ignore
Maximum
Minimum
HoldLastState
Description
Continue providing the appropriate analog signal
Provide an analog signal equal to the high limit
Provide an analog signal equal to the low limit
Provide the analog signal at the time of the fault
136
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Analog Module 3
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Type
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Type (Parameter 499) defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 00 of Analog Module 3 monitors.
Table 174 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Type (Parameter 499)
12
13
10
11
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
Value
0
1
18
19
20
16
17
14
15
21
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
100Pt385
200Pt385
500Pt385
1000Pt385
100Pt3916
200Pt3916
500Pt3916
1000Pt3916
10Cu426
100Ni618
120Ni672
604NiFe518
150ohm
750ohm
3000ohm
6000ohm
Description
Disable the analog input
Read an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Read an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Read a 100 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 10 Ω Cu 426 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Ni 618 RTD Sensor
Read a 120 Ω Ni 672 RTD Sensor
Read a 604 Ω NiFe 518 RTD Sensor
Read a resistance signal from 0…150 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…750 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…3000 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…6000 Ω. This setting can be used with PTC and NTC sensors.
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Format
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Format (Parameter 500) defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported.
Table 175 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Format (Parameter 500)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
EngUnits
EngUnitsTimes10
RawProportional
ScaledForPID
Description
Engineering Units (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Engineering Units x 10 (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Raw / Proportional (-32768…32767)
Scaled for PID (0 …16383)
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit (Parameter 501) defines the temperate unit for RTD sensor readings.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
137
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
Table 176 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit (Parameter 501)
Value
0
1
Assignment
DegreesC
DegreesF
Description
Report RTD Temperature Data in °C
Report RTD Temperature Data in °F
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency (Parameter 502) defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module.
Table 177 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency (Parameter 502)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Description
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 17 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 4 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 62 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 470 Hz
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State (Parameter 503) defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit. Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Table 178 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State (Parameter 503)
Value
0
1
2
Assignment
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Description
Reports the high limit of the input channel type
Reports the low limit of the input channel type
Reports zero
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 504) defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor.
Table 179 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 504)
Value
0
1
Assignment
3-Wire
2-Wire
Description
Scan a 3-wire RTD sensor
Scan a 2-wire RTD sensor
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Type
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Type (Parameter 508) defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 01 of Analog Module 3 monitors.
138
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Table 180 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Type (Parameter 508)
11
12
13
14
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Value
0
17
18
15
16
19
20
21
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
100Pt385
200Pt385
500Pt385
1000Pt385
100Pt3916
200Pt3916
500Pt3916
1000Pt3916
10Cu426
100Ni618
120Ni672
604NiFe518
150ohm
750ohm
3000ohm
6000ohm
Description
Disable the analog input
Read an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Read an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Read a 100 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 10 Ω Cu 426 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Ni 618 RTD Sensor
Read a 120 Ω Ni 672 RTD Sensor
Read a 604 Ω NiFe 518 RTD Sensor
Read a resistance signal from 0…150 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…750 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…3000 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…6000 Ω. This setting can be used with PTC and NTC sensors.
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Format
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Format (Parameter 509) defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported.
Table 181 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Format (Parameter 509)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
EngUnits
EngUnitsTimes10
RawProportional
ScaledForPID
Description
Engineering Units (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Engineering Units x 10 (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Raw / Proportional (-32768…32767)
Scaled for PID (0…16383)
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit (Parameter 510) defines the temperate unit for RTD sensor readings.
Table 182 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit (Parameter 510)
Value
0
1
Assignment
DegreesC
DegreesF
Description
Report RTD Temperature Data in °C
Report RTD Temperature Data in °F
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
139
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency (Parameter 511) defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module.
Table 183 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency (Parameter 511)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Description
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 17 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 4 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 62 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 470 Hz
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State (Parameter 512) defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit. Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Table 184 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State (Parameter 512)
1
2
Value
0
Assignment
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Description
Reports the high limit of the input channel type
Reports the low limit of the input channel type
Reports zero
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 513) defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor.
Table 185 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 513)
Value
0
1
Assignment
3-Wire
2-Wire
Description
Scan a 3-wire RTD sensor
Scan a 2-wire RTD sensor
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Type
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Type (Parameter 517) defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 02 of Analog Module 3 monitors.
140
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Table 186 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Type (Parameter 517)
13
14
11
12
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Value
0
17
18
15
16
19
20
21
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
100Pt385
200Pt385
500Pt385
1000Pt385
100Pt3916
200Pt3916
500Pt3916
1000Pt3916
10Cu426
100Ni618
120Ni672
604NiFe518
150ohm
750ohm
3000ohm
6000ohm
Description
Disable the analog input
Read an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Read an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Read a 100 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 10 Ω Cu 426 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Ni 618 RTD Sensor
Read a 120 Ω Ni 672 RTD Sensor
Read a 604 Ω NiFe 518 RTD Sensor
Read a resistance signal from 0…150 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…750 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…3000 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…6000 Ω. This setting can be used with PTC and NTC sensors.
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Format
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Format (Parameter 518) defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported.
Table 187 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Format (Parameter 518)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
EngUnits
EngUnitsTimes10
RawProportional
ScaledForPID
Description
Engineering Units (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Engineering Units x 10 (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Raw / Proportional (-32768…32767)
Scaled for PID (0…16383)
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit (Parameter 519) defines the temperate unit for RTD sensor readings.
Table 188 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit (Parameter 519)
Value
0
1
Assignment
DegreesC
DegreesF
Description
Report RTD Temperature Data in °C
Report RTD Temperature Data in °F
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
141
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
142
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency (Parameter 520) defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module.
Table 189 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency (Parameter 520)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Description
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 17 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 4 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 62 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 470 Hz
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State (Parameter 521) defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit. Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Table 190 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State (Parameter 521)
Value
0
1
2
Assignment
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Description
Reports the high limit of the input channel type
Reports the low limit of the input channel type
Reports zero
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 522) defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor.
Table 191 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 522)
Value
0
1
Assignment
3-Wire
2-Wire
Description
Scan a 3-wire RTD sensor
Scan a 2-wire RTD sensor
Analog Module 3 – Output Channel 00 Type
Analog Module 3 – Output Channel 00 Type (Parameter 526) defines the type of analog signal that Output Channel 00 of Analog Module 3 provides.
Table 192 - Analog Module 3 – Output Channel 00 Type (Parameter 526)
4
5
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
Description
Disable the analog input
Provide an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Provide an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Provide an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Provide an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Provide an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Analog Module 3 – Output Channel 00 Selection
Analog Module 3 – Output Channel 00 Selection (Parameter 527) defines the
E300 relay parameter that Output Channel 00 represents.
Table 193 - Analog Module 3 – Output Channel 00 Selection (Parameter 527)
5
6
3
4
1
2
Value
0
9
10
7
8
11
Assignment
AveragePCTFLA
ScaledAvgPctFLA
PercentTCU
GFCurrent
CurrentImbalance
AvgLLVoltage
VoltLLImbalance
TotalkW
TotalkVA
Total kVAR
TotalPF
UserDLXData
Description
Average %FLA (0…100%)
Scaled Average %FLA (0…200%)
%TCU (0…100%)
Ground Fault Current (Ground Fault Type Range)
Current Imbalance (0…100%)
Average L-L Voltage (0…PT Primary)
Voltage Imbalance (0 …100%)
Total kW (0…FLA x PT Primary x 1.732)
Total kVA (0…FLA x PT Primary x 1.732)
Total kVAR (0…FLA x PT Primary x 1.732)
Total Power Factor (-50% Lagging…+50% Leading)
User-defined Value (-32768 …+32767)
Analog Module 3 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action
Analog Module 3 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action (Parameter
528) defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output
Channel 00 provides when there is an E300 Expansion Bus fault.
Table 194 - Analog Module 3 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action (Parameter 528)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
Zero
Maximum
Minimum
HoldLastState
Description
Provide an analog signal of zero
Provide an analog signal equal to the high limit
Provide an analog signal equal to the low limit
Provide the last known analog signal
Analog Module 3 – Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action
Analog Module 3 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action (Parameter
529) defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output
Channel 00 provides when the E300 is in a tripped state.
Table 195 - Analog Module 3 – Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 529)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
Ignore
Maximum
Minimum
HoldLastState
Description
Continue providing the appropriate analog signal
Provide an analog signal equal to the high limit
Provide an analog signal equal to the low limit
Provide the analog signal at the time of the fault
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
143
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
144
Analog Module 4
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Type
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Type (Parameter 530) defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 00 of Analog Module 4 monitors.
Table 196 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Type (Parameter 530)
13
14
11
12
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Value
0
17
18
15
16
19
20
21
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
100Pt385
200Pt385
500Pt385
1000Pt385
100Pt3916
200Pt3916
500Pt3916
1000Pt3916
10Cu426
100Ni618
120Ni672
604NiFe518
150ohm
750ohm
3000ohm
6000ohm
Description
Disable the analog input
Read an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Read an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Read a 100 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 10 Ω Cu 426 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Ni 618 RTD Sensor
Read a 120 Ω Ni 672 RTD Sensor
Read a 604 Ω NiFe 518 RTD Sensor
Read a resistance signal from 0…150 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…750 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…3000 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…6000 Ω. This setting can be used with PTC and NTC sensors.
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Format
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Format (Parameter 531) defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported.
Table 197 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Format (Parameter 531)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
EngUnits
EngUnitsTimes10
RawProportional
ScaledForPID
Description
Engineering Units (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Engineering Units x 10 (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Raw / Proportional (-32768…+32767)
Scaled for PID (0…16383)
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit (Parameter 532) defines the temperate unit for RTD sensor readings.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Table 198 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit (Parameter 532)
Value
0
1
Assignment
DegreesC
DegreesF
Description
Report RTD Temperature Data in °C
Report RTD Temperature Data in °F
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency (Parameter 533) defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module.
Table 199 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency (Parameter 533)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Description
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 17 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 4 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 62 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 470 Hz
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State (Parameter 534) defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit. Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Table 200 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State (Parameter 534)
1
2
Value
0
Assignment
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Description
Reports the high limit of the input channel type
Reports the low limit of the input channel type
Reports zero
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 535) defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor.
Table 201 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 535)
Value
0
1
Assignment
3-Wire
2-Wire
Description
Scan a 3-wire RTD sensor
Scan a 2-wire RTD sensor
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Type
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Type (Parameter 539) defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 01 of Analog Module 4 monitors.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
145
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
Table 202 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Type (Parameter 539)
13
14
11
12
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Value
0
17
18
15
16
19
20
21
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
100Pt385
200Pt385
500Pt385
1000Pt385
100Pt3916
200Pt3916
500Pt3916
1000Pt3916
10Cu426
100Ni618
120Ni672
604NiFe518
150ohm
750ohm
3000ohm
6000ohm
Description
Disable the analog input
Read an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Read an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Read a 100 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 10 Ω Cu 426 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Ni 618 RTD Sensor
Read a 120 Ω Ni 672 RTD Sensor
Read a 604 Ω NiFe 518 RTD Sensor
Read a resistance signal from 0…150 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…750 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…3000 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…6000 Ω. This setting can be used with PTC and NTC sensors.
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Format
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Format (Parameter 540) defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported.
Table 203 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Format (Parameter 540)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
EngUnits
EngUnitsTimes10
RawProportional
ScaledForPID
Description
Engineering Units (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Engineering Units x 10 (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Raw / Proportional (-32768…+32767)
Scaled for PID (0…16383)
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit (Parameter 541) defines the temperate unit for RTD sensor readings.
Table 204 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit (Parameter 541)
Value
0
1
Assignment
DegreesC
DegreesF
Description
Report RTD Temperature Data in °C
Report RTD Temperature Data in °F
146
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency (Parameter 542) defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module.
Table 205 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency (Parameter 542)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Description
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 17 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 4 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 62 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 470 Hz
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State (Parameter 543) defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit. Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Table 206 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State (Parameter 543)
1
2
Value
0
Assignment
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Description
Reports the high limit of the input channel type
Reports the low limit of the input channel type
Reports zero
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 544) defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor.
Table 207 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 544)
Value
0
1
Assignment
3-Wire
2-Wire
Description
Scan a 3-wire RTD sensor
Scan a 2-wire RTD sensor
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Type
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Type (Parameter 548) defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 02 of Analog Module 4 monitors.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
147
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
Table 208 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Type (Parameter 548)
12
13
10
11
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
Value
0
1
18
19
20
16
17
14
15
21
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
100Pt385
200Pt385
500Pt385
1000Pt385
100Pt3916
200Pt3916
500Pt3916
1000Pt3916
10Cu426
100Ni618
120Ni672
604NiFe518
150ohm
750ohm
3000ohm
6000ohm
Description
Disable the analog input
Read an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Read an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Read a 100 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 10 Ω Cu 426 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Ni 618 RTD Sensor
Read a 120 Ω Ni 672 RTD Sensor
Read a 604 Ω NiFe 518 RTD Sensor
Read a resistance signal from 0…150 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…750 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…3000 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…6000 Ω. This setting can be used with PTC and NTC sensors.
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Format
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Format (Parameter 549) defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported.
Table 209 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Format (Parameter 549)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
EngUnits
EngUnitsTimes10
RawProportional
ScaledForPID
Description
Engineering Units (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Engineering Units x 10 (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Raw / Proportional (-32768…+32767)
Scaled for PID (0…16383)
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit (Parameter 550) defines the temperate unit for RTD sensor readings.
Table 210 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit (Parameter 550)
Value
0
1
Assignment
DegreesC
DegreesF
Description
Report RTD Temperature Data in °C
Report RTD Temperature Data in °F
148
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency (Parameter 551) defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module.
Table 211 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency (Parameter 551)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Description
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 17 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 4 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 62 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 470 Hz
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State (Parameter 552) defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit. Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Table 212 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State (Parameter 552)
1
2
Value
0
Assignment
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Description
Reports the high limit of the input channel type
Reports the low limit of the input channel type
Reports zero
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 556) defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor.
Table 213 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 556)
Value
0
1
Assignment
3-Wire
2-Wire
Description
Scan a 3-wire RTD sensor
Scan a 2-wire RTD sensor
Analog Module 4 – Output Channel 00 Type
Analog Module 4 – Output Channel 00 Type (Parameter 557) defines the type of analog signal that Output Channel 00 of Analog Module 4 provides.
Table 214 - Analog Module 4 – Output Channel 00 Type (Parameter 557)
4
5
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
Description
Disable the analog input
Provide an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Provide an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Provide an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Provide an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Provide an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
149
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
Analog Module 4 – Output Channel 00 Selection
Analog Module 4 – Output Channel 00 Selection (Parameter 558) defines the
E300 relay parameter that Output Channel 00 represents
Table 215 - Analog Module 4 – Output Channel 00 Selection (Parameter 558)
5
6
3
4
1
2
Value
0
9
10
7
8
11
Assignment
AveragePCTFLA
ScaledAvgPctFLA
PercentTCU
GFCurrent
CurrentImbalance
AvgLLVoltage
VoltLLImbalance
TotalkW
TotalkVA
Total kVAR
TotalPF
UserDLXData
Description
Average %FLA (0…100%)
Scaled Average %FLA (0…200%)
%TCU (0…100%)
Ground Fault Current (Ground Fault Type Range)
Current Imbalance (0…100%)
Average L-L Voltage (0…PT Primary)
Voltage Imbalance (0…100%)
Total kW (0…FLA x PT Primary x 1.732)
Total kVA (0…FLA x PT Primary x 1.732)
Total kVAR (0…FLA x PT Primary x 1.732)
Total Power Factor (-50% Lagging…+50% Leading)
User-defined Value (-32768…32767)
Analog Module 4 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action
Analog Module 4 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action (Parameter
559) defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output
Channel 00 provides when there is an E300 Expansion Bus fault.
Table 216 - Analog Module 4 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action (Parameter 559)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
Zero
Maximum
Minimum
HoldLastState
Description
Provide an analog signal of zero
Provide an analog signal equal to the high limit
Provide an analog signal equal to the low limit
Provide the last known analog signal
Analog Module 4 – Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action
Analog Module 4 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action (Parameter
560) defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output
Channel 00 provides when the E300 is in a tripped state.
Figure 54 - Analog Module 4 – Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 560)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
Ignore
Maximum
Minimum
HoldLastState
Description
Continue providing the appropriate analog signal
Provide an analog signal equal to the high limit
Provide an analog signal equal to the low limit
Provide the analog signal at the time of the fault
150
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Network Start Configuration
States
An E300 relay with firmware v5.000 and higher provides two start command bits in Output Assembly 144 (NetworkStart1/O.LogicDefinedPt00Data and
NetworkStart2/O.LogicDefinedPt01Data) that is issued by a network scanner or control system and used by a Networked based Operating Mode (Parameter
195) to start and stop a motor through a communication network command.
These networked based start commands can be configured to go to a specific state when one of following events occur:
• Communication Fault Mode
– when network communication is lost or an error occurs
• Communication Idle Mode
– when a network scanner changes to Idle mode or a PLC changes to Program mode
IMPORTANT
It is important that you fully understand the use of these parameters and the order of their priority under the conditions of a communication fault and communication idle event.
The default setting for these modes is to issue a Stop command when a
Networked based Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is configured. The Network
Start Configuration States follow this priority order:
1.
Network Start Communication Fault State
2.
Network Start Final Fault State
3.
Network Start Communication Idle State
Network Start Communication Fault Modes
When the E300 relay with firmware revision v5.000 or higher loses communication, experiences a communication bus fault, or has a duplicate node address, you can configure the E300 Network Start commands with the Network
Start Communication Fault Mode parameters to go to a specific state (Stop or
Start) or hold the last state.
An E300 relay with firmware revision v5.000 or higher supports the Fault Mode
Output State Duration feature, which can be used with redundant network scanners or control systems. The Fault Mode Output State Duration is the time that the E300 Network Start commands can go to a temporary state (Stop, Start, or Hold Last State) when a communication fault occurs. Configure this temporary state by using the Network Start Communication Fault Mode parameters.
If communication between the E300 relay and a network scanner or control system is not restored within the Fault Mode Output State Duration time
(Parameter 561), the E300 Network Start commands go to a final fault state
(Stop or Start) which you configure using the Final Fault Mode parameters.
If communication between the E300 relay and a network scanner or control system is restored within the Fault Mode Output State Duration time (Parameter
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
151
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
561), the E300 Network Start commands resume with the state commanded by the network scanner or control system.
The parameters that are listed on the following pages configure the Network
Start Configuration Fault Mode for both Network Start commands.
Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561) is available in E300 firmware v5.000 and higher. This parameter defines the amount of time in seconds that the E300 remains in the Network Start Communication Fault
Mode state when a communication fault occurs. A value of (0) represents forever.
If communication between the E300 relay and a network scanner or control system is not restored within the Fault Mode Output State Duration time the
E300 Network Start command goes to the final fault state, which is configured using the Network Start Final Fault Mode parameters.
Table 217 - Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0 = Forever
255
USINT
1
1
Sec
Network Start Communication Fault Action (Parameter 569)
Network Start Communication Fault Action (Parameter 569) defines how the
Network Start commands respond when a communication fault occurs.
Table 218 - Network Start Communication Fault Action (Parameter 569)
Value
0
1
Assignment
GoToCommFltValue
HoldLastState
Description
Set to Network Start Communication Fault Value (Parameter 570)
Hold the last start command from the network
Network Start Communication Fault Value (Parameter 570)
Network Start Communication Fault Value (Parameter 570) defines which state the Network Start command should go to when a communication fault occurs.
Table 219 - Network Start Communication Fault Value (Parameter 570)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Stop
Start
Description
Stop Network Start1 and Stop Network Start2
Start Network Start1 and Stop Network Start2
152
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 4
Network Start Final Fault Value (Parameter 573)
Network Start Final Fault Value (Parameter 573) is available in E300 firmware v5.000 and higher. This parameter defines which state the Network Start command should go to when communication is not restored within the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561).
Table 220 - Network Start Final Fault Value (Parameter 573)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Stop
Start
Description
Stop Network Start1 and Stop Network Start2
Start Network Start1 and Stop Network Start2
Network Start Communication Idle Modes
When a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode while communicating with an E300 relay, the E300 Network Start commands can be configured to go to a specific state (Open or Close) or hold the last state.
The parameters that are listed on the following pages configure the Network
Start Communication Idle Mode for the Network Start commands.
Network Start Communication Idle Action (Parameter 571)
Network Start Communication Idle Action (Parameter 571) defines how the
Network Start commands respond when a network scanner goes into Idle mode or a PLC goes into Program mode.
Table 221 - Network Start Communication Idle Action (Parameter 571)
Value
0
1
Assignment
GoToCommIdlValue
HoldLastState
Description
Set to Network Start Idle Fault Value (Parameter 572)
Hold the last start command from the network
Network Start Communication Idle Value (Parameter 572)
Network Start Communication Idle Value (Parameter 572) defines which state the Network Start commands should go to when a network scanner goes into
Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode.
Table 222 - Output Relay 0 Communication Idle Value (Parameter 309)
Value
0
1
Assignment
Stop
Start
Description
Stop Network Start1 and Stop Network Start2
Start Network Start1 and Stop Network Start2
Introduction to Operating
Modes
The E300 relay supports a number of Operating Modes, which consist of configuration rules and logic to control typical full-voltage motor starters, including:
•
Overload
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
153
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
•
Non-Reversing Starter
•
Reversing Starter
•
Wye/Delta (Star/Delta) Starter
•
Two-Speed Starter
•
Monitor
The default Operating Mode (Parameter 195) for the E300 relay is Overload
(Network) in which the E300 relay operates like a traditional overload relay in which one of the output relays is assigned as a Trip Relay or Control Relay. You can use network commands to control any output relays that are assigned as
Normal output relays or Control Relays. For Control Module firmware v1.000 and v2.000, one output relay must be assigned as a Trip Relay. For Control
Module firmware v3.000 and higher, one output relay must be configured as a
Trip Relay or Control Relay. Invalid configuration of the output relays causes the
E300 relay to go into Invalid Configuration Mode and trip on a configuration trip.
describes the functionality of the available
Operating Modes for the E300 relay and their associated configuration rules.
154
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Chapter
5
Operating Modes
Introduction
The E300™ Electronic Overload Relay supports up to 54 operating modes, which consist of configuration rules and logic to control typical full-voltage motor starters, including:
•
Overload
•
Non-reversing starter
•
Reversing starter
•
Wye/Delta (Star/Delta) starter
•
Two-speed starter
•
Monitoring device
This chapter explains the configuration rules, logic, and control wiring that is required for the available operating modes (Parameter 195). Failure to follow the configuration rules causes the E300 relay to go into Invalid Configuration Mode and trip on a configuration trip.
Overload Operating Modes
The overload-based operating modes of the E300 relay make the E300 operate as a traditional overload relay, in which it interrupts the control circuit of a contactor coil with a normally closed trip relay or a normally open control relay.
There are four overload-based operating modes to choose from:
•
Network
•
Operator Station
•
Local I/O
•
Custom
Overload (Network)
The E300 relay’s default Operating Mode (Parameter 195 = 2) is
Overload
(Network)
, in which the E300 operates as a traditional overload relay with one output relay that is assigned as a normally closed trip relay or a normally open control relay. You can use network commands to control the control relay or any of the remaining output relays that are assigned as normal output relays.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
155
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Rules
1.
For Control Module firmware v1.000 and v2.000, one output relay must be assigned as a trip relay. Set any of the Output Ptxx Assignments
(Parameters 202…204) to Trip Relay.
2.
For Control Module firmware v3.000 and higher, one output relay must be assigned as a trip relay or control relay. Set any of the Output Ptxx
Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to Trip Relay or Control Relay.
3.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay is wired as a traditional overload relay with one of the output
relays configured as a normally closed trip relay. Figure 55 is a wiring diagram of a
non-reversing starter. Relay 0 is configured as a trip relay, and Relay 1 is configured as a normally open control relay, which receives commands from an automation controller to energize the contactor coil.
Figure 55 - Trip Relay Wiring Diagram
Relay 1
R13 R14
A1
M
A2
Relay 0
Configured as a
Trip Relay
1
R03
R04
1
Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
For Control Module firmware v3.000 and higher, the E300 relay can also be wired as a control relay so that the relay that is controlled by the communication
network opens when a trip event occurs. Figure 56
is a wiring diagram of a nonreversing starter with Relay 0 configured as a control relay. Relay 0 receives control commands from an automation controller to energize or de-energize the contactor coil. Relay 0 also goes to an open state when there is a trip event.
156
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Figure 56 - Control Relay Wiring Diagram
Relay 0
Configured as a
Control Relay 1
R03 R04
A1
M
A2
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
1
Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
DeviceLogix™ Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in Figure 57
is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 2.
Figure 57 - Overload (Network) DeviceLogix Program
Timing Diagram
Figure 58 - Overload (Network) Timing Diagram
Trip Relay
Device
Status0.Trip
Present
Trip Reset
Overload (Operator Station)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Overload (Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 =
26) operates as a traditional overload relay with one output relay that is assigned
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
157
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
158
as a normally closed trip relay or a normally open control relay. The Overload
(Operator Station) operating mode is used when an automation controller uses the start and stop keys of the E300 Operator Station for its motor control logic.
You can use network commands to control the control relay or any of the remaining output relays that are assigned as normal output relays.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled, and the Local/
Remote yellow LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
One output relay must be assigned as a trip relay or control relay. Set any of the Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to Trip Relay or
Control Relay.
3.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4.
Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
5.
Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
•
Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC
(Parameter 186)
•
Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action
(Parameter 233)
•
An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Or
•
Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC
(Parameter 192)
•
Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action
(Parameter 233)
•
An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
6.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay is wired as a traditional overload relay with one of the output
relays configured as a normally closed trip relay. Figure 59 is a wiring diagram of a
non-reversing starter. Relay 0 is configured as a trip relay, and Relay 1 is configured as a normally open Normal Relay, which receives commands from an automation controller to energize the contactor coil.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 59 - Trip Relay Wiring Diagram
Relay 1
R13 R14
A1
M
A2
Relay 0
Configured as a
Trip Relay
1
R03
R04
1
Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
The E300 relay can also be wired as a control relay so that the relay that is controlled by the communication network opens when a trip event occurs.
Figure 60 is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Relay 0 configured as
a control relay. Relay 0 receives control commands from an automation controller to energize or de-energize the contactor coil. Relay 0 also goes to an open state when there is a trip event.
Figure 60 - Control Relay Wiring Diagram
Relay 0
Configured as a
Control Relay
1
R03 R04
A1
M
A2
1
Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in Figure 61
is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 26.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
159
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 61 - Overload (Operator Station) DeviceLogix Program
160
Timing Diagram
Figure 62 - Overload (Operator Station) Timing Diagram
Trip Relay
Device
Status0.Trip
Present
Trip Reset
Overload (Local I/O)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Overload (Local I/O)
(Parameter 195 = 35) operates as a traditional overload relay with one output relay that is assigned as a normally closed trip relay or a normally open control relay. The Overload (Local
I/O) operating mode is used for standalone applications or automation systems that do not use an E300 Operator Station. You can use the digital inputs of the
E300 for the motor control logic of an automation controller. The automation controller can use network commands to control the control relay or any of the remaining output relays that are assigned as Normal output relays. The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is disabled, and a digital input that is assigned as a trip reset is required.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
One output relay must be assigned as a trip relay or control relay. Set any of the Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to Trip Relay or
Control Relay.
3.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4.
Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
5.
Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
•
Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC
(Parameter 186)
•
Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action
(Parameter 233)
•
An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Or
•
Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC
(Parameter 192)
•
Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action
(Parameter 233)
•
An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
6.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay is wired as a traditional overload relay with one of the output
relays configured as a normally closed trip relay. Figure 63
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter. Relay 0 is configured as a trip relay, and Relay 1 is configured as a normally open Normal Relay, which receives commands from an automation controller to energize the contactor coil.
Figure 63 - Trip Relay Wiring Diagram
Relay 1
R13 R14
A1
M
A2
Relay 0
Configured as a
Trip Relay
1
R03
R04
1
Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
The E300 relay can also be wired as a control relay so that the relay that is controlled by the communication network opens when a trip event occurs.
Figure 64 is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Relay 0 configured as
a control relay. Relay 0 receives control commands from an automation controller to energize or de-energize the contactor coil. Relay 0 also goes to an open state when there is a trip event.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
161
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
162
Figure 64 - Control Relay Wiring Diagram
Relay 0
Configured as a
Control Relay 1
R03 R04
A1
M
A2
1
Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in Figure 65 is automatically loaded and
enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 35.
Figure 65 - Overload (Local I/O) DeviceLogix Program
Timing Diagram
Figure 66 - Overload (Local I/O) Timing Diagram
Trip Relay
Device
Status0.Trip
Present
Trip Reset
Overload (Custom)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Overload (Custom)
(Parameter 195 = 49) operates as a traditional overload relay with one output relay that is assigned as a
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
normally closed trip relay or a normally open control relay. The Overload
(Custom) operating mode is used for applications that want customized
DeviceLogix programs. This operating mode requires minimal configuration rules.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Set any of the Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to Trip
Relay or Control Relay.
3.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay is wired as a traditional overload relay with one of the output
relays configured as a normally closed trip relay. Figure 67
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter. Relay 0 is configured as a trip relay, and Relay 1 is configured as a normally open control relay, which receives commands from an automation controller to energize the contactor coil.
Figure 67 - Trip Relay Wiring Diagram
Relay 1
R13 R14
A1
M
A2
Relay 0
Configured as a
Trip Relay
1
R03
R04
1
Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
The E300 relay can also be wired as a control relay so that the relay that is controlled by the communication network opens when a trip event occurs.
Figure 68 is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Relay 0 configured as
a control relay. Relay 0 receives control commands from an automation controller to energize or de-energize the contactor coil. Relay 0 also goes to an open state when there is a trip event.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
163
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 68 - Control Relay Wiring Diagram
Relay 0
Configured as a
Control Relay 1
R03 R04
A1
M
A2
1
Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
DeviceLogix Program
The last saved DeviceLogix program is executed in the E300 on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 49.
Timing Diagram
Figure 69 - Overload (Custom) Timing Diagram
Trip Relay
Non-reversing Starter
Operating Modes
164
Device
Status0.Trip
Present
Trip Reset
The non-reversing starter-based operating modes of the E300 relay provide the control logic for a non-reversing full voltage starter. A normally open control relay controls the contactor coil. When a trip event occurs, the control relay remains open until the E300 receives a trip reset command. There are 15 nonreversing starter-based operating modes to choose from:
•
Network
•
Network with Feedback
•
Operator Station
•
Operator Station with Feedback
•
Local I/O – Two-wire Control
•
Local I/O with Feedback – Two-wire Control
•
Local I/O – Three-wire Control
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
•
Local I/O with Feedback – Three-wire Control
•
Network & Operator Station
•
Network & Operator Station with Feedback
•
Network & Local I/O – Two-wire Control
•
Network & Local I/O with Feedback – Two-wire Control
•
Network & Local I/O – Three-wire Control
•
Network & Local I/O with Feedback – Three-wire Control
•
Custom
Non-reversing Starter (Network)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Network)
(Parameter
195 = 3) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when
LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Network) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data is set to 1.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
Figure 70 is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0
configured as a control relay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
165
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 70 - Non-reversing Starter (Network) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
E300
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in Figure 71 is automatically loaded and
enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 3.
Figure 71 - Non-reversing Starter (Network) DeviceLogix Program
166
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Run/Stop
Relay 0
Timing Diagram
Figure 72 - Non-reversing Starter (Network) Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Non-reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Network) with
Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 4) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in
Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil.
LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using the
Network Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters
(Parameters 569 – 573) described in
The auxiliary contact from the contactor of the non-reversing starter is wired into
Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback
Timeout (Parameter 213), then the E300 issues a trip or warning event.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Network) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data is set to 1.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
167
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
2.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4.
Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback
Timeout Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with the contactor auxiliary wired to Input 0 and Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 73 - Non-reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Aux
IN 0
E300
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
Figure 74 is automatically loaded and
enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 4.
168
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 74 - Non-reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback DeviceLogix Program
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
169
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Run/Stop
Relay 0
Feedback
Timer
Feedback
Timeout Trip
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timing Diagram
Figure 75 - Non-reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Normal Operation
Trip Event Feedback Timeout
170
Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Operating Station)
(Parameter 195 = 27) uses the Operator Station’s “I” and “0” keys to control
Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when you release the “I” button. The E300 issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled, and the Local/Remote yellow LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4.
Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
5.
Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
•
Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC
(Parameter 186)
•
Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action
(Parameter 233)
•
An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Or
•
Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC
(Parameter 192)
•
Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action
(Parameter 233)
•
An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
6.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay, and it opens when a
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with
Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 76 - Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
E300
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
I- Run 0- Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in Figure 77
is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 27.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
171
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 77 - Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) DeviceLogix Program
172
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Timing Diagram
Figure 78 - Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Start
Stop
Relay 0
Trip
Trip Reset
Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with
Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 28) uses the E300 Operator Station’s “I” and “0” keys to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when you release the
“I” button. The E300 issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The auxiliary contact from the contactor of the non-reversing starter is wired into
Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback
Timeout (Parameter 213), then the E300 issues a trip or warning event.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled, and the Local/Remote yellow LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4.
Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
5.
Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
173
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
•
Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter
186)
•
Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter
233)
•
An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Or
•
Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC
(Parameter 192)
•
Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter
233)
•
An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
6.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
8.
Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback
Timeout Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with the contactor auxiliary wired to Input 0 and Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 79 - Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Aux
IN 0
E300
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
I- Run 0- Stop
174
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in Figure 80
is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 28.
Figure 80 - Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback DeviceLogix Program
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
175
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
176
Start
Stop
Timing Diagram
Figure 81 - Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Trip Event Feedback Timeout
Feedback (IN0)
Relay 0
Timer
Feedback
Timeout Trip
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two Wire
Control
(Parameter 195 = 36) uses Input 0 to control Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. Input 0 is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when Input 0 is active.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control operating mode uses the signal from Input 0 to control the starter. When an E300 powers up, the starter energizes if Input 0 is active.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
5.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled by the state of Input 0 and opens when a trip event occurs.
a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 82 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run/Stop
IN 0
E300
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in Figure 83
is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 36.
Figure 83 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control DeviceLogix Program
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
177
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
178
Timing Diagram
Figure 84 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Run/Stop
Relay 0
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two Wire
Control with Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 37) uses the state of Input 1 to control
Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. Input 0 is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when Input 1 is active.
The auxiliary contact from the non-reversing starter’s contactor is wired into
Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback
Timeout (Parameter 213), then the E300 issues a trip or warning event.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback operating mode uses the state of Input 1 to control the starter. When the E300 powers up, the starter energizes if Input 1 is active.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4.
Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback
Timeout Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
5.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is
controlled by the state if Input 1 and opens when a trip event occurs. Figure 85
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 85 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Aux
Run/Stop
IN 0
IN 1
E300
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in Figure 86
is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 37.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
179
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 86 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback DeviceLogix
Program
180
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Run/Stop
Relay 0
Feedback
Timer
Feedback
Timeout Trip
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Timing Diagram
Figure 87 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback Timing Diagram
Normal Operation Trip Event Feedback Timeout
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three
Wire Control
(Parameter 195 = 38) uses an active state in Input 1 (normally open momentary push button) to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil, and a de-active state in Input 0 is used (normally closed push button) to de-energize Output Relay 0. Both Input 0 and Input 1 are momentary values, so the non-reversing starter only energizes if Input 0 is active and Input 1 is momentarily active.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
5.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
181
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is energized when Input 0 is active and Input 1 is momentarily active. Output Relay
0 de-energizes when Input 0 is momentarily de-active or when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with three wire control and an Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 88 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Stop
Run
IN 0
IN 1
E300
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in Figure 89 is automatically loaded and
enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 38.
Figure 89 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control DeviceLogix Program
182
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Timing Diagram
Figure 90 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Start
Stop
Relay 0
Trip
Trip Reset
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three
Wire Control with Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 39) uses an active state in Input 1
(normally open momentary push button) to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil, and a de-active state in Input 2 is used (normally closed momentary push button) to de-energize Output Relay 0. Both Input 1 and
Input 2 are momentary values, so the non-reversing starter only energizes if Input
2 is active and Input 1 is momentarily active.
The auxiliary contact from the non-reversing starter’s contactor is wired into
Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback
Timeout (Parameter 213), then the E300 issues a trip or warning event.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Three digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5.
Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback
Timeout Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
183
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
6.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is
controlled by the state if Input 1 and opens when a trip event occurs. Figure 91 is
a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with three wire control and Output
Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 91 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Aux
Run
Stop
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
E300
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in Figure 92 is automatically loaded and
enabled in the E300 on powerup or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 39.
184
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 92 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control with Feedback DeviceLogix
Program
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
185
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Start
Stop
Feedback (IN0)
Relay 0
Timer
Feedback
Timeout Trip
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timing Diagram
Figure 93 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control with Feedback Timing Diagram
Trip Event Feedback Timeout
186
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Network& Operator
Station)
(Parameter 195 = 11) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in
Output Assembly 144 in Remote control mode and the E300 Operator Station’s
“I” and “0” keys in Local control mode to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the nonreversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1 in Remote control mode. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost in Remote control mode by using the Network
Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters
(Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 4
.
The E300 Operator Station’s “I”, “0”, and “Local/Remote” keys are momentary push buttons. Press and release the “I” button in Local control mode to energize the starter. Press and release the “0” button in Local control mode to de-energize the starter.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
To change between Local and Remote control mode press and release the “Local/
Remote” button on the E300 Operator Station. The LED above “Local/Remote” button illuminates yellow in Local control mode and red in Remote control mode.
The E300 issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data is set to 1.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4.
Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
5.
Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
•
Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter
186)
•
Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter
233)
•
An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Or
•
Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC
(Parameter 192)
•
Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action
(Parameter 233)
•
An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
6.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
187
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 94 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
E300
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
I- Run 0- Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in Figure 95 is automatically loaded and
enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 11.
188
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 95 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) DeviceLogix Program
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
189
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
190
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Network& Operator
Station) with Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 12) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 in Remote control mode and the E300 Operator Station’s “I” and “0” keys in Local control mode to control
Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when
LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1 in Remote control mode. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost in
Remote control mode by using the Network Communication Fault and Network
Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 4 .
The E300 Operator Station’s “I”, “0”, and “Local/Remote” keys are momentary push buttons. Press and release the “I” button in Local control mode to energize the starter. Press and release the “0” button in Local control mode to de-energize the starter.
To change between Local and Remote control mode press and release the “Local/
Remote” button on the E300 Operator Station. The LED above “Local/Remote” button illuminates yellow in Local control mode and red in Remote control mode.
The auxiliary contact from the non-reversing starter’s contactor is wired into
Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback
Timeout (Parameter 213), then the E300 issues a trip or warning event.
The E300 issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data is set to 1.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4.
Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
5.
Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
•
Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC
(Parameter 186)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
•
Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action
(Parameter 233)
•
An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Or
•
Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC
(Parameter 192)
•
Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action
(Parameter 233)
•
An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
6.
Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback
Timeout Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
7.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
8.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
Figure 96 is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with the contactor
auxiliary wired into Input 0 and Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 96 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
IN 0
Run Aux
E300
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
I- Run 0- Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating
Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 12.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
191
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 97 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) with Feedback DeviceLogix
Program, Part A
192
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 98 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) with Feedback DeviceLogix
Program, Part B
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O)
– Two Wire Control
(Parameter 195 = 16) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 in Remote control mode and
Input 0 in Local control mode to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. Input 1 determines if the motor starter is in Remote or Local control mode.
LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1 in Remote control mode. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost in Remote control mode by using the Network
Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters
(Parameters 569 – 573) described in
In Local control mode, the state of Input 0 controls Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. Input 0 is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when Input 0 is active.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
193
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
194
Input 1 is used to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input
1 to select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 1 to select Local control mode.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data is set to 1.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
5.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 99 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run/Stop
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 0
IN 1
E300
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
Figure 100 is automatically loaded
and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 16.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 100 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control DeviceLogix Program
Timing Diagram
Figure 101 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Run/Stop
Relay 0
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback –
Two-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback – Two Wire Control
(Parameter 195 = 17) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 in Remote control mode and
Input 2 in Local control mode to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. Input 3 determines whether the motor starter is in Remote or Local control mode. LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1 in Remote control mode. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost in Remote control mode by using the Network
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
195
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters
(Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 4
.
In Local control mode, the state of Input 2 controls Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. Input 2 is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when Input 2 is active.
Input 3 is used to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input
3 to select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
The auxiliary contact from the non-reversing starter’s contactor is wired into
Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback
Timeout (Parameter 213), then the E300 issues a trip or warning event.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data is set to 1.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Three digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5.
Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback
Timeout Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
6.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
196
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 102 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback – Two-wire Control
Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run/Aux
IN 0
E300
Run/Stop
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 2
IN 3
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
Figure 103 is automatically loaded
and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 17.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
197
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 103 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback – Two-wire Control
DeviceLogix Program
198
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Run/Stop
Relay 0
Feedback
Timer
Feedback
Timeout Trip
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Timing Diagram
Figure 104 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback – Two-wire Control
Timing Diagram
Normal Operation
Trip Event Feedback Timeout
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Network& Operator
Station) – Three Wire Control
(Parameter 195 = 18) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 in Remote control mode and
Input 1 & Input 2 in Local control mode to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the nonreversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1 in Remote control mode. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost in Remote control mode by using the Network
Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters
(Parameters 569 – 573) described in
Local control mode uses a normally open momentary push button that is wired to Input 1 to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. A normally closed momentary push button that is wired to Input 2 is used to deenergize Output Relay 0. The non-reversing starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and Input 1 is momentarily active.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
199
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
200
Input 3 is used to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input
3 to select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data is set to 1.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Three digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 105 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
E300
Run
Stop
Local Inputs/
Controller
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
Figure 106 is automatically loaded
and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 18.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 106 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control DeviceLogix
Program
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback – Threewire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Network& Operator
Station) with Feedback – Three Wire Control
(Parameter 195 = 19) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 in Remote control mode and Input 1 & Input 2 in Local control mode to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1 in Remote control mode. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost in Remote control mode by using the
Network Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters
(Parameters 569 – 573) described in
Local control mode uses a normally open momentary push button that is wired to Input 1 to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. A normally closed momentary push button that is wired to Input 2 is used to deenergize Output Relay 0. The non-reversing starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and Input 1 is momentarily active.
Input 3 is used to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input
3 to select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
201
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
202
The auxiliary contact from the non-reversing starter’s contactor is wired into
Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback
Timeout (Parameter 213), then the E300 issues a trip or warning event.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data is set to 1.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Three digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5.
Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback
Timeout Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
6.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 107 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback – Three-wire Control
Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Aux
Run
Stop
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
E300
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
Figure 108 is automatically loaded
and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 19.
Figure 108 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback – Three-wire Control
DeviceLogix Program
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
203
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Non-reversing Starter (Custom)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Custom)
(Parameter
195 = 50) operates as a non-reversing starter one output relay that is assigned as a normally open control relay. The Non-reversing Starter (Custom) operating mode is used for applications that want customized DeviceLogix programs. This operating mode requires minimal configuration rules.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Set any of the Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to
Control Relay.
3.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay can also be wired as a control relay so that the relay that is controlled by the communication network opens when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Relay 0 configured as a control relay. Relay 0 receives control commands from an automation controller to energize or de-energize the contactor coil. Relay 0 also goes to an open state when there is a trip event.
Figure 109 - Control Relay Wiring Diagram
Relay 0
Configured as a
Control Relay
1
R03 R04
A1
M
A2
1
Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
DeviceLogix Program
The last saved DeviceLogix program is executed in the E300 on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 50.
204
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Timing Diagram
Figure 110 - Non-reversing Starter (Custom) Timing Diagram
Trip Relay
Device
Status0.Trip
Present
Trip Reset
Reversing Starter Operating
Modes
The non-reversing starter-based operating modes of the E300 relay provide the control logic for a reversing full voltage starter. Two normally open control relays control the forward and reverse contactor coils. When a trip event occurs, both control relays remain open until the E300 receives a trip reset command. There are 11 reversing starter-based operating modes to choose from:
•
Network
•
Network with Feedback
•
Operator Station
•
Operator Station with Feedback
•
Local I/O – Two-wire Control
•
Local I/O with Feedback – Two-wire Control
•
Local I/O – Three-wire Control
•
Network & Operator Station
•
Network & Local I/O – Two-wire Control
•
Network & Local I/O – Three-wire Control
•
Custom
Reversing Starter (Network)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Network)
(Parameter 195 =
5) uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control
Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in
Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
205
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
206
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Reversing Starter (Network) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
to control the starter. When communication between an automation controller and the E300 is restored, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
is set to 1.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3.
Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the forward contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the reversing contactor in which both relays are controlled by the communication network and
open when a trip event occurs. Figure 111
is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 111 - Reversing Starter (Network) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
E300
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 0
R04
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating
Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 5.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Figure 112 - Reversing Starter (Network) DeviceLogix Program, Part A
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
207
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 113 - Reversing Starter (Network) DeviceLogix Program, Part B
208
Forward
Reverse
Timing Diagram
Figure 114 - Reversing Starter (Network) Timing Diagram
Trip Event
FWD (Relay 0)
REV (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 6) uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output
Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and
LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of
1. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication
Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 4
.
The auxiliary contact from the forward contactor is wired into Input 0, and the auxiliary contact from the reversing contactor is wired into Input 1. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout (Parameter
213), then the E300 issues a trip or warning event.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Reversing Starter (Network) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
is set to 1.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3.
Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5.
Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback
Timeout Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the forward contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the reversing contactor in which both relays are controlled by the communication network and open when a trip event occurs.
Figure 115 is a wiring diagram of a reversing
starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays and the contactor auxiliary contacts wired to Input 0 and Input 1.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
209
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 115 - Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Forward Aux
Run Reverse Aux
IN 0
IN 1
E300
R03
R13
Relay 0
R04
Relay 0
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
, and
is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when
Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 6.
210
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 116 - Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback DeviceLogix Program, Part A
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
211
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 117 - Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback DeviceLogix Program, Part B
212
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 118 - Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback DeviceLogix Program, Part C
FWD (Relay 0)
REV (Relay 1)
FWD Feedback
(IN0)
REV Feedback
(IN1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timer
Feedback
Timeout Trip
Timing Diagram
Figure 119 - Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Trip Event Feedback Timeout
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
213
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
214
Reversing Starter (Operator Station)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Operating Station)
(Parameter 195 = 29) uses the E300 Operator Station’s “I” key to control Output
Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil. The “II” key controls Output
Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. The “0” key is used to deenergize Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the reversing starter remains energized when you release the “I” or
“II” button. The “0” button must be pressed before changing to another direction. The E300 issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The E300 Operator Station’s Reset button is enabled, and the Local/Remote yellow LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3.
Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5.
Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
6.
Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
•
Option Match Trip must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
•
Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action
(Parameter 233)
•
An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Or
•
Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC
(Parameter 192)
•
Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter
233)
•
An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
7.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
8.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the forward contactor, and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the reversing
contactor. Both relays open when a trip event occurs. Figure 120
is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 120 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
R03
R13
E300
Relay 0
R04
Relay 1
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
I- Run Forward
II- Run Reverse
0- Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating
Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 29.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
215
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 121 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) DeviceLogix Program, Part A
216
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 122 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) DeviceLogix Program, Part B
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
217
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 123 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) DeviceLogix Program, Part C
218
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 124 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) DeviceLogix Program, Part D
Forward
Stop
Reverse
FWD (Relay 0)
REV (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timing Diagram
Figure 125 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with
Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 30) uses the E300 Operator Station’s “I” and “0” keys to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the reversing starter remains energized when you release the “I” button.The “0” button must be pressed before changing to another direction.
The E300 issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
219
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
220
The auxiliary contact from the reversing starter’s contactor is wired into Input 0.
If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback
Timeout (Parameter 213), then the E300 issues a trip or warning event.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The E300 Operator Station’s Reset button is enabled, and the Local/Remote yellow LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3.
Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5.
Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
6.
Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
•
Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter
186)
•
Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter
233)
•
An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Or
•
Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC
(Parameter 192)
•
Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action
(Parameter 233)
•
An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
7.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
8.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
9.
Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback
Timeout Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the forward contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the reversing
contactor. Both relays open when a trip event occurs. Figure 126
is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays and the contactor auxiliary contacts wired to Input 0 and Input 1.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 126 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Forward Aux
Run Reverse Aux
IN 0
IN 1
R03
R13
E300
Relay 0
R04
Relay 1
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
I- Run Forward
II- Run Reverse
0- Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating
Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 30.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
221
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 127 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback DeviceLogix Program, Part A
222
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 128 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback DeviceLogix Program, Part B
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
223
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 129 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback DeviceLogix Program, Part C
224
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 130 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback DeviceLogix Program, Part D
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
225
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Forward
Stop
Timing Diagram
Figure 131 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Trip Event Feedback
Timeout
Reverse
FWD (Relay 0)
REV (Relay 1)
FWD Feedback
REV Feedback
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timer
Feedback
Timeout Trip
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two Wire
Control
(Parameter 195 = 40) uses Input 0 to control Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil of the forward contactor, and Input 1 to control
Output Relay 1, which controls the contactor coil of the reversing contactor.
Both Input 0 and Input 1 are maintained signals, so the reversing starter remains energized when either Input 0 or Input 1 is active. Both Input 0 and Input 1 must be in a de-active state before changing to another direction
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
226
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
IMPORTANT
The Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control operating mode uses the signal from Input 0 or Input 1 to control the starter. When an E300 powers up, the starter energizes if either Input 0 or Input 1 is active.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3.
Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the forward contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the reversing
contactor. Both relays open when a trip event occurs. Figure 132
is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 132 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Forward/Stop
Run Reverse/Stop
IN 0
IN 1
E300
R03
R13
Relay 0
R04
Relay 0
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating
Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 40.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
227
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 133 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control DeviceLogix Program, Part A
228
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 134 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control DeviceLogix Program, Part B
Forward
Reverse
FWD (Relay 0)
REV (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timing Diagram
Figure 135 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
229
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
230
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two Wire
Control
(Parameter 195 = 41) uses Input 0 to control Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil of the forward contactor, and Input 1 to control
Output Relay 1, which controls the contactor coil of the reversing contactor.
Both Input 0 and Input 1 are maintained signals, so the reversing starter remains energized when either Input 0 or Input 1 is active. Both Input 0 and Input 1 must be in a de-active state before changing to another direction.
The auxiliary contact from the starter’s forward contactor is wired into Input 0, and the auxiliary contact from the starter’s reversing contactor is wired into
Input 1. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback
Timeout (Parameter 213), then the E300 issues a trip or warning event.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control operating mode uses the signal from Input 0 or Input 1 to control the starter. When an E300 powers up, the starter energizes if either Input 0 or Input 1 is active.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3.
Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5.
Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback
Timeout Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
6.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the forward contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the reversing
contactor. Both relays open when a trip event occurs. Figure 136
is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays and the contactor auxiliary contacts wired to Input 0 and Input 1.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 136 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Forward Aux
Run Reverse Aux
Run Forward/Stop
Run Reverse/Stop
IN 3
R03
R13
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
E300
Relay 0
Relay 0
R04
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
Figure 139 is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when
Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 41.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
231
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 137 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback DeviceLogix
Program, Part A
232
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 138 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback DeviceLogix
Program, Part B
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
233
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 139 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback DeviceLogix
Program, Part C
234
Timing Diagram
Figure 140 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Trip Event Feedback
Timeout
Forward
Stop
Reverse
FWD (Relay 0)
REV (Relay 1)
FWD Feedback
REV Feedback
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timer
Feedback
Timeout Trip
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
R03
R13
Relay 0
R04
Relay 0
R14
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three Wire
Control
(Parameter 195 = 42) uses a normally open momentary push button in
Input 0 to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil. A normally open momentary push button in Input 1 is used to energize Output
Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. A normally closed push button in Input 2 is used to de-energize Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1.
Both Input 0, Input 1, and Input 2 are momentary signals, so the reversing starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and Input 0 or Input 1 is momentarily active.
Input 2 must be momentarily de-active before changing to another direction.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Four digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
5.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
6.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Figure 141 is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with three wire control and
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 141 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Forward
Run Reverse
Stop
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
E300
Run Forward
Run Reverse
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
235
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
, and
is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when
Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 42.
236
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 142 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control DeviceLogix Program, Part A
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
237
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 143 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control DeviceLogix Program, Part B
238
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 144 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control DeviceLogix Program, Part C
Timing Diagram
Figure 145 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Forward
Stop
Reverse
FWD (Relay 0)
REV (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Network& Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 = 13) in Remote control mode uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output
Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
239
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
240
Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described
.
In Local control mode, the E300 Operator Station’s “I” key is used to control
Output Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil. The “II” key controls
Output Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. The “0” key is used to de-energize Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the reversing starter remains energized when you release the “I” or “II” button. The “0” button must be pressed before changing to another direction.
To change between Local and Remote control mode press and release the “Local/
Remote” button on the E300 Operator Station. The LED above “Local/Remote” button illuminates yellow in Local control mode and red in Remote control mode.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The E300 issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data is set to 1.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3.
Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5.
Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
6.
Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
•
Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter
186)
•
Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter
233)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
•
An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Or
•
Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC
(Parameter 192)
•
Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action
(Parameter 233)
•
An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
7.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
8.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 are wired as a control relays in which the relay is controlled by the communication network or E300
Operator Station, and both output relays open when a trip event occurs.
Figure 146 is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and
Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 146 - Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
R03
R13
E300
Relay 0
R04
Relay 1
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
I- Run Forward
II- Run Reverse
0- Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating
Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 13.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
241
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 147 - Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) DeviceLogix Program, Part A
242
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 148 - Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) DeviceLogix Program, Part B
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
243
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 149 - Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) DeviceLogix Program, Part C
244
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 150 - Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) DeviceLogix Program, Part D
Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Network& Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 = 20) in Remote control mode uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output
Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil.
Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
245
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
246
the starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described
.
In Local control mode, Input 0 is used to control Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil of the forward contactor, and Input 1 is used to control Output
Relay 1, which controls the contactor coil of the reversing contactor. Both Input
0 and Input 1 are maintained signals, so the reversing starter remains energized when either Input 0 or Input 1 is active. Both Input 0 and Input 1 must be in a deactive state before changing to another direction.
Input 3 is used to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input
3 to select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300, the starter energizes if the value in
LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
is set to 1.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Three digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4.
Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
5.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
6.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 are wired as a control relays in which the relay is controlled by the communication network or Input 0 &
Input 1. Both output relays open when a trip event occurs. Figure 151
is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 151 - Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Forward/Stop
Run Reverse/Stop
IN 0
IN 1
E300
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 3
R03
R13
Relay 0
R04
Relay 0
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating
Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 20.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
247
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 152 - Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control DeviceLogix Program,
Part A
248
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 153 - Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control DeviceLogix Program,
Part B
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
249
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Forward
Reverse
FWD (Relay 0)
REV (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timing Diagram
Figure 154 - Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Network& Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 = 21) in Remote control mode uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output
Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil.
Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described
.
Local control mode uses a normally open momentary push button in Input 0 to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil. A normally open momentary push button in Input 1 is used to energize Output Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. A normally closed push button in
Input 2 is used to de-energize Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1. Both Input 0,
Input 1, and Input 2 are momentary signals, so the reversing starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and Input 0 or Input 1 is momentarily active.
Input 2 must be momentarily de-active before changing to another direction.
250
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Input 3 is used to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input
3 to select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300, the starter energizes if the value in
LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
is set to 1.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Four digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4.
Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
5.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
6.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 are wired as a control relays in which the relay is controlled by the communication network or Input 0, Input
1, and Input 2. Both output relays open when a trip event occurs.
wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
251
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 155 - Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Forward
Run Reverse
Stop
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
R03
R13
E300
Relay 0
R04
Relay 0
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
, and
is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when
Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 21.
252
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 156 - Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control DeviceLogix Program,
Part A
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
253
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 157 - Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control DeviceLogix Program,
Part B
254
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 158 - Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control DeviceLogix Program,
Part C
Reversing Starter (Custom)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Custom)
(Parameter 195 =
51) operates as a reversing starter with two output relays that are assigned as normally open control relays. The Reversing Starter (Custom) operating mode is used for applications that want customized DeviceLogix programs. This operating mode requires minimal configuration rules.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Set two of the Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to
Control Relay.
3.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
255
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Wiring Diagram
is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and
Output Relay 1 configured as control relays. Both Output Relay 0 and Output
Relay 1 go to an open state when there is a trip event.
Figure 159 - Reversing Starter (Custom) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
E300
R03
Relay 0
R13
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
DeviceLogix Program
The last saved DeviceLogix program is executed in the E300 on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 50.
Timing Diagram
Figure 160 - Reversing Starter (Custom) Timing Diagram
Trip Relay
Device
Status0.Trip
Present
Trip Reset
Two-speed Starter Operating
Modes
The two-speed starter-based operating modes of the E300 relay provide the control logic for a two-speed full-voltage starter. Two normally open control relays control the high-speed and low-speed contactor coils. When a trip event occurs, both control relays remain open until the E300 receives a trip reset command. There are 11 two-speed starter-based operating modes to choose from:
256
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
•
Network
•
Network with Feedback
•
Operator Station
•
Operator Station with Feedback
•
Local I/O – Two-wire Control
•
Local I/O with Feedback – Two-wire Control
•
Local I/O – Three-wire Control
•
Network & Operator Station
•
Network & Local I/O – Two-wire Control
•
Network & Local I/O – Three-wire Control
•
Custom
Two-speed Starter (Network)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Network)
(Parameter 195 =
9) uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control
Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and
LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the two-speed starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of
1. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication
Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 4
.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Two-speed Starter (Network) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
is set to 1.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3.
Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
257
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the high-speed contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the low-speed contactor. In this configuration, both relays are controlled by the communication network and open when a trip event occurs.
Figure 161 is a wiring diagram of a
two-speed starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 161 - Two-speed Starter (Network) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
E300
R03
R13
Relay 0
R04
Relay 0
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating
Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 9.
258
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Figure 162 - Two-speed Starter (Network) DeviceLogix Program, Part A
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
259
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 163 - Two-speed Starter (Network) DeviceLogix Program, Part B
260
Run Fast
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Timing Diagram
Figure 164 - Two-speed Starter (Network) Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Slow (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Two-speed Starter (Network) with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Two-speed Starter (Network) with Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 10) uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output
Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and
LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the two-speed starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of
1. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication
Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 4
.
The auxiliary contact from the high-speed contactor is wired into Input 0, and the auxiliary contact from the low-speed contactor is wired into Input 1. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), then the E300 issues a trip or warning event.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Two-speed Starter (Network) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
is set to 1.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3.
Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5.
Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback
Timeout Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the high-speed contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the low-speed contactor. In this configuration, both relays are controlled by the communication network and open when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a
Two-speed Starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays and the contactor auxiliary contacts wired to Input 0 and Input 1.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
261
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 165 - Two-speed Starter (Network) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Fast Aux
Run Slow Aux
IN 0
IN 1
E300
R03
R13
Relay 0
R04
Relay 0
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
, and
is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when
Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 10.
262
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 166 - Two-speed Starter (Network) with Feedback DeviceLogix Program, Part A
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
263
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 167 - Two-speed Starter (Network) with Feedback DeviceLogix Program, Part B
264
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 168 - Two-speed Starter (Network) with Feedback DeviceLogix Program, Part C
Run Fast
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Fast Feedback
Slow Feedback
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timer
Feedback
Timeout Trip
Timing Diagram
Figure 169 - Two-speed Starter (Network) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Trip Event Feedback Timeout
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
265
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
266
Two-speed Starter (Operator Station)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Operating Station)
(Parameter 195 = 33) uses the E300 Operator Station’s “I” key to control Output
Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil. The “II” key controls
Output Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. The “0” key is used to de-energize Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the two-speed starter remains energized when you release the “I” or “II” button.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The E300 issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The E300 Operator Station’s Reset button is enabled, and the Local/Remote yellow LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3.
Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5.
Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
6.
Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
•
Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter
186)
•
Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter
233)
•
An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Or
•
Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC
(Parameter 192)
•
Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter
233)
•
An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
7.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
8.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the high-speed contactor, and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the low-speed
contactor. Both relays open when a trip event occurs. Figure 170
is a wiring diagram of a two-speed starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 170 - Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
R03
R13
E300
Relay 0
R04
Relay 1
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
I- Run Forward
II- Run Reverse
0- Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
Figure 173 is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when
Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 33.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
267
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 171 - Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) DeviceLogix Program, Part A
268
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 172 - Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) DeviceLogix Program, Part B
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
269
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 173 - Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) DeviceLogix Program, Part C
270
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Run Fast
Stop
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Timing Diagram
Figure 174 - Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Operator Station) with
Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 34) uses the E300 Operator Station’s “I” and “0” keys to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the two-speed starter remains energized when you release the “I” button. The E300 issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The auxiliary contact from the two-speed starter’s contactor is wired into Input
0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback
Timeout (Parameter 213), then the E300 issues a trip or warning event.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The E300 Operator Station’s Reset button is enabled, and the Local/Remote yellow LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
271
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3.
Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5.
Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
6.
Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
•
Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC
(Parameter 186)
•
Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action
(Parameter 233)
•
An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Or
•
Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC
(Parameter 192)
•
Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action
(Parameter 233)
•
An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
7.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
8.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
9.
Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback
Timeout Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the high-speed contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the low-speed
contactor. Both relays open when a trip event occurs. Figure 175
is a wiring diagram of a two-speed starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays and the contactor auxiliary contacts wired to Input 0 and Input 1.
272
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 175 - Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Fast Aux
Run Slow Aux
IN 0
IN 1
R03
R13
E300
Relay 0
R04
Relay 1
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
I- Run Forward
II- Run Reverse
0- Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating
Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 34.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
273
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 176 - Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback DeviceLogix Program, Part A
274
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 177 - Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback DeviceLogix Program, Part B
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
275
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 178 - Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback DeviceLogix Program, Part C
276
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 179 - Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback DeviceLogix Program, Part D
Run Fast
Stop
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Fast Feedback
Slow Feedback
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timer
Feedback
Timeout Trip
Timing Diagram
Figure 180 - Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Feedback
Timeout
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
277
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two Wire
Control
(Parameter 195 = 46) uses Input 0 to control Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil of the high-speed contactor, and Input 1 to control
Output Relay 1, which controls the contactor coil of the low-speed contactor.
Both Input 0 and Input 1 are maintained signals, so the two-speed starter remains energized when either Input 0 or Input 1 is active.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control operating mode uses the signal from Input 0 or Input 1 to control the starter. When an E300 powers up, the starter energizes if either Input 0 or Input 1 is active.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3.
Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the high-speed contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the low-speed
contactor. Both relays open when a trip event occurs. Figure 181
is a wiring diagram of a two-speed starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
278
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 181 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Fast/Stop
Run Slow/Stop
IN 0
IN 1
E300
R03
R13
Relay 0
R04
Relay 0
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating
Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 46.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
279
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 182 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control DeviceLogix Program, Part A
280
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 183 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control DeviceLogix Program, Part B
Run Fast
Run Slow
Timing Diagram
Figure 184 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
281
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
282
Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two Wire
Control
(Parameter 195 = 47) uses Input 0 to control Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil of the high-speed contactor and Input 1 to control
Output Relay 1, which controls the contactor coil of the low-speed contactor.
Both Input 0 and Input 1 are maintained signals, so the two-speed starter remains energized when either Input 0 or Input 1 is active.
The auxiliary contact from the starter’s high-speed contactor is wired into Input
0, and the auxiliary contact from the starter’s low-speed contactor is wired into
Input 1. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback
Timeout (Parameter 213), then the E300 issues a trip or warning event.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control operating mode uses the signal from Input 0 or Input 1 to control the starter. When an E300 powers up, the starter energizes if either Input 0 or Input 1 is active.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3.
Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5.
Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback
Timeout Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
6.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the high-speed contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the low-speed
contactor. Both relays open when a trip event occurs. Figure 185
is a wiring diagram of a Two-speed Starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays and the contactor auxiliary contacts wired to Input 0 and Input 1.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 185 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Fast Aux
Run Slow Aux
Run Fast/Stop
Run Slow/Stop
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
R03
R13
E300
Relay 0
R04
Relay 0
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
Figure 188 is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when
Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 47.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
283
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 186 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback DeviceLogix
Program, Part A
284
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 187 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback DeviceLogix
Program, Part B
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
285
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 188 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback DeviceLogix
Program, Part C
286
Run Fast
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Fast Feedback
Slow Feedback
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timer
Feedback
Timeout Trip
Timing Diagram
Figure 189 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback Timing Diagram
Trip Event Feedback Timeout
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Local I/O) – Three Wire
Control
(Parameter 195 = 48) uses a normally open momentary push button in
Input 0 to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil.
A normally open momentary push button in Input 1 is used to energize Output
Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. A normally closed push button in Input 2 is used to de-energize Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1.
Both Input 0, Input 1, and Input 2 are momentary signals, so the two-speed starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and Input 0 or Input 1 is momentarily active.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Four digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
5.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
6.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Figure 190 is a wiring diagram of a Two-speed Starter with three-wire control and
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 190 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Fast
Run Slow
Stop
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
E300
R03
R13
Relay 0
R04
Relay 0
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
287
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
, and
is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when
Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 48.
Figure 191 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control DeviceLogix Program, Part A
288
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 192 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control DeviceLogix Program, Part B
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
289
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 193 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control DeviceLogix Program, Part C
290
Timing Diagram
Figure 194 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Run Fast
Stop
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Network& Operator
Station)
(Parameter 195 = 15) in Remote control mode uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
controls the high-speed contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output
Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil.
Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the two-speed starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
.
In Local control mode, the E300 Operator Station’s “I” key is used to control
Output Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil. The “II” key controls Output Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. The “0” key is used to de-energize Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the two-speed starter remains energized when you release the “I” or “II” button.
To change between Local and Remote control mode press and release the “Local/
Remote” button on the E300 Operator Station. The LED above “Local/Remote” button illuminates yellow in Local control mode and red in Remote control mode.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The E300 issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data is set to 1.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3.
Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5.
Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
6.
Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
•
Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC
(Parameter 186)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
291
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
292
•
Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action
(Parameter 233)
•
An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Or
•
Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC
(Parameter 192)
•
Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action
(Parameter 233)
•
An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
7.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
8.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 are wired as a control relays in which the relay is controlled by the communication network or E300
Operator Station, and both output relays open when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a two-speed starter with Output Relay 0 and
Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 195 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
R03
R13
E300
Relay 0
R04
Relay 1
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
I- Run Forward
II- Run Reverse
0- Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating
Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 15.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 196 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station) DeviceLogix Program, Part A
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
293
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 197 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station) DeviceLogix Program, Part B
294
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 198 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station) DeviceLogix Program, Part C
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
295
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 199 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station) DeviceLogix Program, Part D
296
Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Network& Operator
Station)
(Parameter 195 = 24) in Remote control mode uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output
Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil.
Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the two-speed starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
the starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
.
In Local control mode, Input 0 is used to control Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil of the high-speed contactor, and Input 1 is used to control
Output Relay 1, which controls the contactor coil of the low-speed contactor.
Both Input 0 and Input 1 are maintained signals, so the two-speed starter remains energized when either Input 0 or Input 1 is active.
Input 3 is used to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input
3 to select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300, the starter energizes if the value in
LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
is set to 1.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Three digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4.
Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
5.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
6.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 are wired as a control relays in which the relay is controlled by the communication network or Input 0 &
Input 1. Both output relays open when a trip event occurs. Figure 200 is a wiring
diagram of a Two-speed Starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
297
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 200 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Fast/Stop
Run Slow/Stop
IN 0
IN 1
E300
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 3
R03
R13
Relay 0
R04
Relay 0
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when Operating
Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 24.
298
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 201 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control DeviceLogix Program,
Part A
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
299
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 202 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control DeviceLogix Program,
Part B
300
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Run Fast
Run Slow
Timing Diagram
Figure 203 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Network& Operator
Station)
(Parameter 195 = 25) in Remote control mode uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output
Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil.
Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the two-speed starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
.
Local control mode uses a normally open momentary push button in Input 0 to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil. A normally open momentary push button in Input 1 is used to energize Output
Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. A normally closed push button in Input 2 is used to de-energize Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1.
Both Input 0, Input 1, and Input 2 are momentary signals, so the two-speed starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and Input 0 or Input 1 is momentarily active.
Input 3 is used to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input
3 to select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
301
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
302
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300, the starter energizes if the value in
LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
is set to 1.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Four digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3.
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4.
Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
5.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
6.
Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7.
Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 are wired as a control relays in which the relay is controlled by the communication network or Input 0, Input
1, and Input 2. Both output relays open when a trip event occurs.
wiring diagram of a two-speed starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 204 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Fast
Run Slow
Stop
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
E300
IN 3
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 0
R04
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program that is shown in
Figure 207 is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 on power-up or when
Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 25.
Figure 205 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control DeviceLogix Program,
Part A
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
303
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Figure 206 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control DeviceLogix Program,
Part B
304
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Figure 207 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control DeviceLogix Program,
Part C
Two-Speed Starter (Custom)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Custom)
(Parameter 195 =
53) operates as a two-speed starter with two output relays that are assigned as normally open control relays. The Two-speed Starter (Custom) operating mode is used for applications that want customized DeviceLogix programs. This operating mode requires minimal configuration rules.
Rules
1.
Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2.
Set two of the Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to
Control Relay.
3.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
305
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Wiring Diagram
is a wiring diagram of a Two-speed Starter with Output Relay 0 and
Output Relay 1 configured as control relays. Both Output Relay 0 and Output
Relay 1 go to an open state when there is a trip event.
Figure 208 - Two-Speed Starter (Custom) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
E300
R03
R13
Relay 0
R04
Relay 0
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
DeviceLogix Program
The last saved DeviceLogix program is executed in the E300 on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 53.
Timing Diagram
Figure 209 - Two-Speed Starter (Custom) Timing Diagram
Trip Relay
Device
Status0.Trip
Present
Trip Reset
Monitor Operating Mode
The E300 relay’s monitor-based operating mode allows you to disable all protection features of the E300 relay. You can use the E300 relay as a monitoring device to report current, voltage, power, and energy information.
There is one monitor based operating mode – Custom.
306
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Operating Modes
Chapter 5
Monitor (Custom)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Monitor (Custom)
(Parameter 195 = 54) allows you to use the E300 relay as a monitoring device. No configuration rules apply in this operating mode if all motor protection features are disabled.
Rules
1.
If any protection trip events are enabled (excluding Configuration, NVS, and Hardware Fault trip), then set any of the Output Ptxx Assignments
(Parameters 202…204) to the appropriate value of Trip Relay, Control
Relay, Monitor Lx Trip Relay, or Monitor Lx Control Relay.
Wiring Diagram
Not Applicable
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
307
Chapter 5
Operating Modes
Notes:
308
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter
6
Introduction
This chapter provides detailed information about the protective trip and warning functions of the E300™
Electronic Overload Relay. The protective trip and warning functions are organized into five sections:
•
Current-based
•
Voltage-based
•
Power-based
•
Control-based
•
Analog-based
This chapter explains the trip and warning protection features of the E300 relay and the associated configuration parameters.
Current-based Protection
The E300 relay digitally monitors the electrical current that is consumed by an electric motor. This electric current information is used for the following protective trip and warning functions:
•
Overload Trip/Warning
•
Phase Loss Trip
•
Ground Fault Trip/Warning
•
Stall Trip
•
Jam Trip/Warning
•
Underload Trip/Warning
•
Current Imbalance Trip/Warning
•
Line Under Current Trip/Warning
•
Line Over Current Trip/Warning
•
Line Loss Trip/Warning
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
309
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Current Trip Enable (Parameter 183) and Current Warning Enable (Parameter
189) are used to enable the respective current-based protective trip and warning functions.
Table 223 - Current Trip Enable (Parameter 183)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Overload Trip
Function
X
Phase Loss Trip
X
Ground Fault Trip
X
Stall Trip
X
Jam Trip
X
Underload Trip
X
Current Imbalance Trip
X
L1 Under Current Trip
X
L2 Under Current Trip
X
L3 Under Current Trip
X
L1 Over Current Trip
X
L2 Over Current Trip
X
L3 Over Current Trip
X
L1 Line Loss Trip
X
L2 Line Loss Trip
X
L3 Line Loss Trip
Table 224 - Current Warning Enable (Parameter 189)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Overload Warning
X
Reserved
Ground Fault Warning
Reserved
X
X
X
Jam Warning
Underload Warning
Current Imbalance Warning
X
X
X
L1 Under Current Warning
L2 Under Current Warning
L3 Under Current Warning
X
X
X
L1 Over Current Warning
L2 Over Current Warning
L3 Over Current Warning
X
X
X
L1 Line Loss Warning
L2 Line Loss Warning
L3 Line Loss Warning
310
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) and Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) are used to monitor the respective current-based protective trip and warning functions.
Table 225 - Current Trip Status (Parameter 4)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Overload Trip
Function
X
Phase Loss Trip
X
Ground Fault Current Trip
X
Stall Trip
X
Jam Trip
X
Underload Trip
X
Current Imbalance Trip
X
L1 Under Current Trip
X
L2 Under Current Trip
X
L3 Under Current Trip
X
X
L1 Over Current Trip
L2 Over Current Trip
X
L3 Over Current Trip
X
X
L1 Line Loss Trip
L2 Line Loss Trip
X
L3 Line Loss Trip
Table 226 - Current Warning Status (Parameter 10)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Overload Warning
Reserved
X Ground Fault Warning
Reserved
X Jam Warning
X Underload Warning
X Current Imbalance Warning
X L1 Under Current Warning
X L2 Under Current Warning
X L3 Under Current Warning
X L1 Over Current Warning
X L2 Over Current Warning
X L3 Over Current Warning
X L1 Line Loss Warning
X L2 Line Loss Warning
X L3 Line Loss Warning
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
311
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
312
Overload Protection
The E300 relay provides overload protection through true RMS current measurements of the individual phase currents of the connected motor. Based on the highest current measured, the programmed FLA Setting, and Trip Class, a thermal model that simulates the actual heating of the motor is calculated.
Percent Thermal Capacity Utilized (Parameter 1) reports this calculated value and can be read via the communication network.
Overload Trip
The E300 relay trips with an overload indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Overload trip protection is enabled
•
Current is present
•
% Thermal Capacity Utilized reaches 100%
If the E300 relay trips on an overload, the following occurs:
•
The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red short-1 blink pattern,
•
Bit 0 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Full Load Amps Setting
FLA (Parameter 171) is one of two parameters that affect the E300 relay’s thermal capacity utilization algorithm. Enter the motor’s full-load current rating into this parameter.
Table 227 - FLA (Parameter 171)
FLA (Parameter 171)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.50
(0.5…30 A Sensing Modules)
6.00
(6…60 A Sensing Modules)
10.00
(10…100 A Sensing Modules)
20.00
(20…200 A Sensing Modules)
0.50
65535.00
UDINT
4
100
Amps
FLA2 (Parameter 177) is provided for programming the high-speed FLA value in two-speed motor applications. Activating FLA2 is described in
Table 228 - FLA2 (Parameter 177)
FLA2 (Parameter 177)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.50
(0.5…30 A Sensing Modules)
6.00
(6…60 A Sensing Modules)
10.00
(10…100 A Sensing Modules)
20.00
(20…200 A Sensing Modules)
0.50
65535.00
UDINT
4
100
Amps
USA and Canada Guidelines
•
Motor Service Factor ≥ 1.15: For motors with a service factor rating of
1.15 or greater, program the FLA setting to the full-load current rating on the printed nameplate.
•
Motor Service Factor < 1.15: For motors with a service factor rating less than 1.15, program the FLA setting to 90% of the full-load current rating on the printed nameplate.
•
Wye-Delta (Y-∆) Applications: Follow the application’s service factor instructions, except divide the full-load current rating on the printed nameplate by 1.73.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
313
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Outside USA and Canada Guidelines
•
Maximum Continuous Rated (MCR) Motors: Program the FLA setting to the full-load current rating on the printed nameplate.
•
Star-Delta (Y-∆) Applications: Follow the MCR instructions, except divide the full-load current rating on the printed nameplate by 1.73.
Trip Class
Trip Class is the second of two parameters that affect the E300 relay’s thermal capacity utilization algorithm. Trip class is defined as the maximum time (in seconds) for an overload trip to occur when the motor’s operating current is six times its rated current. The E300 relay offers an adjustable trip class range of
5…30. Enter the application trip class into Trip Class (Parameter 172).
Table 229 - Trip Class (Parameter 172)
Trip Class (Parameter 172)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
5
30
1
USINT
1
Trip Curves
The following figures illustrate the E300 relay’s time-current characteristics for trip classes 5, 10, 20, and 30.
314
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Figure 210 - Time-Current Characteristics for Trip Classes 5, 10, 20, and 30
Trip Class 10
1000
Trip Class 5
1000
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
100
100
10
10
1
100%
Current (% FLA)
Trip Class 20
10000
1000
1000%
1
100%
10000
Current (% FLA)
Trip Class 30
1000%
1000
100
100
10
10
1
100%
Current (% FLA)
1000%
1
100%
Current (% FLA)
1000%
For trip class time-current characteristics other than 5, 10, 20, or 30, scale the
Class 10 trip time according to the following table:
Table 230 - Time-Current Characteristic Scaling Factors
Trip Class
10
11
8
9
12
13
5
6
7
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
Trip Class 10
Multiplier
0.5
Trip Class
19
20
17
18
21
22
14
15
16
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.2
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
Trip Class 10
Multiplier
1.4
Trip Class
28
29
26
27
30
23
24
25
2.8
2.9
3.0
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
Trip Class 10
Multiplier
2.3
Automatic/Manual Reset
Overload Reset Mode (Parameter 173) allows you to select the reset mode for the
E300 relay after an overload or thermistor (PTC) trip. If an overload trip occurs and automatic reset mode is selected, the E300 relay automatically resets when the value stored in % Thermal Capacity Utilized (Parameter 1) falls below the value stored in Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174). If manual reset mode is
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
315
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions selected, the E300 Overload Relay can be manually reset after the % Thermal
Capacity Utilized is less than the OL Reset Level.
Table 231 - Overload Reset Mode (Parameter 173)
Overload Reset Mode (Parameter 173)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0 = Manual
0 = Manual
1 = Automatic
BOOL
1
1
Table 232 - Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174)
Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
75
0
100
USINT
1
1
%TCU
316
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174) is adjustable from 1 to 100% TCU. The following figures illustrate the typical overload reset time delay when Overload
Reset Level is set to 75% TCU.
Figure 211 - Overload Reset Times
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000
Time to Reset in Seconds
100
90
80
70
60
50
0
Trip Class 5
100 200 300
Time to Reset in Seconds
400 500
Trip Class 10 Trip Class 20 Trip Class 30
ATTENTION:
In explosive environment applications, Overload Reset Mode
(Parameter 173) must be set to Manual.
ATTENTION:
In an explosive environment application, Overload Reset Level
(Parameter 174) must be set as low as possible or in accordance with the motor thermal time constant.
Overload Warning
The E300 relay indicates an overload warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Overload warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
% Thermal Capacity Utilized is equal to or greater than Overload Warning
Level
When the overload warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a yellow short-1 blink pattern
•
Bit 0 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
317
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as Warning Alarm close
Overload Warning Level (Parameter 175) can be used as an alert for an impending overload trip and is adjustable from 0…100% TCU.
Table 233 - Overload Warning Level (Parameter 175)
Overload Warning Level (Parameter 175)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
85
0
100
1
USINT
1
%TCU
Time to Trip
When the measured motor current exceeds the trip rating of the E300 relay,
Overload Time to Trip (Parameter 2) indicates the estimated time remaining before an overload trip occurs. When the measured current is below the trip rating, the Overload Time to Trip value is reported as 9,999 seconds.
Table 234 - Overload Time to Trip (Parameter 2)
Overload Time to Trip (Parameter 2)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
9999
0
9999
UINT
2
1
Seconds
Time To Reset
After an overload trip, the E300 relay reports the time remaining until the device can be reset through Overload Time to Reset (Parameter 3). When the %
Thermal Capacity Utilized value falls to or below the Overload Reset Level
(Parameter 174), the Overload Time to Reset value indicates zero until the overload trip is reset. After an overload trip is reset, the Overload Time to Reset value is reported as 0 seconds.
318
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 235 - Overload Time to Reset (Parameter 3)
Overload Time to Reset (Parameter 3)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
9999
UINT
2
1
Seconds
Nonvolatile Thermal Memory
The E300 relay includes a nonvolatile circuit to provide thermal memory. The time constant of the circuit corresponds to a Trip Class 20 setting. During normal operation, the thermal memory circuit is continuously monitored and updated to accurately reflect the thermal capacity utilization of the connected motor. If power is removed, the thermal memory of the circuit decays at a rate equivalent to the cooling of a Trip Class 20 application. When the power is re-applied, the
E300 relay checks the thermal memory circuit voltage to determine the initial value of % Thermal Capacity Utilized (Parameter 1).
Phase Loss Protection
A high current imbalance, or phase failure, can be caused by defective contacts in a contactor or circuit breaker, loose terminals, blown fuses, sliced wires, or faults in the motor. When a phase failure exists, the motor can experience an additional temperature rise or excessive mechanical vibration. This may result in a degradation of the motor insulation or increased stress on the motor bearings.
Rapid phase loss detection helps to minimize the potential damage and loss of production.
Phase Loss Inhibit Time
Phase Loss Inhibit Time (Parameter 239) allows you to inhibit a phase loss trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 236 - Phase Loss Inhibit Time (Parameter 239)
Phase Loss Inhibit Time (Parameter 239)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
319
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
320
IMPORTANT
The phase loss inhibit timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The
E300 relay does not begin monitoring for a phase loss condition until the Phase
Loss Inhibit Time expires.
Phase Loss Trip
The E300 relay trips with a phase loss indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Phase Loss Protection is enabled
•
Current is Present
•
Phase Loss Inhibit Time has expired
•
Current Imbalance is equal to or greater than 100% for a time period greater than the programmed Phase Loss Trip Delay
If the E300 relay trips on a phase loss, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashed a red short-2 blink pattern
•
Bit 1 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 of Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Phase Loss Trip Delay
Phase Loss Trip Delay (Parameter 240) allows you to define the time period for which a phase loss condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 237 - Phase Loss Trip Delay (Parameter 240)
Phase Loss Trip Delay (Parameter 240)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Ground Fault Current Protection
In isolated or high impedance-grounded systems, core-balanced current sensors are typically used to detect low-level ground faults caused by insulation breakdowns or entry of foreign objects. Detection of such ground faults can be used to interrupt the system to prevent further damage or to alert the appropriate personnel to perform timely maintenance.
The E300 relay provides core-balanced ground fault current detection capability, with the option of enabling Ground Fault Trip, Ground Fault Warning, or both.
The ground fault detection method and range depends upon the catalog number of the E300 Sensing Module and Control Module ordered.
Table 238 - Ground Fault Capabilities
Ground Fault Method
Ground Fault Trip/Warning
Range
Catalog Number
193-ESM-IG-__-__
592-ESM-IG-__-__
193-ESM-VIG-__-__
592-ESM-VIG-__-__
193-EIOGP-22-___
193-EIOGP-42-___
Internal
External
➊
0.5…5.0 A
0.02…5.0 A
➊
One of the following Catalog Number 193-CBCT_ Core Balance Ground Fault Sensors must be used:
1 — Ø 20 mm window
2 — Ø 40 mm window
3 — Ø 65 mm window
4 — Ø 85 mm window
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
321
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
ATTENTION:
The E300 relay is not a ground fault circuit interrupt or for personal protection as defined in Article 100 of the NEC.
ATTENTION:
The E300 relay is not intended to signal a disconnecting means to open the faulted current. A disconnecting device must be capable of interrupting the maximum available fault current of the system on which it is used.
Ground Fault Type
The E300 relay has two options available to measure ground fault current.
Ground Fault Type (Parameter 241) allows you to select the internal option or the external option with the appropriate measurement range.
Table 239 - Ground Fault Type (Parameter 241)
Ground Fault Type (Parameter 241)
Default Value
Range
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
1 = Internal 0.500…5.000 A
1 = Internal 0.500…5.000 A
2 = External 0.020…0.100 A
3 = External 0.100…0.500 A
4 = External 0.200…1.000 A
5 = External 1.000…5.000 A
USINT
Ground Fault Maximum Inhibit
Ground faults can quickly rise from low-level arcing levels to short circuit magnitudes. A motor starting contactor may not have the necessary rating to interrupt a high magnitude ground fault. In these circumstances it is desirable for an upstream circuit breaker with the proper rating to interrupt the ground fault.
When enabled, Ground Fault Maximum Inhibit (Parameter 248), inhibits a ground fault trip from occurring when the ground fault current exceeds the maximum range of the core-balance sensor (approximately 6.5 A).
322
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 240 - Overload Reset Level (Parameter 248)
Overload Reset Level (Parameter 248)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0 = Disable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
BOOL
1
1
Ground Fault Filter
An E300 relay can filter ground fault currents for High Resistance Grounded
(HRG) systems from its current-based protection trip and warning functions, which include:
•
Thermal overload
•
Current imbalance
•
Jam
•
Stall
The Ground Fault Filter is useful for smaller-sized motors that trip unexpectedly due to a controlled ground fault current that is significant relative to the current draw of the electric motor. Ground Fault Filter (Parameter 131) allows you to enable this filter.
Table 241 - Ground Fault Filter (Parameter 247
Ground Fault Filter (Parameter 247)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0 = Disable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
BOOL
1
1
This filter only disables the effects of the ground fault current from the currentbased motor protection trip and warning functions. Current-based diagnostic data is reported unfiltered when this feature is enabled.
Ground Fault Inhibit Time
Ground Fault Inhibit Time (Parameter 242) allows you to inhibit a ground fault trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 seconds. The ground fault inhibit time begins when the
Current Present (bit 3) or Ground Fault Current Present (bit 4) is set in Device
Status 0 (Parameter 20).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
323
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
324
Table 242 - Ground Fault Inhibit Time (Parameter 242
Ground Fault Inhibit Time (Parameter 242)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Table 243 - Device Status 0 (Parameter 20)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Trip Present
X
Warning Present
X
Invalid Configuration
X
Current Present
X
Ground Fault Current Present
X
Voltage Present
X
Emergency Start Enabled
X
DeviceLogix Enabled
X
Feedback Timeout Enabled
X
Operator Station Present
X
Voltage Sensing Present
X
Internal Ground Fault Sensing
Present
X
External Ground Fault Sensing
Present
X
PTC Sensing
X
Ready
Reserved
Ground Fault Trip
The E300 relay trips with a ground fault indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Ground fault protection is enabled
•
Ground fault current is present
•
Ground Fault Inhibit Time has expired
•
Ground Fault Current is equal to or greater than the Ground Fault Trip
Level for a time period greater than the Ground Fault Trip Delay
If the E300 relay trips on a ground fault, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red 3-short blink pattern
•
Bit 2 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
•
Bit 0 of Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Ground Fault Trip Delay
Ground Fault Trip Delay (Parameter 243) allows you to define the time period a ground fault condition must be present before a trip occurs and is adjustable from
0.0…25.0 s.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
325
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
326
Table 244 - Ground Fault Trip Delay (Parameter 243)
Ground Fault Trip Delay (Parameter 243)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.5
0.0
25.0
1
USINT
10
Seconds
Ground Fault Trip Level
Ground Fault Trip Level (Parameter 244) allows you to define the ground fault current in which the E300 relay trips and is adjustable from:
•
0.500…5.00 A (Internal)
•
0.020…5.00 A (External)
Table 245 - Ground Fault Trip Level (Parameter 244)
Ground Fault Trip Level (Parameter 244)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2.5
0.5 (internal); 0.02 (external)
5.00
2
UINT
100
Amps
IMPORTANT
The ground fault inhibit timer starts after the maximum phase load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA rating of the device or the ground fault current is greater than or equal to 50% of the minimum ground fault current rating of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for a ground fault condition until the Ground Fault Current Inhibit Time expires.
Ground Fault Warning
The E300 relay indicates a ground fault warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Ground Fault Warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Ground Fault Inhibit Time has expired
•
Ground Fault Current is equal to or greater than the Ground Fault
Warning Level for a time period greater than the Ground Fault Warning
Delay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
When the ground fault warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a yellow 3-short blink pattern
•
Bit 2 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 of Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Ground Fault Warning Level
Ground Fault Warning Level (Parameter 246) allows you to define the ground fault current at which the E300 relay indicates a warning and is adjustable from
0.20…5.00 A.
Table 246 - Ground Fault Warning Level (Parameter 246)
Ground Fault Warning Level (Parameter 246)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2.00
0.20
5.00
UINT
2
100
Amps
Ground Fault Warning Delay
Ground Fault Warning Delay (Parameter 245) allows you to define the time period (adjustable from 0.0…25.0 s) for which a ground fault condition must be present before a warning occurs.
Table 247 - Ground Fault Warning Delay (Parameter 245)
Ground Fault Warning Delay (Parameter 245)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
25.00
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Stall Protection
A motor stalls when its inrush current lasts for a longer than normal period of time during its starting sequence. As a result, the motor heats up rapidly and reaches the temperature limit of its insulation. Rapid stall detection during the starting sequence can extend the motor’s life, and minimize potential damage and loss of production. The E300 relay can monitor for this condition with its Stall
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
327
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Trip function and stop the motor before damage and loss of production can occur.
Stall Trip
The E300 relay trips with a Stall Trip indication when:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Stall protection is enabled
•
Current is present
•
The maximum phase current is greater than the Stall Trip Level for a time period greater than the Stall Enabled Time
If the E300 relay trips on a stall, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-short blink pattern
•
Bit 3 in Current Trip Status Parameter 4) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
328
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Stall Enabled Time
Stall Enabled Time (Parameter 249) allows you to adjust the time the E300 relay monitors for a stall condition during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 s.
Table 248 - Stall Enabled Time (Parameter 249)
Stall Enabled Time (Parameter 249)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Stall Trip Level
Stall Trip Level (Parameter 250) allows you to define the locked rotor current and is adjustable from 100…600% of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
329
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 249 - Stall Trip Level (Parameter 250)
Stall Trip Level (Parameter 250)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
600
100
600
2
UINT
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT
Stall Protection is only enabled during the motor starting sequence. If the maximum phase of load current falls below the programmed Stall Trip Level before the Stall Enabled Time elapses, the E300 relay disables Stall Protection until the next motor starting sequence.
IMPORTANT
The E300 relay considers a motor to have begun its starting sequence if the maximum phase of motor current transitions from 0A to approximately 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device.
Jam Protection
A motor goes into a jam condition when a running motor begins to consume current greater than50% of the motor’s nameplate rating. An example of this condition could be an overloaded conveyor or jammed gear. These conditions can result in the overheating of the motor and equipment damage. The E300 relay can monitor for this condition with its Jam Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid jam fault to minimize damage and loss of production.
Jam Inhibit Time
Jam Inhibit Time (Parameter 251) allows you to inhibit a jam trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 s.
Table 250 - Jam Trip Inhibit Time (Parameter 251)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
330
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Jam Trip
The E300 relay trips with a jam indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Jam Trip is enabled
•
Jam Inhibit Time has expired
•
The maximum phase current is greater than the Jam Trip Level for a time period greater than the Jam Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on a jam, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 5-short blink pattern
•
Bit 4 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Jam Trip Delay
Jam Trip Delay (Parameter 252) allows you to define the time period a jam condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 s.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
331
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
332
Table 251 - Jam Trip Delay (Parameter 252)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
5.0
0.1
25.0
1
USINT
10
Seconds
Jam Trip Level
Jam Trip Level (Parameter 253) allows you to define the current at which the
E300 relay trips on a jam. It is user-adjustable from 50…600% of the FLA Setting
(Parameter 171).
Table 252 - Jam Trip Level (Parameter 253)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
250
50
600
2
UINT
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT
The Jam Inhibitor timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum fla SETTING of the device. The
E300 relay does not begin monitoring for a jam condition until the Jam Inhibit
Time expires.
Jam Warning
The E300 relay indicates a Jam warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Jam Warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Jam Inhibit Time has expired
•
The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Jam Warning
Level
When the Jam Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 5-short blink pattern
•
Bit 4 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Jam Warn Level
Jam Warn Level (Parameter 254) allows you to define the current at which the
E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 50…600% for the FLA
Setting (Parameter 171).
Table 253 - Jam Warning Level (Parameter 254)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
150
50
600
UINT
2
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT
The Jam Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Jam
Inhibit Time has expired, the Jam Warning indication is instantaneous.
Underload Protection
Motor current less than a specific level may indicate a mechanical malfunction in the installation, such as a torn conveyor belt, damaged fan blade, broken shaft, or worn tool. Such conditions may not harm the motor, but they can lead to loss of production. Rapid underload fault detection helps to minimize damage and loss of production.
The E300 relay can monitor for this condition with its Underload Trip and
Warning function to detect for a rapid underload fault to minimize damage and loss of production.
Underload Inhibit Time
Underload Inhibit Time (Parameter 255) allows you to inhibit an underload trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 s.
Table 254 - Underload Inhibit Time (Parameter 255)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
333
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
334
Underload Trip
The E300 relay trips with an underload indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Underload Trip is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Underload Inhibit Time has expired
•
Minimum phase current is less than the Underload Trip Level for a time period greater than the Underload Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an underload, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 6-short blink pattern
•
Bit 5 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Underload Trip Delay
Underload Trip Delay (Parameter 256) allows you to define the time period an underload condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 s.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 255 - Underload Trip Delay (Parameter 256)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
5.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Underload Trip Level
Underload Trip Level (Parameter 257) allows you to define the current at which the E300 relay trips on an underload. It is user-adjustable from 10…100% of the
FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
Table 256 - Underload Trip Level (Parameter 257)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
50
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT
The Underload Inhibit Timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum fla SETTING of the device. The
E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an underload condition until the
Underload Inhibit Time expires.
IMPORTANT
For any given application, the practical limit of the Underload Trip Level
(Parameter 246) is dependent on the FLA Setting and the lower limit of the
E300 relay’s current measurement capability.
Underload Warning
The E300 relay indicates an underload warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Underload Warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Underload Inhibit Time has expired
•
The minimum phase current is less than the Underload Warning Level
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
335
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
When the Underload Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 6-short blink pattern
•
Bit 5 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Underload Warning Level
Underload Warning Level (Parameter 258) allows you to define the current at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 10…100% for the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
Table 257 - Underload Warning Level (Parameter 258)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
70
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT
The Underload Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Underload Inhibit Time has expired, the Underload Warning indication is instantaneous.
Current Imbalance Protection
A current imbalance can be caused by an imbalance in the voltage supply, unequal motor winding impedance, or long and varying wire lengths. When a current imbalance exists, the motor can experience an additional temperature rise, resulting in degradation of the motor insulation and reduction of life expectancy.
The E300 relay can monitor for this condition with its Current Imbalance Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid current imbalance fault to minimize damage and loss of production.
Current Imbalance can be defined by the following equation:
%CI = 100% * (I d where
/I a
)
I
I
%CI = Percent Current Imbalance
a d
= Maximum Deviation from the Average Current
= Average Current
336
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Current Imbalance Inhibit Time
Current Imbalance Inhibit Time (Parameter 259) allows you to inhibit a current imbalance trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 s.
Table 258 - Current Imbalance Inhibit Time (Parameter 259)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Current Imbalance Trip
The E300 relay trips with a current imbalance indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Current Imbalance Trip is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Current Imbalance Inhibit Time has expired
•
The Current Imbalance (parameter 52) is greater than the Current
Imbalance Trip Level for a time period greater than the Current Imbalance
Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on a current imbalance, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 7-short blink pattern
•
Bit 6 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
337
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Current Imbalance Trip Delay
Current Imbalance Trip Delay (Parameter 260) allows you to define the time period a current imbalance condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 s.
Table 259 - Current Imbalance Trip Delay (Parameter 260)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
5.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Current Imbalance Trip Level
Current Imbalance Trip Level (Parameter 261) allows you to define the percentage at which the E300 relay trips on a current imbalance. It is useradjustable from 10…100%.
338
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 260 - Current Imbalance Trip Level (Parameter 261)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
35
10
100
1
%
USINT
1
IMPORTANT
The Current Imbalance Inhibit Timer starts after a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The
E300 relay does not begin monitoring for a current imbalance condition until the Current Imbalance Inhibit Time expires.
Current Imbalance Warning
The E300 relay indicates a current imbalance warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Current Imbalance Warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Current Imbalance Inhibit Time has expired
•
The current imbalance (parameter 52) is greater than the Current
Imbalance Warning Level
When the Current Imbalance Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 7-short blink pattern
•
Bit 6 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Current Imbalance Warning Level
Current Imbalance Warning Level (Parameter 262) allows you to define the percentage at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
10…100%.
Table 261 - Current Imbalance Warning Level (Parameter 262)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
%
20
10
100
USINT
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
339
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
340
IMPORTANT
The Current Imbalance Warning function does not include a time delay feature.
Once the Current Imbalance Inhibit Time has expired, the Current Imbalance
Warning indication is instantaneous.
Line Undercurrent Protection
For non-motor applications, if the measured current is less than a specific level for a specific phase, it may indicate an electrical malfunction, such as bad resistive heater element or non-operating incandescent light bulb. Such conditions may not harm the power system, but it can lead to loss of production or certification noncompliance.
The E300 relay can monitor for an undercurrent condition per phase with its
Line Under Current Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid under current in a specific phase to minimize damage and loss of production.
Under Current Inhibit Time
Under Current Inhibit Time (Parameter 265) allows you to inhibit an L1, L2, and L3 Under Current trip and warning from occurring during a load starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 262 - Under Current Inhibit Time (Parameter 265)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
L1 Under Current Trip
The E300 relay trips with a L1 Under Current indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
L1 Under Current Trip is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Under Current Inhibit Timer has expired
•
L1 Percent FLA (Parameter 47) is less than the L1 Under Current Trip
Level for a time period greater than the L1 Under Current Trip Delay.
•
If the E300 relay trips on a L1 Under Current, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 8-short blink pattern
•
Bit 7 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
L1 Under Current Trip Delay
L1 Under Current Trip Delay (Parameter 266) allows you to define the time period an L1 Under Current condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 263 - L1 Under Current Trip Delay (Parameter 266)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
L1 Under Current Trip Level
L1 Under Current Trip Level (Parameter 267) allows you to define the current at which the E300 relay trips on a L1 Under Current. It is user-adjustable from
10…100% of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
341
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
342
Table 264 - L1 Under Current Trip Level (Parameter 267)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
35
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT
The Under Current Inhibit Timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device.
The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an undercurrent condition until the Under Current Inhibit Time expires.
IMPORTANT
For any given application, the practical limit of the L1 Under Current Trip Level
(Parameter 267) is dependent on the FLA Setting and the lower limit of the
E300 relay’s current measurement capability
L1 Under Current Warning
The E300 relay indicates an L1 Under Current warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
L1 Under Current Warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
The Under Current Inhibit Timer has expired
•
L1 Percent FLA (Parameter 47) is less than the L1 Under Current
Warning Level
When the L1 Under Current Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 8-short blink pattern
•
Bit 7 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
L1 Under Current Warning Level
L1 Under Current Warning Level (Parameter 268) allows you to define the current at which the E300 relay indicates a L1 Under Current warning. It is useradjustable from 10…100% for the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
Table 265 - L1 Under Current Warning Level (Parameter 268)
Default Value
Minimum Value
40
10
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT
The L1 Under Current Warning function does not include a time delay feature.
Once the Under Current Inhibit Timer has expired, the L1 Under Current
Warning indication is instantaneous.
L2 Under Current Trip
The E300 relay trips with a L2 Under Current indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
L2 Under Current Trip is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Under Current Inhibit Timer has expired
•
L2 Percent FLA (Parameter 48) is less than the L2 Under Current Trip
Level for a time period greater than the L2 Under Current Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on a L2 Under Current, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 9-short blink pattern
•
Bit 8 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
343
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
L2 Under Current Trip Delay
L2 Under Current Trip Delay (Parameter 269) allows you to define the time period an L2 Under Current condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 266 - L2 Under Current Trip Delay (Parameter 269)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
L2 Under Current Trip Level
L2 Under Current Trip Level (Parameter 270) allows you to define the current at which the E300 relay trips on a L2 Under Current. It is user-adjustable from
10…100% of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
344
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 267 - L2 Under Current Trip Level Parameter 270)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
35
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT
The Under Current Inhibit Timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device.
The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an undercurrent condition until the Under Current Inhibit Time expires.
IMPORTANT
For any given application, the practical limit of the L2 Under Current Trip Level
(Parameter 270) is dependent on the FLA Setting and the lower limit of the
E300 relay’s current measurement capability
L2 Under Current Warning
The E300 relay indicates an L2 Under Current warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
2 Under Current Warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
The Under Current Inhibit Timer has expired
•
2 Percent FLA (Parameter 48) is less than the L2 Under Current Warning
Level
When the L2 Under Current Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 9-short blink pattern
•
Bit 8 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
L2 Under Current Warning Level
L2 Under Current Warning Level (Parameter 271) allows you to define the current at which the E300 relay indicates a L2 Under Current warning. It is useradjustable from 10…100% for the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
345
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 268 - L2 Under Current Warning Level (Parameter 271)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
40
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT
The L2 Under Current Warning function does not include a time delay feature.
Once the Under Current Inhibit Timer has expired, the L2 Under Current
Warning indication is instantaneous.
L3 Under Current Trip
The E300 relay trips with a L3 Under Current indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
L3 Under Current Trip is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Under Current Inhibit Timer has expired
•
Percent FLA (Parameter 49) is less than the L3 Under Current Trip Level for a time period greater than the L3 Under Current Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on a L3 Under Current, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 10-short blink pattern
•
Bit 9 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
346
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
IMPORTANT
L3 Under Current Trip Delay (Parameter 272) allows you to define the time period that an L3 Under Current condition must be present before a trip occurs.
It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds
Table 269 - L3 Under Current Trip Delay (Parameter 272)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
L3 Under Current Trip Level
L3 Under Current Trip Level (Parameter 273) allows you to define the current at which the E300 relay trips on a L3 Under Current. It is user-adjustable from
10…100% of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
347
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 270 - L3 Under Current Trip Level (Parameter 273)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
35
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT
The Under Current Inhibit Timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device.
The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an undercurrent condition until the Under Current Inhibit Time expires.
IMPORTANT
For any given application, the practical limit of the L3 Under Current Trip Level
(Parameter 273) is dependent on the FLA Setting and the lower limit of the
E300 relay’s current measurement capability
L3 Under Current Warning
The E300 relay indicates an L3 Under Current warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
L3 Under Current Warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
The Under Current Inhibit Timer has expired
•
L3 Percent FLA (Parameter 49) is less than the L3 Under Current
Warning Level
When the L3 Under Current Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 10-short blink pattern
•
Bit 9 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
L3 Under Current Warning Level
L3 Under Current Warning Level (Parameter 274) allows you to define the current at which the E300 relay indicates a L3 Under Current warning. It is useradjustable from 10…100% for the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
348
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 271 - L3 Under Current Warning Level (Parameter 274)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
40
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT
The L3 Under Current Warning function does not include a time delay feature.
Once the Under Current Inhibit Timer has expired, the L3 Under Current
Warning indication is instantaneous.
Line Overcurrent Protection
For non-motor applications when the measured current is greater than a specific level for a specific phase may indicate an electrical malfunction, such as bad resistive heater element. Such conditions could harm the power system over time, which could lead to loss of production.
The E300 relay can monitor for an overcurrent condition per phase with its Line
Over Current Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid over current in a specific phase to minimize damage and loss of production.
Over Current Inhibit Time
Over Current Inhibit Time (Parameter 275) allows you to inhibit an L1, L2, and
L3 Over Current trip and warning from occurring during a load starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 272 - Over Current Inhibit Time (Parameter 275)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
L1 Over Current Trip
The E300 relay trips with a L1 Over Current indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
L1 Over Current Trip is enabled
•
Current is present
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
349
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
•
Over Current Inhibit Timer has expired
•
L1 Percent FLA (Parameter 47) is greater than the L1 Over Current Trip
Level for a time period greater than the L1 Over Current Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on a L1 Over Current, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 11-short blink pattern
•
Bit 10 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
L1 Over Current Trip Delay
L1 Over Current Trip Delay (Parameter 276) allows you to define the time period an L1 Over Current condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
350
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 273 - L1 Over Current Trip Delay (Parameter 276)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
L1 Over Current Trip Level
L1 Over Current Trip Level (Parameter 277) allows you to define the current at which the E300 relay trips on a L1 Over Current. It is user-adjustable from
10…100% of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
Table 274 - L1 Over Current Trip Level (Parameter 277)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
100
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT
The Over Current Inhibit Timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The
E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an overcurrent condition until the
Over Current Inhibit Time expires.
L1 Over Current Warning
The E300 relay indicates an L1 Over Current warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
1 Over Current Warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
The Over Current Inhibit Timer has expired
•
1 Percent FLA (Parameter 47) is greater than the L1 Over Current
Warning Level
When the L1 Over Current Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 11-short blink pattern
•
Bit 10 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
351
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
L1 Over Current Warning Level
L1 Over Current Warning Level (Parameter 278) allows you to define the current at which the E300 relay indicates a L1 Over Current warning. It is user-adjustable from 10…100% for the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
Table 275 - L1 Over Current Warning Level (Parameter 278)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
90
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT
The L1 Over Current Warning function does not include a time delay feature.
Once the Over Current Inhibit Timer has expired, the L1 Over Current Warning indication is instantaneous.
L2 Over Current Trip
The E300 relay trips with a L2 Over Current indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
2 Over Current Trip is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Over Current Inhibit Timer has expired
•
2 Percent FLA (Parameter 48) is greater than the L2 Over Current Trip
Level for a time period greater than the L2 Over Current Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on a L2 Over Current, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 12-short blink pattern
•
Bit 11 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
352
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
L2 Over Current Trip Delay
L2 Over Current Trip Delay (Parameter 279) allows you to define the time period an L2 Over Current condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 276 - L2 Over Current Trip Delay (Parameter 279)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
L2 Over Current Trip Level
L2 Over Current Trip Level (Parameter 280) allows you to define the current at which the E300 relay trips on a L2 Over Current. It is user-adjustable from
10…100% of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
353
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 277 - L2 Over Current Trip Level (Parameter 280).
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
100
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT
The Over Current Inhibit Timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The
E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an overcurrent condition until the
Over Current Inhibit Time expires.
L2 Over Current Warning
The E300 relay indicates an L2 Over Current warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
2 Over Current Warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
The Over Current Inhibit Timer has expired
•
2 Percent FLA (Parameter 48) is greater than the L2 Over Current
Warning Level
When the L2 Over Current Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 12-short blink pattern
•
Bit 11 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
L2 Over Current Warning Level
L2 Over Current Warning Level (Parameter 281) allows you to define the current at which the E300 relay indicates a L2 Over Current warning. It is user-adjustable from 10…100% for the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
Table 278 - L2 Over Current Warning Level (Parameter 281)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
90
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
354
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
.
IMPORTANT
The L2 Over Current Warning function does not include a time delay feature.
Once the Over Current Inhibit Timer has expired, the L2 Over Current Warning indication is instantaneous.
L3 Over Current Trip
The E300 relay trips with a L3 Over Current indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
L3 Over Current Trip is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Over Current Inhibit Timer has expired
•
L3 Percent FLA (Parameter 49) is greater than the L3 Over Current Trip
Level for a time period greater than the L3 Over Current Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on a L3 Over Current, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 13-short blink pattern
•
Bit 12 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
355
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
356
L3 Over Current Trip Delay
L3 Over Current Trip Delay (Parameter 282) allows you to define the time period an L3 Over Current condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 279 - L3 Over Current Trip Delay (Parameter 282)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
L3 Over Current Trip Level
L3 Over Current Trip Level (Parameter 283) allows you to define the current at which the E300 relay trips on a L3 Over Current. It is user-adjustable from
10…100% of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
Table 280 - L3 Over Current Trip Level (Parameter 283)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
100
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT
The Over Current Inhibit Timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The
E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an overcurrent condition until the
Over Current Inhibit Time expires.
L3 Over Current Warning
The E300 relay indicates an L3 Over Current warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
L3 Over Current Warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
The Over Current Inhibit Timer has expired
•
L3 Percent FLA (Parameter 49) is greater than the L3 Over Current
Warning Level
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
When the L2 Over Current Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 13-short blink pattern
•
Bit 12 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
L3 Over Current Warning Level
L3 Over Current Warning Level (Parameter 284) allows you to define the current at which the E300 relay indicates a L3 Over Current warning. It is user-adjustable from 10…100% for the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
Table 281 - L3 Over Current Warning Level (Parameter 284)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
90
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT
The L3 Over Current Warning function does not include a time delay feature.
Once the Over Current Inhibit Timer has expired, the L3 Over Current Warning indication is instantaneous.
Line Loss Protection
For non-motor applications when the measured current is 0 amps a specific phase, this may indicate an electrical malfunction such as bad resistive heater element or non-operating incandescent light bulb. Such conditions may not harm the power system, but it can lead to loss of production or certification noncompliance.
The E300 relay can monitor for a current-based line loss per phase with its Line
Loss Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid line loss in a specific phase to minimize damage and loss of production.
Line Loss Inhibit Time
Line Loss Inhibit Time (Parameter 285) allows you to inhibit an L1, L2, and L3
Line Loss trip and warning from occurring during a load starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 282 - Line Loss Inhibit Time (Parameter 285)
Default Value 10
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
357
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
L1 Line Loss Trip
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
The E300 relay trips with a L1 Line Loss indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
L1 Over Current Trip is enabled
•
L1 Line Loss is activated via the appropriately programmed digital input
(see Input Assignments, Parameters 196…201, in
•
Line Loss Inhibit Timer has expired
•
L1 Percent FLA (Parameter 47) is
•
equal to 0% for a time period greater than the L1 Line Loss Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on a L1 Line Loss, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 14-short blink pattern
•
Bit 13 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
358
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
L1 Line Loss Trip Delay
L1 Line Loss Trip Delay (Parameter 276) allows you to define the time period an
L1 Line Loss condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 283 - L1 Line Loss Trip Delay (Parameter 286)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
IMPORTANT
The Line Loss Inhibit Timer starts when L1, L2, or L3 Line Loss protection is activated by a programmed digital input (see Input Assignment Parameters
196-201). The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for Line Loss condition until the Line Loss Inhibit Timer expires.
L1 Line Loss Warning
The E300 relay indicates an L1 Line Loss warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
359
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
•
L1 Line Loss Warning is enabled
•
L1 Line Loss is activated via the appropriately programmed digital input
(see Input Assignments, Parameters 196…201, in
•
Line Loss Inhibit Timer has expired
•
L1 Percent FLA (Parameter 47) is equal to 0%
When the L1 Line Loss Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 14-short blink pattern
•
Bit 13 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
IMPORTANT
The L1 Line Loss Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Line Loss Inhibit Timer has expired, the L1 Line Loss Warning indication is instantaneous.
L2 Line Loss Trip
The E300 relay trips with a L2 Line Loss indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
L2 Over Current Trip is enabled
•
L2 Line Loss is activated via the appropriately programmed digital input
(see Input Assignments, Parameters 196…201, in
•
Line Loss Inhibit Timer has expired
•
L2 Percent FLA (Parameter 48) is equal to 0% for a time period greater than the L2 Line Loss Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on a L2 Line Loss, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 15-short blink pattern
•
Bit 14 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
360
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
L2 Line Loss Trip Delay
L2 Line Loss Trip Delay (Parameter 287) allows you to define the time period an
L2 Line Loss condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 284 - L2 Line Loss Trip Delay (Parameter 287)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
IMPORTANT
The Line Loss Inhibit Timer starts when L1, L2, or L3 Line Loss protection is activated by a programmed digital input (see Input Assignment Parameters
196-201). The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for Line Loss condition until the Line Loss Inhibit Timer expires.
L2 Line Loss Warning
The E300 relay indicates an L2 Line Loss warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
361
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
•
L2 Line Loss Warning is enabled
•
L2 Line Loss is activated via the appropriately programmed digital input
(see Input Assignments, Parameters 196…201, in
•
Line Loss Inhibit Timer has expired
•
L2 Percent FLA (Parameter 48) is equal to 0%
When the L2 Line Loss Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 15-short blink pattern
•
Bit 14 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
IMPORTANT
The L2 Line Loss Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Line Loss Inhibit Timer has expired, the L2 Line Loss Warning indication is instantaneous.
L3 Line Loss Trip
The E300 relay trips with a L3 Line Loss indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
L3 Over Current Trip is enabled
•
L3 Line Loss is activated via the appropriately programmed digital input
(see Input Assignments, Parameters 196…201, in
•
Line Loss Inhibit Timer has expired
•
L3 Percent FLA (Parameter 49) is equal to 0% for a time period greater than the L3 Line Loss Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on a L3 Line Loss, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 16-short blink pattern
•
Bit 15 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
362
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
L3 Line Loss Trip Delay
L3 Line Loss Trip Delay (Parameter 288) allows you to define the time period an
L3 Line Loss condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 285 - L3 Line Loss Trip Delay (Parameter 288)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
IMPORTANT
The Line Loss Inhibit Timer starts when L1, L2, or L3 Line Loss protection is activated by a programmed digital input (see Input Assignment Parameters
196-201). The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for Line Loss condition until the Line Loss Inhibit Timer expires.
L3 Line Loss Warning
The E300 relay indicates an L3 Line Loss warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
363
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
•
L3 Line Loss Warning is enabled
•
L3 Line Loss is activated via the appropriately programmed digital input
(see Input Assignments, Parameters 196…201, in
•
Line Loss Inhibit Timer has expired
•
L3 Percent FLA (Parameter 49) is equal to 0%
When the L3 Line Loss Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 16-short blink pattern
•
Bit 15 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
IMPORTANT
The L3 Line Loss Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Line Loss Inhibit Timer has expired, the L3 Line Loss Warning indication is instantaneous.
Voltage-based Protection
The E300 relay can digitally monitor the voltage supplied to an electric motor to help protect against poor voltage quality. You can prevent a contactor from energizing if the voltage is either too high, too low, or wrong rotation. The following E300 Sensing Modules provide voltage monitoring capabilities.
Table 286 - Voltage Capabilities
Catalog Number
193-ESM-VIG-__-__
592-ESM-VIG-__-__
193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT
Measurement Method
Internal
Internal
External
L-L Voltage Trip/Warning Range
20…800V
20…800V
20…6500V
This voltage information is used for the following protective trip and warning functions:
•
Undervoltage trip/warning
•
Overvoltage trip/warning
•
Voltage imbalance trip/warning
•
Phase rotation mismatch trip
•
Under frequency trip/warning
•
Over frequency trip/warning
Voltage Trip Enable (Parameter 184) and Voltage Warning Enable (Parameter
190) are used to enable the respective voltage-based protective trip and warning functions.
364
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 287 - Voltage Trip Enabled (Parameter 184)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Under Voltage Trip
X Over Voltage Trip
X Voltage Imbalance Trip
X Phase Rotation Mismatch Trip
X Under Frequency Trip
X Over Frequency Trip
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Table 288 - Voltage Warning Enable (Parameter 190)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Under Voltage Warning
X Over Voltage Warning
X Voltage Imbalance Warning
X Phase Rotation Mismatch Warning
X Under Frequency Warning
X Over Frequency Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5) and Voltage Warning Status (Parameter 11) are used to view the status of the respective voltage-based protective trip and warning functions.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
365
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 289 - Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Under Voltage Trip
X Over Voltage Trip
X Voltage Imbalance Trip
X Phase Rotation Mismatch Trip
X Under Frequency Trip
X Over Frequency Trip
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Table 290 - Voltage Warning Status (Parameter 11)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Under Voltage Warning
X Over Voltage Warning
X Voltage Imbalance Warning
X Phase Rotation Mismatch Warning
X Under Frequency Warning
X Over Frequency Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
366
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Undervoltage Protection
Electric motors consume more electric current when the voltage supplied to the motor is lower than the motor nameplate rating. This can damage to an electric motor over an extended period of time. The E300 relay can monitor for this condition with its Under Voltage Trip and Warning function to detect for low voltage levels to minimize motor damage and loss of production.
Under Voltage Inhibit Time
Under Voltage Inhibit Time (Parameter 355) allows you to inhibit an under voltage trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 291 - Under Voltage Inhibit Time (Parameter 355)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Under Voltage Trip
The E300 relay trips with an undervoltage indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Under Voltage Trip is enabled
•
Voltage is present
•
Under Voltage Inhibit Time has expired
•
The minimum phase voltage is less than the Under Voltage Trip Level for a time period greater than the Under Voltage Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an under voltage, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 1-long / 1-short blink pattern
•
Bit 0 in Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
367
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Under Voltage Trip Delay
Under Voltage Trip Delay (Parameter 356) allows you to define the time period an under voltage condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 292 - Under Voltage Trip Delay (Parameter 356)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Under Voltage Trip Level
Under Voltage Trip Level (Parameter 357) allows you to define the voltage at which the E300 relay trips on an under voltage. It is user-adjustable from
0…6553.5 volts.
368
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 293 - Under Voltage Trip Level (Parameter 357)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
100.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
IMPORTANT
The Under Voltage Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an under voltage condition until the Under Voltage Inhibit Time expires.
Under Voltage Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Under Voltage warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Under Voltage Warning is enabled
•
Voltage is present
•
Under Voltage
•
Inhibit Time has expired
•
The minimum phase voltage is equal to or less than the Under Voltage
Warning Level
When the Under Voltage Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 1-long / 1-short blink pattern
•
Bit 0 in Voltage Warning Status (Parameter 11) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Under Voltage Warn Level
Under Voltage Warn Level (Parameter 358) allows you to define the voltage at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…6553.5 volts.
Table 294 - Under Voltage Warn Level
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
400.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
369
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
370
IMPORTANT
The Under Voltage Warning function does not include a time delay feature.
Once the Under Voltage Inhibit Time has expired, the Under Voltage Warning indication is instantaneous.
Overvoltage Protection
The winding insulation for electric motors degrades faster when more voltage is supplied to the motor than the motor nameplate rating. This can damage to an electric motor over an extended period of time. The E300 relay can monitor for this condition with its Over Voltage Trip and Warning function to detect for high voltage levels to minimize motor damage and loss of production.
Over Voltage Inhibit Time
Over Voltage Inhibit Time (Parameter 359) allows you to inhibit an over voltage trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10.0
0.0
250.0
USINT
1
11
Seconds
Over Voltage Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Over Voltage indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Over Voltage Trip is enabled
•
Voltage is present
•
Over Voltage Inhibit Time has expired
•
The minimum phase voltage is greater than the Over Voltage Trip Level for a time period greater than the Over Voltage Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an over voltage, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 1-long / 2-short blink pattern
•
Bit 1 in Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Over Voltage Trip Delay
Over Voltage Trip Delay (Parameter 360) allows you to define the time period an over voltage condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 295 - Over Voltage Trip Delay (Parameter 360)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Over Voltage Trip Level
Over Voltage Trip Level (Parameter 357) allows you to define the voltage at which the E300 relay trips on an over voltage. It is user-adjustable from 0…6553.5 volts.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
371
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
372
Table 296 - Over Voltage Trip Level (Parameter 361)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
500.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
IMPORTANT
The Over Voltage Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an over voltage condition until the Over Voltage Inhibit Time expires.
Over Voltage Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Over Voltage warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Over Voltage Warning is enabled
•
Voltage is present
•
Over Voltage Inhibit Time has expired
•
The maximum phase voltage is equal to or greater than the Over Voltage
Warning Level
When the Over Voltage Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 1-long / 2-short blink pattern
•
Bit 1 in Voltage Warning Status (Parameter 11) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Over Voltage Warn Level
Over Voltage Warn Level (Parameter 362) allows you to define the voltage at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…6553.5 volts.
Table 297 - Over Voltage Warn Level (Parameter 362)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
490.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
IMPORTANT
The Over Voltage Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over Voltage Inhibit Time has expired, the Over Voltage Warning indication is instantaneous.
Voltage Imbalance Protection
A voltage imbalance can be caused by poor power quality and unequal distribution of power. When a voltage imbalance exists, the motor can experience an additional temperature rise, resulting in degradation of the motor insulation and reduction of life expectancy. The E300 relay can monitor for this condition with its Voltage Imbalance Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid voltage imbalance fault to minimize damage and loss of production.
Voltage Imbalance can be defined by the following equation:
%V
Imb
= 100% * (V d
/V a
) where
%V
Imb
= Percent Voltage Imbalance
V d
= Maximum Deviation from the Average Voltage
V a
= Average Voltage
Voltage Imbalance Inhibit Time
Voltage Imbalance Inhibit Time (Parameter 365) allows you to inhibit a voltage imbalance trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 298 - Voltage Imbalance Inhibit Time (Parameter 365)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Voltage Imbalance Trip
The E300 relay trips with a voltage imbalance indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Voltage Imbalance Trip is enabled
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
373
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
•
Voltage is present
•
Voltage Imbalance Inhibit Time has expired
•
The Voltage Imbalance (Parameter 61) is greater than the Voltage
Imbalance Trip Level for a time period greater than the Voltage Imbalance
Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on a voltage imbalance, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 1-long / 3-short blink pattern
•
Bit 2 in Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Voltage Imbalance Trip Delay
Voltage Imbalance Trip Delay (Parameter 366) allows you to define the time period a voltage imbalance condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
374
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 299 - Voltage Imbalance Trip Delay (Parameter 366)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Voltage Imbalance Trip Level
Voltage Imbalance Trip Level (Parameter 367) allows you to define the percentage at which the E300 relay trips on a voltage imbalance. It is useradjustable from 10…100%.
Table 300 - Voltage Imbalance Trip Level (Parameter 367)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
15
10
100
1
%
USINT
1
IMPORTANT
The Voltage Imbalance Inhibit Timer starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for a voltage imbalance condition until the Voltage Imbalance Inhibit Time expires.
Voltage Imbalance Warning
The E300 relay indicates a voltage imbalance warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Voltage Imbalance Warning is enabled
•
Voltage is present
•
Voltage Imbalance Inhibit Time has expired
•
The Voltage Imbalance (Parameter 61) is greater than the Voltage
Imbalance Warning Level
When the Voltage Imbalance Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow red 1-long / 3-short blink pattern
•
Bit 2 in Voltage Warning Status (Parameter 11) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
375
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
376
Voltage Imbalance Warning Level
Voltage Imbalance Warning Level (Parameter 368) allows you to define the percentage at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
10…100%.
Table 301 - Voltage Imbalance Warning Level (Parameter 368)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
10
100
1
%
USINT
1
IMPORTANT
The Voltage Imbalance Warning function does not include a time delay feature.
Once the Voltage Imbalance Inhibit Time has expired, the Voltage Imbalance
Warning indication is instantaneous.
Phase Rotation Protection
Wiring of a three-phase voltage system can affect the rotational direction of an electric motor. The E300 relay can help protect against the improper phase rotation so that an electric motor rotates in the proper direction, ABC or ACB, to prevent equipment from being damaged.
Phase Rotation Inhibit Time
Phase Rotation Inhibit Time (Parameter 359) allows you to inhibit a phase rotation mismatch trip and warning from occurring. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 302 - Phase Rotation Inhibit Time (Parameter 363)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Phase Rotation Trip
The E300 relay trips with a Phase Rotation indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
•
Phase Rotation Trip is enabled
•
Voltage is present
•
Phase Rotation Inhibit Time has expired
•
The measured Voltage Phase Rotation (Parameter 63) does not match the
•
required Phase Rotation Type (Parameter 364).
If the E300 relay trips on a phase rotation mismatch, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 1-long / 4-short blink pattern
•
Bit 3 in Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Phase Rotation Trip Type
Phase Rotation Trip Type (Parameter 364) allows you to define the required voltage phase rotation for the motor application. E300 relay trips on a phase rotation mismatch when this parameter does not match the measured voltage phase rotation. It is user-adjustable, ABC or ACB.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
377
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
378
Table 303 - Phase Rotation Trip Type (Parameter 364)
Default Value
Range
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
1 = ABC
1 = ABC
2 = ACB
USINT
IMPORTANT
The Phase Rotation Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from
0V to 20V L-L. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for a phase rotation mismatch condition until the Phase Rotation Inhibit Time expires.
Frequency Protection
The E300 relay has the capability to help protect against poor voltage quality by offering frequency-based protection. This protection is used when electric power is provided by stand-alone electric generators. You can prevent a contactor from energizing if the voltage frequency is either too high or too low. The E300 relay can monitor for this condition with its Over and Under Frequency Trip and
Warning function, and it can detect for an improper voltage frequency to minimize motor damage and loss of production.
Under Frequency Inhibit Time
Under Frequency Inhibit Time (Parameter 369) allows you to inhibit an under frequency trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 304 - Under Frequency Inhibit Time (Parameter 369)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Over Frequency Inhibit Time
Over Frequency Inhibit Time (Parameter 373) allows you to inhibit an over frequency trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 305 - Over Frequency Inhibit Time (Parameter 373)
Default Value 10
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
Under Frequency Trip
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
The E300 relay trips with an Under Frequency indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Under Frequency Trip is enabled
•
Voltage is present
•
Under Frequency Inhibit Time has expired
•
The voltage frequency is less than the Under Frequency Trip Level for a time period greater than the Under Frequency Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an under frequency, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 1-long / 5-short blink pattern
•
Bit 4 in Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
379
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Under Frequency Trip Delay
Under Frequency Trip Delay (Parameter 370) allows you to define the time period an under frequency condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 306 - Under Frequency Trip Delay (Parameter 370)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Under Frequency Trip Level
Under Voltage Trip Level (Parameter 371) allows you to define the frequency at which the E300 relay trips on an under frequency. It is user-adjustable from
46…65 Hz.
380
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 307 - Under Frequency Trip Level (Parameter 371)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
Hz
57
46
65
USINT
IMPORTANT
The Under Frequency Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from
0V to 20V L-L. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an under frequency condition until the Under Frequency Inhibit Time expires.
Under Frequency Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Under Frequency warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Under Frequency Warning is enabled
•
Voltage is present
•
Under Frequency Inhibit Time has expired
•
The voltage frequency is equal to or less than the Under Frequency
Warning Level
When the Under Frequency Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 1-long / 5-short blink pattern
•
Bit 4 in Voltage Warning Status (Parameter 11) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Under Frequency Warn Level
•
Under Frequency Warn Level (Parameter 372) allows you to define the frequency at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is useradjustable from 46…65 Hz.
Table 308 - Under Frequency Warn Level (Parameter 372)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
58
46
65
1
Hz
USINT
1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
381
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
382
Over Frequency Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Over Frequency indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Over Frequency Trip is enabled
•
Voltage is present
•
Over Frequency Inhibit Time has expired
•
The voltage frequency is greater than the Over Frequency Trip Level for a time period greater than the Over Frequency Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an over frequency, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 1-long / 6-short blink pattern
•
Bit 5 in Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Over Frequency Trip Delay
Over Frequency Trip Delay (Parameter 374) allows you to define the time period an over frequency condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 309 - Over Frequency Trip Delay (Parameter 374)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Over Frequency Trip Level
Over Voltage Trip Level (Parameter 375) allows you to define the frequency at which the E300 relay trips on an over frequency. It is user-adjustable from 46…65
Hz.
Table 310 - Over Frequency Trip Level (Parameter 375)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
63
46
65
1
Hz
USINT
1
IMPORTANT
The Over Frequency Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from
0V to 20V L-L. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an over frequency condition until the Over Frequency Inhibit Time expires.
Over Frequency Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Over Frequency warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Over Frequency Warning is enabled
•
Voltage is present
•
Over Frequency Inhibit Time has expired
•
The voltage frequency is equal to or greater than the Over Frequency
Warning Level
When the Over Frequency Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 1-long / 6-short blink pattern
•
Bit 5 in Voltage Warning Status (Parameter 11) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
383
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Power-based Protection
Over Frequency Warn Level
Over Frequency Warn Level (Parameter 376) allows you to define the frequency at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 46…65
Hz.
Table 311 - Over Frequency Warn Level (Parameter 376)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
62
46
65
1
Hz
USINT
1
IMPORTANT
The Over Frequency Warning function does not include a time delay feature.
Once the Over Frequency Inhibit Time has expired, the Over Frequency Warning indication is instantaneous.
The E300 relay can digitally monitor the power that is supplied to an electric motor to help protect against poor power quality or alert you when power consumed by the motor differs from what is expected. This protection is useful for pump cavitation and pump material change detection. The following E300
Sensing Modules provide power monitoring capabilities.
Table 312 - Power Capabilities
Catalog Number
193-ESM-VIG-__-__
592-ESM-VIG-__-__
193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT
Measurement Method L-L Voltage Trip/Warning Range
Internal
Internal
External
20…800V
20…800V
20…6500V
This power information is used for the following protective trip and warning functions:
•
Under Real Power (kW) Trip/Warning
•
Over Real Power (kW) Trip/Warning
•
Under Reactive Power (kVAR) Trip/Warning
•
Over Reactive Power (kVAR) Trip/Warning
•
Under Apparent Power (kVA) Trip/Warning
•
Over Apparent Power (kVA) Trip/Warning
•
Under Power Factor Trip/Warning
•
Over Power Factor Trip/Warning
384
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Power Trip Enable (Parameter 185) and Power Warning Enable (Parameter 191) are used to enable the respective power-based protective trip and warning functions.
Table 313 - Power Trip Enable (Parameter 185)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Under kW Trip
X Over kW Trip
X Under kVAR Consumed Trip
X Over kVAR Consumed Trip
X Under kVAR Generated Trip
X Over kVAR Generated Trip
X Under kVA Trip
X Over kVA Trip
X Under PF Lagging Trip
X Over PF Lagging Trip
X Under PF Leading Trip
X Over PF Leading Trip
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Table 314 - Power Warning Enable (Parameter 191)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Under kW Warning
X Over kW Warning
X Under kVAR Consumed Warning
X Over kVAR Consumed Warning
X Under kVAR Generated Warning
X Over kVAR Generated Warning
X Under kVA Warning
X Over kVA Warning
X Under PF Lagging Warning
X Over PF Lagging Warning
X Under PF Leading Warning
X Over PF Leading Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) and Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) are used to view the status of the respective power-based protective trip and warning functions.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
385
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 315 - Power Trip Status (Parameter 6)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Under kW Trip
X Over kW Trip
X Under kVAR Consumed Trip
X Over kVAR Consumed Trip
X Under kVAR Generated Trip
X Over kVAR Generated Trip
X Under kVA Trip
X Over kVA Trip
X Under PF Lagging Trip
X Over PF Lagging Trip
X Under PF Leading Trip
X Over PF Leading Trip
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Table 316 - Power Warning Status (Parameter 12)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Under kW Warning
X Over kW Warning
X Under kVAR Consumed Warning
X Over kVAR Consumed Warning
X Under kVAR Generated Warning
X Over kVAR Generated Warning
X Under kVA Warning
X Over kVA Warning
X Under PF Lagging Warning
X Over PF Lagging Warning
X Under PF Leading Warning
X Over PF Leading Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Real Power (kW) Protection
The E300 relay has the capability to help protect against real power (kW) for specific applications that require the monitoring of both voltage and current. You can help protect or issue a warning if the real power (kW) consumption of an electric motor is either too high or too low.
386
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Under kW Inhibit Time
Under kW Inhibit Time (Parameter 378) allows you to inhibit an under real power (kW) trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 317 - Under kW Inhibit Time (Parameter 378)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Over kW Inhibit Time
Over kW Inhibit Time (Parameter 382) allows you to inhibit an over real power
(kW) trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 318 - Over kW Inhibit Time (Parameter 382)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Under kW Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Under kW indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Under kW Trip is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Under kW Inhibit Time has expired
•
The total real power (kW) is less than the Under kW Trip Level for a time period greater than the Under kW Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an under real power (kW), the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 1-short blink pattern
•
Bit 0 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
387
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
388
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Under kW Trip Delay
Under kW Trip Delay (Parameter 379) allows you to define the time period an under real power (kW) condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 319 - Under kW Trip Delay (Parameter 379)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Under kW Trip Level
Under kW Trip Level (Parameter 380) allows you to define the real power (kW) at which the E300 relay trips on an under real power (kW). It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 320 - UnderkW Trip Level (Parameter 380)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2,000,000.000
DINT
4
1000 kW
IMPORTANT
The Under kW Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to
20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an under real power (kW) condition until the Under kW Inhibit Time expires.
Under kW Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Under kW warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Under kW Warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Under kW Inhibit Time has expired
•
The total real power (kW) is equal to or less than the Under kW Warning
Level
When the Under kW Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 1-short blink pattern
•
Bit 0 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Under kW Warn Level
Under kW Warn Level (Parameter 381) allows you to define the real power (kW) at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kW.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
389
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 321 - Under kW Warn Level (Parameter 381)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kW
IMPORTANT
The Under kW Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Under kW Inhibit Time has expired, the Under kW Warning indication is instantaneous.
Over kW Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Over kW indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Over kW Trip is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Over kW Inhibit Time has expired
•
The total real power (kW) is greater than the Over kW Trip Level for a time period greater than the Over kW Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an over real power (kW), the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 2-short blink pattern
•
Bit 1 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
390
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Over kW Trip Delay
Over kW Trip Delay (Parameter 383) allows you to define the time period an over real power (kW) condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 322 - Over kW Trip Delay
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Over kW Trip Level
Over kW Trip Level (Parameter 384) allows you to define the total real power
(kW) at which the E300 relay trips on over real power (kW). It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
391
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
392
Table 323 - Over kW Trip Level (Parameter 384)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kW
IMPORTANT
The Over kW Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to
20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an over real power (kW) condition until the Over kW Inhibit Time expires.
Over kW Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Over kW warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Over kW Warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Over kW Inhibit Time has expired
•
The total real power (kW) is equal to or greater than the Over kW
Warning Level
When the Over kW Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 2-short blink pattern
•
Bit 1 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Over kW Warn Level
Over kW Warn Level (Parameter 385) allows you to define the real power (kW) at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kW.
Table 324 - Over kW Warn Level
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kW
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
IMPORTANT
The Over kW Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the
Over kW Inhibit Time has expired, the Over kW Warning indication is instantaneous.
Reactive Power (kVAR) Protection
The E300 relay has the capability to help protect against reactive power (kVAR) for specific applications that require the monitoring of both voltage and current.
You can help protect or issue a warning if the reactive power (kVAR) of an electric motor is either too high or too low.
Under kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time
Under kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time (Parameter 386) allows you to inhibit an under reactive power (kVAR) consumed trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 325 - Under kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time (Parameter 386)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Over kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time
Over kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time (Parameter 390) allows you to inhibit an over reactive power (kVAR) consumed trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 326 - Over kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time (Parameter 390)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
393
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
394
Under kVAR Generated Inhibit Time
Under kVAR Generated Inhibit Time (Parameter 394) allows you to inhibit an under power factor leading trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 327 - Under kVAR Generated Inhibit Time (Parameter 394)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Over kVAR Generated Inhibit Time
Over kVAR Generated Inhibit Time (Parameter 398) allows you to inhibit an over reactive power (kVAR) generated trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 328 - Over kVAR Generated Inhibit Time (Parameter 398)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Under kVAR Consumed Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Under kVAR Consumed indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Under kVAR Consumed Trip is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Under kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time has expired
•
The total reactive power (kVAR) consumed is less than the Under kVAR
Consumed Trip Level for a time period greater than the Under kVAR
Consumed Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an under reactive power (kVAR) consumed, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 3-short blink pattern
•
Bit 2 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Under kVAR Consumed Trip Delay
Under kVAR Consumed Trip Delay (Parameter 387) allows you to define the time period an under reactive power (kVAR) consumed condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 329 - Under kVAR Consumed Trip Delay (Parameter 387)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
395
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Under kVAR Consumed Trip Level
Under kVAR Consumed Trip Level (Parameter 388) allows you to define the reactive power (kVAR) consumed at which the E300 relay trips on an under reactive power (kVAR) consumed. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Table 330 - Under kVAR Consumed Trip Level (Parameter 388)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVAR
IMPORTANT
The Under kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an under reactive power (kVAR) consumed condition until the
Under kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time expires.
Under kVAR Consumed Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Under kVAR Consumed warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Under kVAR Consumed Warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Under kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time has expired
•
The total reactive power (kVAR) consumed is equal to or less than the
Under kVAR Consumed Warning Level
When the Under kVAR Consumed Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 3-short blink pattern
•
Bit 2 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Under kVAR Consumed Warn Level
Under kVAR Consumed Warn Level (Parameter 389) allows you to define the reactive power (kVAR) consumed at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
396
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 331 - Under kVAR Consumed Warn Level (Parameter 389)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVAR
IMPORTANT
The Under kVAR Consumed Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Under kVAR consumed Inhibit Time has expired, the Under kVAR Consumed Warning indication is instantaneous.
Over kVAR ConsumedTrip
The E300 relay trips with an Over kVAR Consumed indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Over kVAR Consumed Trip is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Over kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time has expired
•
The total reactive power (kVAR) consumed is greater than the Over kVAR
Consumed Trip Level for a time period greater than the Over kVAR
Consumed Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an over reactive power (kVAR) consumed, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 4-short blink pattern
•
Bit 3 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
397
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Over kVAR Consumed Trip Delay
Over kVAR Consumed Trip Delay (Parameter 399) allows you to define the time period an over reactive power (kVAR) consumed condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 332 - Over kVAR Consumed Trip Delay (Parameter 391)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Over kVAR Consumed Trip Level
Over kVAR Consumed Trip Level (Parameter 392) allows you to define the total reactive power (kVAR) consumed at which the E300 relay trips on over reactive power (kVAR) consumed. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
398
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 333 - Over kVAR Consumed Trip Level (Parameter 392)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVAR
IMPORTANT
The Over kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an over reactive power (kVAR) consumed condition until the
Over kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time expires.
Over kVAR Consumed Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Over kVAR warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Over kVAR Consumed Warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Over kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time has expired
•
The total reactive power (kVAR) consumed is equal to or greater than the
Over kVAR Consumed Warning Level
When the Over kVAR Consumed Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 4-short blink pattern
•
Bit 3 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Over kVAR Consumed Warn Level
Over kVAR Consumed Warn Level (Parameter 393) allows you to define the reactive power (kVAR) consumed at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Table 334 - Over kVAR Consumed Warn Level (Parameter 393)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVAR
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
399
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT
The Over kVAR Consumed Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time has expired, the Over kVAR
Consumed Warning indication is instantaneous.
Under kVAR Generated Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Under kVAR Generated indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Under kVAR Generated Trip is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Under kVAR Generated Inhibit Time has expired
•
The total reactive power (kVAR) generated is less than the Under
•
kVAR Generated Trip Level for a time period greater than the Under kVAR Generated Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an under reactive power (kVAR) generated, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 5-short blink pattern
•
Bit 4 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
400
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Under kVAR Generated Trip Delay
Under kVAR Generated Trip Delay (Parameter 395) allows you to define the time period an under reactive power (kVAR) generated condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 335 - Under kVAR Generated Trip Delay (Parameter 395)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Under kVAR Generated Trip Level
Under kVAR Generated Trip Level (Parameter 396) allows you to define the reactive power (kVAR) generated at which the E300 relay trips on an under reactive power (kVAR) generated. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
401
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 336 - Under kVAR Generated Trip Level (Parameter 396)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVAR
IMPORTANT
The Under kVAR Generated Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an under reactive power (kVAR) generated condition until the
Under kVAR Generated Inhibit Time expires.
Under kVAR Generated Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Under kVAR Generated warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Under kVAR Generated Warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Under kVAR Generated Inhibit Time has expired
•
The total reactive power (kVAR) generated is equal to or less than the
Under kVAR Generated Warning Level
When the Under kVAR Generated Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 5-short blink pattern
•
Bit 4 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Under kVAR Generated Warn Level
Under kVAR Generated Warn Level (Parameter 397) allows you to define the reactive power (kVAR) generated at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
402
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 337 - Under kVAR Generated Warn Level (Parameter 397)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVAR
IMPORTANT
The Under kVAR Generated Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Under kVAR generated Inhibit Time has expired, the Under kVAR Generated Warning indication is instantaneous.
Over kVAR Generated Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Over kVAR Generated indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Over kVAR Generated Trip is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Over kVAR Generated Inhibit Time has expired
•
The total reactive power (kVAR) generated is greater than the Over
•
kVAR Generated Trip Level for a time period greater than the Over kVAR
Generated Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an over reactive power (kVAR) generated, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 6-short blink pattern
•
Bit 5 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
403
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Over kVAR Generated Trip Delay
Over kVAR Generated Trip Delay (Parameter 399) allows you to define the time period an over reactive power (kVAR) generated condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 338 - Over kVAR Generated Trip Display (Parameter 399)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Over kVAR Generated Trip Level
Over kVAR Generated Trip Level (Parameter 400) allows you to define the total reactive power (kVAR) generated at which the E300 relay trips on over reactive power (kVAR) generated. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
404
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 339 - Over kVAR Generated Trip Level (Parameter 400)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVAR
IMPORTANT
The Over kVAR Generated Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an over reactive power (kVAR) generated condition until the
Over kVAR Generated Inhibit Time expires.
Over kVAR Generated Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Over kVAR warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Over kVAR Generated Warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Over kVAR Generated Inhibit Time has expired
•
The total reactive power (kVAR) generated is equal to or greater than the
Over kVAR Generated Warning Level
When the Over kVAR Generated Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 6-short blink pattern
•
Bit 5 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Over kVAR Generated Warn Level
Over kVAR Generated Warn Level (Parameter 401) allows you to define the reactive power (kVAR) generated at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Table 340 - Over kVAR Generated Warn Level (Parameter 401)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVAR
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
405
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
406
IMPORTANT
The Over kVAR Generated Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over kVAR Generated Inhibit Time has expired, the Over kVAR
Generated Warning indication is instantaneous.
Apparent Power (kVA) Protection
The E300 relay has the capability to help protect against apparent power (kVA) for specific applications that require the monitoring of both voltage and current.
You can help protect or issue a warning if the apparent power (kVA) consumption of an electric motor is either too high or too low.
Under kVA Inhibit Time
Under kVA Inhibit Time (Parameter 402) allows you to inhibit an under apparent power (kVA) trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 341 - Under kVA Inhibit Time (Parameter 402)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Over kVA Inhibit Time
Over kVA Inhibit Time (Parameter 406) allows you to inhibit an over apparent power (kVA) trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 342 - Over kVA Inhibit Time (Parameter 406)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Under kVA Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Under kVA indication if:
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
•
No trip currently exists
•
Under kVA Trip is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Under kVA Inhibit Time has expired
•
The total apparent power (kVA) is less than the Under kVA Trip Level for a time period greater than the Under kVA Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an under apparent power (kVA), the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 7-short blink pattern
•
Bit 6 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Under kVA Trip Delay
Under kVA Trip Delay (Parameter 403) allows you to define the time period an under apparent power (kVA) condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
407
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
408
Table 343 - Under kVA Trip Delay (Parameter 403)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Under kVA Trip Level
Under kVA Trip Level (Parameter 404) allows you to define the apparent power
(kVA) at which the E300 relay trips on an under apparent power (kVA). It is useradjustable from 0…2,000,000 kVA.
Table 344 - Under kVA Trip Level (Parameter 404)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2,000,000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVA
IMPORTANT
The Under kVA Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to
20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an under apparent power (kVA) condition until the Under kVA Inhibit Time expires.
Under kVA Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Under kVA warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Under kVA Warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Under kVA Inhibit Time has expired
•
The total apparent power (kVA) is equal to or less than the Under kVA
Warning Level
When the Under kVA Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 7-short blink pattern
•
Bit 6 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Under kVA Warn Level
Under kVA Warn Level (Parameter 405) allows you to define the apparent power
(kVA) at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kVA.
Table 345 - Under kVA Warn Level (Parameter 405)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2,000,000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVA
IMPORTANT
The Under kVA Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Under kVA Inhibit Time has expired, the Under kVA Warning indication is instantaneous.
Over kVA Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Over kVA indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Over kVA Trip is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Over kVA Inhibit Time has expired
•
The total apparent power (kVA) is greater than the Over kVA Trip Level for a time period greater than the Over kVA Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an over apparent power (kVA), the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 8-short blink pattern
•
Bit 7 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
409
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Over kVA Trip Delay
Over kVA Trip Delay (Parameter 407) allows you to define the time period an over apparent power (kVA) condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 346 - Over kVA Trip Delay (Parameter 407)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Over kVA Trip Level
Over kVA Trip Level (Parameter 408) allows you to define the total apparent power (kVA) at which the E300 relay trips on over apparent power (kVA). It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kVA.
410
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 347 - Over kVA Trip Level (Parameter 408)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2,000,000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVA
IMPORTANT
The Over kVA Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to
20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an over apparent power (kVA) condition until the Over kVA Inhibit Time expires.
Over kVA Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Over kVA warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Over kVA Warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Over kVA Inhibit Time has expired
•
The total apparent power (kVA) is equal to or greater than the Over kVA
Warning Level
When the Over kVA Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 8-short blink pattern
•
Bit 7 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Over kVA Warn Level
Over kVA Warn Level (Parameter 409) allows you to define the apparent power
(kVA) at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kVA.
Table 348 - Over kVA Warn Level (Parameter 409)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2,000,000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVA
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
411
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT
The Over kVA Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the
Over kVA Inhibit Time has expired, the Over kVA Warning indication is instantaneous.
Power Factor Protection
The E300 relay has the capability to help protect against power factor for specific applications that require the monitoring of both voltage and current. You can help protect or issue a warning if the power factor of an electric motor is either too high or too low.
Under Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time
Under Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time (Parameter 410) allows you to inhibit an under power factor lagging trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 349 - Under Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time (Parameter 410)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Over Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time
Over Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time (Parameter 414) allows you to inhibit an over power factor lagging trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 350 - Over Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time (Parameter 414)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
412
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Under Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time
Under Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time (Parameter 418) allows you to inhibit an under power factor leading trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 351 - Under Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time (Parameter 418)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Over Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time
Over Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time (Parameter 422) allows you to inhibit an over power factor leading trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 352 - Over Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time (Parameter 422)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Under Power Factor Lagging Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Under Power Factor Lagging indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Under Power Factor Lagging Trip is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Under Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time has expired
•
The total power factor lagging is less than the Under Power Factor Lagging
Trip Level for a time period greater than the Under Power Factor Lagging
Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an under power factor lagging, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 9-short blink pattern
•
Bit 8 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
413
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Under Power Factor Lagging Trip Delay
Under Power Factor Lagging Trip Delay (Parameter 411) allows you to define the time period an under power factor lagging condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 353 - Under Power Factor Lagging Trip Delay (Parameter 411)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
414
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Under Power Factor Lagging Trip Level
Under Power Factor Lagging Trip Level (Parameter 412) allows you to define the power factor lagging at which the E300 relay trips on an under power factor lagging. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Table 354 - Under Power Factor Lagging Trip Level (Parameter 412)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
-90
-100
0
1
%
SINT
1
IMPORTANT
The Under Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an under power factor lagging condition until the Under
Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time expires.
Under Power Factor Lagging Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Under Power Factor Lagging warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Under Power Factor Lagging Warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Under Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time has expired
•
The total power factor lagging is equal to or less than the Under Power
Factor Lagging Warning Level
When the Under Power Factor Lagging Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 9-short blink pattern
•
Bit 8 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Under Power Factor Lagging Warn Level
Under Power Factor Lagging Warn Level (Parameter 413) allows you to define the power factor lagging at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is useradjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
415
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 355 - Under Power Factor Lagging Warn Level (Parameter 413)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
-95
-100
0
1
%
SINT
1
IMPORTANT
The Under Power Factor Lagging Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Under Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time has expired, the Under Power Factor Lagging Warning indication is instantaneous.
Over Power Factor Lagging Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Over Power Factor Lagging indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Over Power Factor Lagging Trip is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Over Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time has expired
•
The total power factor lagging is greater than the Over Power Factor
Lagging Trip Level for a time period greater than the Over Power Factor
Lagging Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an over power factor lagging, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 10-short blink pattern
•
Bit 9 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
416
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Over Power Factor Lagging Trip Delay
Over Power Factor Lagging Trip Delay (Parameter 415) allows you to define the time period an over power factor lagging condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 356 - Over Power Factor Lagging Trip Delay (Parameter 415)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Over Power Factor Lagging Trip Level
Over Power Factor Lagging Trip Level (Parameter 416) allows you to define the total power factor lagging at which the E300 relay trips on over power factor lagging. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
417
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
418
Table 357 - Over Power Factor Lagging Trip Level (Parameter 416)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
%
-95
-100
0
SINT
IMPORTANT
The Over Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an over power factor lagging condition until the Over
Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time expires.
Over Power Factor Lagging Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Over kVAR warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Over Power Factor Lagging Warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Over Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time has expired
•
The total power factor lagging is equal to or greater than the Over Power
Factor Lagging Warning Level
When the Over Power Factor Lagging Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 10-short blink pattern
•
Bit 9 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Over Power Factor Lagging Warn Level
Over Power Factor Lagging Warn Level (Parameter 417) allows you to define the power factor lagging at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is useradjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Table 358 - Over Power Factor Lagging Warn Level (Parameter 417)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
%
-90
-100
0
SINT
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
IMPORTANT
The Over Power Factor Lagging Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time has expired, the Over
Power Factor Lagging Warning indication is instantaneous.
Under Power Factor Leading Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Under Power Factor Leading indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Under Power Factor Leading Trip is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Under Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time has expired
•
The total power factor leading is less than the Under Power Factor Leading
Trip Level for a time period greater than the Under Power Factor Leading
Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an under power factor leading, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 11-short blink pattern
•
Bit 10 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
419
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Under Power Factor Leading Trip Delay
Under Power Factor Leading Trip Delay (Parameter 419) allows you to define the time period an under power factor leading condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 359 - Under Power Factor Leading Trip Delay (Parameter 419)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Under Power Factor Leading Trip Level
Under Power Factor Leading Trip Level (Parameter 420) allows you to define the power factor leading at which the E300 relay trips on an under power factor leading. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
420
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 360 -
Under Power Factor Leading Trip Level (Parameter 420)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
%
90
100
0
USINT
IMPORTANT
The Under Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an under power factor leading condition until the Under
Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time expires.
Under Power Factor Leading Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Under Power Factor Leading warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Under Power Factor Leading Warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Under Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time has expired
•
The total power factor leading is equal to or less than the Under Power
Factor Leading Warning Level
When the Under Power Factor Leading Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 11-short blink pattern
•
Bit 10 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Under Power Factor Leading Warn Level
Under Power Factor Leading Warn Level (Parameter 421) allows you to define the power factor leading at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is useradjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
421
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 361 - Under Power Factor Leading Warn Level (Parameter 421)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
95
100
0
1
%
USINT
1
IMPORTANT
The Under Power Factor Leading Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Under Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time has expired, the Under Power Factor Leading Warning indication is instantaneous.
Over Power Factor Leading Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Over Power Factor Leading indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Over Power Factor Leading Trip is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Over Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time has expired
•
The total power factor leading is greater than the Over Power Factor
Leading Trip Level for a time period greater than the Over Power Factor
Leading Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an over power factor leading, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 12-short blink pattern
•
Bit 11 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
422
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Over Power Factor Leading Trip Delay
Over Power Factor Leading Trip Delay (Parameter 423) allows you to define the time period an over power factor leading condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 362 - Over Power Factor Leading Trip Delay (Parameter 423)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Over Power Factor Leading Trip Level
Over Power Factor Leading Trip Level (Parameter 424) allows you to define the total power factor leading at which the E300 relay trips on over power factor leading. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
423
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
424
Table 363 - Over Power Factor Leading Trip Level (Parameter 424)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
%
95
100
0
USINT
IMPORTANT
The Over Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an over power factor leading condition until the Over
Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time expires.
Over Power Factor Leading Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Over kVAR warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Over Power Factor Leading Warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Over Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time has expired
•
The total power factor leading is equal to or greater than the Over Power
Factor Leading Warning Level
When the Over Power Factor Leading Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 12-short blink pattern
•
Bit 11 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Over Power Factor Leading Warn Level
Over Power Factor Leading Warn Level (Parameter 425) allows you to define the power factor leading at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is useradjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Table 364 - Over Power Factor Leading Warn Level (Parameter 425)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
%
90
100
0
USINT
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
I
IMPORTANT
The Over Power Factor Leading Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time has expired, the Over
Power Factor Leading Warning indication is instantaneous.
Control-Based Protection
The E300 relay provides a number of control-based protection functions including:
•
Test Trip
•
Operator Station Trip
•
Remote Trip
•
Start Inhibit
•
Preventive Maintenance
•
Configuration Trip
•
Option Match Trip/Warning
•
Expansion Bus Trip/Warning
•
Non Volatile Storage Trip
•
Test Mode Trip
Control Trip Enable (Parameter 186) and Control Warning Enable (Parameter
192) are used to enable the respective control-based protective trip and warning functions.
Table 365 - Control Trip Enable (Parameter 186)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Test Trip Enable
X
PTC Trip Enable
X
DeviceLogix Trip Enable
X
Operator Station Trip Enable
X
Remote Trip Enable
X
Blocked Start Trip Enable
X
Hardware Fault Trip Enable
X
X
Configuration Trip Enable
Option Match Trip Enable
X
Feedback Timeout Trip Enable
X
Expansion Bus Trip Enable
Reserved
X
X
Reserved
Nonvolatile Memory Trip Enable
Test Mode Trip Enable
Reserved
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
425
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) and Control Warning Status (Parameter 13) are used to monitor the respective current-based protective trip and warning functions.
Table 366 - Control Warning Enable (Parameter 192)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Function
Reserved
Reserved
DeviceLogix Warning Enable
Operator Station Warning Enable
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Option Match Warning Enable
Feedback Timeout Warning Enable
Expansion Bus Warning Enable
Number Of Starts Warning Enable
Operating Hours Warning Enable
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Table 367 - Control Trip Status (Parameter 7)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Test Trip
X
PTC Trip
X
Function
DeviceLogix Trip
X
Operator Station Trip
X
Remote Trip
X
Blocked Start Trip
X
Hardware Fault Trip
X
Configuration Trip
X
Option Match Trip
X
Feedback Timeout Trip
X
Expansion Bus Trip
Reserved
X
X
Reserved
Nonvolatile Memory Trip
Test Mode Trip
Reserved
426
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 368 - Control Warning Status (Parameter 13)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Function
Reserved
PTC Warning
DeviceLogix Warning
Operator Station Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Option Match Warning
Feedback Timeout Warning
Expansion Bus Warning
Number Of Starts Warning
Operating Hours Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Test Trip
The E300 relay provides the capability to put the overload relay into a Test Trip state. You can implement this feature when commissioning a motor control circuit to verify the response of the E300 relay, its associated Expansion I/O modules, and the networked automation system.
The E300 relay trips with a test trip indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Test Trip protection is enabled
•
You press the blue reset button on the Communication Module for more than 3 seconds.
If the E300 relay trips on a test trip, the following occurs:
•
The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red 3-long / 1-short blink pattern
•
Bit 0 in Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
427
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
428
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Thermistor (PTC) Protection
The following E300 relay control modules can accept up to 6 thermistors (PTC) temperature sensors wired in series to monitor the temperature of a motor’s windings, rotor, and/or bearings.
•
193-EIOGP-42-24D
•
193-EIOGP-22-120
•
193-EIOGP-22-240
The thermistor (PTC) based temperature sensors connect to the IT1 and IT2 terminals of the E300 Control Module.
Thermistor (PTC) Trip
The E300 relay trips with a thermistor (PTC) trip indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Resistance of the thermistor (PTC) sensors is greater than 3400 Ω
If the E300 relay trips on a thermistor (PTC), the following occurs:
•
The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red 3-long / 2-short blink pattern
•
Bit 1 in Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay opens
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay opens
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm closes
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Thermistor (PTC) Warning
The E300 relay provides a thermistor (PTC) warning indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Resistance of the thermistor (PTC) sensors is greater than 3400 Ω
If the E300 relay warns on a thermistor (PTC), the following occurs:
•
The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 3-long / 2-short blink pattern
•
Bit 1 in Control Warning Status (Parameter 13) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
DeviceLogix Protection
An E300 relay with firmware v5.000 or higher has a DeviceLogix logic engine.
You can create custom logic programs for distributed motor control applications.
See Chapter 9 for more information on DeviceLogix. DeviceLogix provides you
with the capability to create a customized protection algorithm that can generate a trip or warning event.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
429
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
430
DeviceLogix Trip
The E300 relay trips with a DeviceLogix trip indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
The DeviceLogix program activates the DeviceLogix Trip bit
If the E300 relay trips on a DeviceLogix program, the following occurs:
•
The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red 3-long / 3-short blink pattern
•
Bit 2 in Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay opens
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay opens
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm closes
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
DeviceLogix Warning
The E300 relay provides a DeviceLogix warning indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
The DeviceLogix program activates the DeviceLogix Warning bit
If the E300 relay warns on a DeviceLogix program, the following occurs:
•
The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 3-long / 3-short blink pattern
•
Bit 2 in Control Warning Status (Parameter 13) sets to 1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Operator Station Trip
The E300 relay provides the capability to plug and play its optional operator stations. The operator station protection feature trips the E300 relay when you press the red O (stop) button. This feature is a failsafe mechanism to allow you to de-energize a contactor coil anytime the red O (stop) button is pressed.
Operator Station Trip should be disabled when an operator station is being used to send start and stop signals to an automation control system.
The E300 relay trips with an operator station trip indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Operator Station Trip is enabled
•
You press the red O button on an operator station
If the E300 relay trips on an operator station trip, the following occurs:
•
The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red 3-long / 4-short blink pattern
•
Bit 3 in Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
431
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
432
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Remote Trip
The E300 relay provides the capability to remotely cause the E300 relay to trip via a network command or assigned digital input on the Control Module (see
for digital input assignments). This feature allows the capability of tripping the E300 relay from a remote source such as a vibration switch or external monitoring relay.
The E300 relay trips with a remote trip indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Remote Trip is enabled
•
A Control Module’s digital input with a remote trip assignment is activated or the Communication Module receives a remote trip command from the communication network
If the E300 relay trips on a remote trip, the following occurs:
•
The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red 3-long / 5-short blink pattern
•
Bit 4 in Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Start Inhibit Protection
This protective function allows you to limit the number of starts in a given time period and limit the operating hours for an electric motor. A start is defined as the E300 relay sensing a transition in current from 0 A to 30% of the minimum
FLA rating of the device. The Blocked Start protective function is set by Starts
Per Hour (Parameter 205) and/or Starts Interval (Parameter 206).
Blocked Start Trip
The E300 relay trips with a blocked start trip indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Blocked Start Trip is enabled
•
The number of starts within the past hour equals the value set in Starts Per
Hour (Parameter 205)
•
The time between starts is less than the value set in Starts Interval
(Parameter 206)
If the E300 relay trips on a blocked start trip, the following occurs:
•
The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red 3-long / 6-short blink pattern
•
Bit 5 in Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
433
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
434
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Starts Per Hour
Starts Per Hour (Parameter 205) is the number of starts within the last hour (60 minutes). This value is adjustable from 0…120 starts.
Table 369 - Starts Per Hour (Parameter 205)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
0
120
1
USINT
1
Starts Interval
Starts Interval (Parameter 206) is the time that you must wait between starts.
This value is adjustable from 0…3600 seconds.
Table 370 - Starts Interval (Parameter 206)
Default Value
Minimum Value
600
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
3600
UINT
2
1
Seconds
Starts Available
Starts Available (Parameter 30) reports the number of starts currently available based on the blocked start settings and the actual motor starting events.
Table 371 - Starts Available (Parameter 30)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
120
USINT
1
1
Time to Start
Time to Start (Parameter 31) reports the amount of the time remaining until a new start can be issued. If the Time to Start time has elapsed, this parameter reports zero until the next Blocked Start trip occurs.
Table 372 - Time to Start (Parameter 31)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
3600
UINT
2
1
Seconds
Preventive Maintenance
The E300 relay offers preventive maintenance warnings based on the number of start cycles and the number of operating hours. These warnings can be used to alert you that the number of starts or number of operating hours has been reached, and it is time to perform preventive maintenance.
Number of Starts Warning
The E300 relay warns with a number of starts warning indication if:
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
435
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
436
•
No warning currently exists
•
Number of Starts Warning is enabled
•
The value in Starts Counter (Parameter 29) is greater than the value set in
Total Starts (Parameter 207)
If the E300 relay warns on a number of starts warning, the following occurs:
•
The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 3-long / 12-short blink pattern
•
Bit 11 in Control Warning Status (Parameter 13) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Total Starts
Total Starts (Parameter 207) allows you to set the number starts until the starts counter warning occurs.
Table 373 - Total Starts (Parameter 207)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
0
65535
UINT
Starts Counter
Starts Counter (Parameter 29) represents the number of times a motor has been started. This value can be reset to zero using the Clear Command (Parameter
165) function
Clear Operating Statistics
.
Table 374 - Starts Counter (Parameter 29)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
0
65535
UINT
Operating Hours Warning
The E300 relay warns with an operating hours warning indication if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Operating Hours Warning is enabled
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
•
The value in Operating Time (Parameter 28) is greater than the value set in Total Operating Hours (Parameter 208)
If the E300 relay warns on an operating hours warning, the following occurs:
•
The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 3-long / 13-short blink pattern
•
Bit 12 in Control Warning Status (Parameter 13) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Total Operating Hours
Total Operating Hours (Parameter 208) allows you to set the number operating hours that a motor can operate until the operating hours warning occurs.
Table 375 - Total Operating Hours (Parameter 208)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
65535
UINT
2
1
Hours
Operating Time
Operating Time (Parameter 28) represents the number hours that a motor has been running. This value can be reset to zero using the Clear Command
(Parameter 165) function
Clear Operating Statistics
.
Table 376 - Operating Time (Parameter 28)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
65535
UINT
2
1
Hours
Hardware Fault
The E300 relay continuously monitors the status of the Control, Sensing, and
Communication Modules. The E300 relay issues a hardware fault trip if there is an issue with the Control, Sensing, and Communication Modules or if one of the modules is missing or incompatible. The Hardware Fault Trip is always enabled.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
437
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
The E300 relay trips with a hardware fault trip indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Hardware Fault Trip is enabled
•
An issue exists between the Control Module, Sensing Module, and/or
Communication Module
If the E300 relay trips on a hardware fault trip, the following occurs:
•
The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red 3-long / 7-short blink pattern
•
Bit 6 in Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Configuration Trip
See Invalid Configuration Mode in Chapter 4
for more information on
Configuration Trip.
438
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Option Match
See Option Match in Chapter 4 for more information on Option Match Trip and
Warning.
Contactor Feedback Protection
An E300 relay with firmware v5.000 or higher has the capability to control motors using its Operating Modes. You can select one of the pre-programmed
Operating Modes that monitor the feedback status of a contactor by wiring the auxiliary contacts of the contactor into one of the digital inputs of the E300 relay.
See Chapter 5 for more information on Operating Modes.
Feedback Timeout
Feedback Timeout (Parameter 213) is the amount time in milliseconds a
Feedback based Operating Mode waits to receive a contactor feedback signal after the contactor has been issued an energize command.
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
Feedback Timeout (Parameter 213)
500
0
2
1
65535
UINT
Contactor Feedback Trip
The E300 relay trips with a Contactor Feedback trip indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
The Operating Mode program does not receive a contactor feedback signal before the Feedback Timeout (Parameter 213)
If the E300 relay trips on a Contactor Feedback, the following occurs:
•
The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red 3-long / 10-short blink pattern
•
Bit 9 in Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay opens
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay opens
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm closes
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
439
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
440
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Contactor Feedback Warning
The E300 relay provides a Contactor Feedback warning indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
The Operating Mode program does not receive a contactor feedback signal before the Feedback Timeout (Parameter 213)
If the E300 relay warns on a Contactor Feedback, the following occurs:
•
The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 3-long / 10-short blink pattern
•
Bit 9 in Control Warning Status (Parameter 13) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Expansion Bus Fault
See Expansion Bus Fault in
Chapter 4 for more information on Expansion Bus
Trip and Warning.
Nonvolatile Storage Fault
The E300 relay continuously monitors the status of its nonvolatile storage. The
E300 relay issues a nonvolatile storage fault trip if there is an issue with its
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
nonvolatile storage or if it becomes corrupt. The Nonvolatile Storage Fault Trip is always enabled.
The E300 relay trips with a hardware fault trip indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Nonvolatile Storage Fault Trip is enabled
•
An issue exists in the E300 relay’s nonvolatile storage
If the E300 relay trips on a nonvolatile storage fault trip, the following occurs:
•
The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red 3-long / 14-short blink pattern
•
Bit 13 in Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Test Mode Trip
Some motor control center enclosures include a Test Position in which the motor power is disconnected from the enclosure, but the control power is still active.
This allows motor control center commissioning staff to verify that the motor starter is mechanically working and communication is established with the automation control system. The E300 relay provides the capability to put the
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
441
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions overload relay into a Test Mode Trip state if motor control center enclosure is in a test position, and the E300 relay detects motor current and/or voltage is present.
The E300 relay trips with a test mode trip indication if:
•
No trip currently exists.
•
Test Mode Trip protection is enabled.
•
The digital input that is assigned to read the Test Position feedback is active. See Input Assignments (Parameters 196…201) in
.
•
Motor current and/or voltage is present.
If the E300 relay trips on a test mode trip, the following occurs:
•
The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red 3-long / 15-short blink pattern
•
Bit 14 in Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
IMPORTANT
Motor current is detected when a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to
30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device
442
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Analog-based Protection
The E300 relay’s Analog I/O Expansion Modules scan up to three analog signals per module. This information can be used to trigger an over analog level Trip or
Warning. The analog-based protection features can be used with the following analog applications:
•
Monitoring motor winding and bearing temperatures that are measured by
RTD sensors
•
Monitoring liquid, air, or steam flow
•
Monitoring temperature
•
Monitoring weight
•
Monitoring levels
•
Monitoring a potentiometer
•
Monitoring PTC or NTC thermistor sensors
Analog Trip Enable (Parameter 187) and Analog Warning Enable (Parameter
193) are used to enable the respective analog-based protective trip and warning functions.
Table 377 - Analog Trip Enable (Parameter 187)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Function
X Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 00 Trip
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 01 Trip
Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 02 Trip
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 00 Trip
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 01 Trip
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 02 Trip
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 00 Trip
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 01 Trip
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 02 Trip
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 00 Trip
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 01 Trip
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 02 Trip
Table 378 - Analog Warning Enable (Parameter 193)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 00 Warning
X
Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 01 Warning
X
Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 02 Warning
X
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 00 Warning
X
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 01 Warning
X
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 02 Warning
X
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 00 Warning
X
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 01 Warning
X
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 02 Warning
X
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 00 Warning
X
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 01 Warning
X
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 02 Warning
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
443
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) and Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) are used to monitor the respective analog-based protective trip and warning functions.
Table 379 - Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 00 Trip
X
Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 01 Trip
X
Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 02 Trip
X
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 00 Trip
X
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 01 Trip
X
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 02 Trip
X
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 00 Trip
X
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 01 Trip
X
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 02 Trip
X
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 00 Trip
X
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 01 Trip
X
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 02 Trip
Table 380 - Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 00 Warning
X
Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 01 Warning
X
Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 02 Warning
X
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 00 Warning
X
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 01 Warning
X
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 02 Warning
X
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 00 Warning
X
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 01 Warning
X
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 02 Warning
X
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 00 Warning
X
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 01 Warning
X
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 02 Warning
Analog Module 1
The E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module scans up to three analog signals. An over level trip or warning can be configured for each input channel.
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip is enabled
444
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
•
The measured analog input signal is greater than the Analog Module 1 –
Channel 00 Trip Level for a time period greater than the Analog Module 1
– Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 1-short blink pattern
•
Bit 0 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 443) allows you to define the time period an Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
445
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
446
Table 381 - Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 443)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Trip Level
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Trip Level (Parameter 444) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on an Analog
Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level trip. It is user-adjustable from -
32768…+32767.
Table 382 -
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Trip Level (Parameter 444)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
INT
2
1
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning is enabled
•
The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog
Module 1 – Channel 00 Warning Level
When the Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 1-short blink pattern
•
Bit 0 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Warning Level
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Warning Level (Parameter 445) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on an
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level warning. It is user-adjustable from -
32768…+32767.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 383 -
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Warning Level (Parameter 445)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip is enabled
•
The measured analog input signal is greater than the Analog Module 1 –
Channel 01 Trip Level for a time period greater than the Analog Module 1
– Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 2-short blink pattern
•
Bit 1 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
447
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 452) allows you to define the time period an Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 384 - Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 452)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Trip Level
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Trip Level (Parameter 453) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on an Analog
Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level trip. It is user-adjustable from -
32768…+32767.
448
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 385 - Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Trip Level (Parameter 453)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level Warning is enabled
•
The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog
Module 1 – Channel 01 Warning Level
When the Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 2-short blink pattern
•
Bit 1 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Warning Level
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Warning Level (Parameter 454) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on an
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level warning. It is user-adjustable from -
32768…+32767.
Table 386 - Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Warning Level (Parameter 454)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip is enabled
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
449
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
•
The measured analog input signal is greater than the Analog Module 1 –
Channel 02 Trip Level for a time period greater than the Analog Module 1
– Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 3-short blink pattern
•
Bit 2 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 461) allows you to define the time period an Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 seconds.
450
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 387 -
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 461)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Trip Level
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Trip Level (Parameter 462) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on an Analog
Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level trip. It is user-adjustable from -
32768…+32767.
Table 388 -
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Trip Level (Parameter 462)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
INT
2
1
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level Warning is enabled
•
The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog
Module 1 – Channel 02 Warning Level
When the Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 3-short blink pattern
•
Bit 2 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Warning Level
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Warning Level (Parameter 463) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on an
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level warning. It is user-adjustable from -
32768…+32767.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
451
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 389 - Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Warning Level (Parameter 463)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
INT
2
1
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 2
The E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module scans up to three analog signals. An over level trip or warning can be configured for each input channel.
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip is enabled
•
The measured analog input signal is greater than the Analog Module 2 –
Channel 00 Trip Level for a time period greater than the Analog Module 2
– Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 4-short blink pattern
•
Bit 3 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
452
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 474) allows you to define the time period an Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 390 - Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 474)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Trip Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Trip Level (Parameter 475) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on an Analog
Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level trip. It is user-adjustable from -
32768…+32767.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
453
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
454
Table 391 - Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Trip Level (Parameter 475)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning is enabled
•
The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog
Module 2 – Channel 00 Warning Level
When the Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 4-short blink pattern
•
Bit 3 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Warning Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Warning Level (Parameter 476) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on an
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level warning. It is user-adjustable from -
32768…+32767.
Table 392 - Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Warning Level (Parameter 476)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip is enabled
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
•
The measured analog input signal is greater than the Analog Module 2 –
Channel 01 Trip Level for a time period greater than the Analog Module 2
– Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 5-short blink pattern
•
Bit 1 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
•
Bit 4 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 483) allows you to define the time period an Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 seconds.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
455
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
456
Table 393 - Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 483)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Trip Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Trip Level (Parameter 484) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on an Analog
Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level trip. It is user-adjustable from -
32768…+32767.
Table 394 - Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Trip Level (Parameter 484)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level Warning is enabled
•
The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog
Module 2 – Channel 01 Warning Level
When the Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 5-short blink pattern
•
Bit 4 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Warning Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Warning Level (Parameter 485) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on an
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level warning. It is user-adjustable from -
32768…+32767.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 395 - Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Warning Level (Parameter 485)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip is enabled
•
The measured analog input signal is greater than the Analog Module 2 –
Channel 02 Trip Level for a time period greater than the Analog Module 2
– Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 6-short blink pattern
•
Bit 5 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
457
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 492) allows you to define the time period an Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 396 - Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 492)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Trip Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Trip Level (Parameter 493) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on an Analog
Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level trip. It is user-adjustable from -
32768…+32767.
458
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 397 - Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Trip Level (Parameter 493)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level Warning is enabled
•
The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog
Module 2 – Channel 02 Warning Level
When the Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 6-short blink pattern
•
Bit 5 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Warning Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Warning Level (Parameter 494) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on an
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level warning. It is user-adjustable from -
32768…+32767.
Table 398 - Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Warning Level (Parameter 494)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
INT
2
1
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 3
The E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module scans up to three analog signals. An over level trip or warning can be configured for each input channel.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
459
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
460
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip is enabled
•
The measured analog input signal is greater than the Analog Module 3 –
Channel 00 Trip Level for a time period greater than the Analog Module 3
– Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 7-short blink pattern
•
Bit 6 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 505) allows you to define the time period an Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 399 - Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 505)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Trip Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Trip Level (Parameter 506) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on an Analog
Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level trip. It is user-adjustable from -
32768…+32767.
Table 400 - Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Trip Level (Parameter 506)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
INT
2
1
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning is enabled
•
The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog
Module 3 – Channel 00 Warning Level
When the Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 7-short blink pattern
•
Bit 6 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Warning Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Warning Level (Parameter 507) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on an
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
461
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level warning. It is user-adjustable from -
32768…+32767.
Table 401 - Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Warning Level (Parameter 507)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
INT
2
1
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip is enabled
•
The measured analog input signal is greater than the Analog Module 3 –
Channel 01 Trip Level for a time period greater than the Analog Module 3
– Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 8-short blink pattern
•
Bit 7 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
462
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 514) allows you to define the time period an Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 402 - Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 514)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Trip Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Trip Level (Parameter 515) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on an Analog
Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level trip. It is user-adjustable from -
32768…+32767.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
463
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
464
Table 403 - Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Trip Level (Parameter 515)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
INT
2
1
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level Warning is enabled
•
The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog
Module 3 – Channel 01 Warning Level
When the Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 8-short blink pattern
•
Bit 7 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Warning Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Warning Level (Parameter 516) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on an
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level warning. It is user-adjustable from -
32768…+32767.
Table 404 - Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Warning Level (Parameter 516)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
INT
2
1
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip is enabled
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
•
The measured analog input signal is greater than the Analog Module 3 –
Channel 02 Trip Level for a time period greater than the Analog Module 3
– Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 9-short blink pattern
•
Bit 8 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 523) allows you to define the time period an Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
465
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
466
Table 405 - Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 523)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Trip Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Trip Level (Parameter 524) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on an Analog
Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level trip. It is user-adjustable from -
32768…+32767.
Table 406 - Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Trip Level (Parameter 524)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level Warning is enabled
•
The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog
Module 3 – Channel 02 Warning Level
When the Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 9-short blink pattern
•
Bit 8 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Warning Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Warning Level (Parameter 525) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on an
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level warning. It is user-adjustable from -
32768…+32767.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 407 - Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Warning Level (Parameter 525)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
INT
2
1
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 4
The E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module scans up to three analog signals. An over level trip or warning can be configured for each input channel.
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip is enabled
•
The measured analog input signal is greater than the Analog Module 4 –
Channel 00 Trip Level for a time period greater than the Analog Module 4
– Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 10-short blink pattern
•
Bit 9 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
467
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 536) allows you to define the time period an Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 408 - Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 536)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Trip Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Trip Level (Parameter 537) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on an Analog
Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level trip. It is user-adjustable from -
32768…+32767.
468
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 409 - Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Trip Level (Parameter 537)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
INT
2
1
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning is enabled
•
The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog
Module 3 – Channel 00 Warning Level
When the Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 10-short blink pattern
•
Bit 9 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Warning Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Warning Level (Parameter 538) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on an
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level warning. It is user-adjustable from -
32768…+32767.
Table 410 - Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Warning Level (Parameter 538)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip is enabled
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
469
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
•
The measured analog input signal is greater than the Analog Module 4 –
Channel 01 Trip Level for a time period greater than the Analog Module 4
– Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 11-short blink pattern
•
Bit 10 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 545) allows you to define the time period an Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
470
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Table 411 - Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 545)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Trip Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Trip Level (Parameter 546) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on an Analog
Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level trip. It is user-adjustable from -
32768…+32767.
Table 412 - Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Trip Level (Parameter 546)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level Warning is enabled
•
The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog
Module 4 – Channel 01 Warning Level
When the Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 11-short blink pattern
•
Bit 10 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Warning Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Warning Level (Parameter 547) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on an
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level warning. It is user-adjustable from -
32768…+32767.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
471
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 413 - Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Warning Level (Parameter 547)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip
The E300 relay trips with an Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip is enabled
•
The measured analog input signal is greater than the Analog Module 4 –
Channel 02 Trip Level for a time period greater than the Analog Module 4
– Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 12-short blink pattern
•
Bit 11 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
472
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 554) allows you to define the time period an Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 414 - Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 554)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Trip Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Trip Level (Parameter 555) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on an Analog
Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level trip. It is user-adjustable from -
32768…+32767.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
473
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 415 - Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Trip Level (Parameter 555)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level Warning
The E300 relay indicates an Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level Warning is enabled
•
The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog
Module 4 – Channel 02 Warning Level
When the Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 12-short blink pattern
•
Bit 11 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
474
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 6
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Warning Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Warning Level (Parameter 556) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on an
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level warning. It is user-adjustable from
-32768…+32767.
Table 416 - Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Warning Level (Parameter 556)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
INT
2
1
0
-32768
32767
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
475
Chapter 6
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
476
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Introduction
Trip Reset
Configuration Preset
Chapter
7
Commands
This chapter provides detailed information about the reset, clear, and pre-configuration functions of the E300™ Electronic Overload Relay. The E300 relay provides three types of commands:
•
Trip reset
•
Configuration preset
•
Clear command
Trip Reset (Parameter 163) allows you to reset an E300 relay when it is in a tripped state. Trip Reset has the same functionality as pressing the blue reset button on E300 communication module and using the Trip Reset bit in the consumed output assemblies of a communication network.
A trip reset can only be performed when all conditions for the trip event have been cleared. For an overload trip event, the % Thermal Capacity Utilized
(Parameter 1) must be below the value that is specified in Overload Reset Level
(Parameter 174).
Table 417 - Trip Reset (Parameter 163)
Default Value
Range
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
0 = Ready
0 = Ready
1 = Trip Reset
USINT
The E300 relay has a number of preset configurations that allow you to quickly configure all of the configuration parameters that are needed for a specific operating mode in one command. This also allows you to restore the factory default values for all configuration parameters in the E300 relay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
477
Chapter 7
Commands
Table 418 - Config Preset (Parameter 164)
Default Value
Range
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
0 = Ready
0 = Ready
1 = Factory Defaults
USINT
The following pages list the available configuration presets and the values for the associated pre-configured configuration values.
No.
Parameter Name
139 TripHistoryMaskI
140 TripHistoryMaskV
141 TripHistoryMaskP
142 TripHistoryMaskC
143 TripHistoryMaskA
145 WarnHistoryMaskI
146 WarnHistoryMaskV
147 WarnHistoryMaskP
148 WarnHistoryMaskC
149 WarnHistoryMaskA
171 FLASetting
172 TripClass
173 OLPTCResetMode
174 OLResetLevel
175 OLWarningLevel
176 SingleOrThreePh
177 FLA2Setting
183 TripEnableI
184 TripEnableV
185 TripEnableP
186 TripEnableC
187 TripEnableA
189 WarningEnableI
190 WarningEnableV
191 WarningEnableP
192 WarningEnableC
193 WarningEnableA
0
0
0
0
0
75
85
Three Phase
0.50
0x0003
0
0
0x20C9
0
Default
Value
0xFFFF
0x003F
0x0FFF
0x27FF
0x0FFF
0xFFFF
0x003F
0x0FFF
0x1FFF
0x0FFF
0.50
10
Automatic
Units
Amps
%TCU
%TCU
Amps
Factory Defaults
When the Factory Defaults configuration preset command is selected, the E300 relay restores all configuration parameters back to their original factory default values.
Figure 212 - Factory Default Values
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
304 OutPt00PrFltAct Goto Value
305 OutPt00PrFltVal
306 OutPt00ComFltAct
307 OutPt00ComFltVal
308 OutPt00ComIdlAct
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
309 OutPt00ComIdlVal
310 OutPt01PrFltAct
311 OutPt01PrFltVal
312 OutPt01ComFltAct
313 OutPt01ComFltVal
314 OutPt01ComIdlAct
315 OutPt01ComIdlVal
316 OutPt02PrFltAct
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
317 OutPt02PrFltVal
318 OutPt02ComFltAct
319 OutPt02ComFltVal
320 OutPt02ComIdlAct
321 OutPt02ComIdlVal
322 OutDig1PrFltAct
323 OutDig1PrFltVal
324 OutDig1ComFltAct
325 OutDig1ComFltVal
326 OutDig1ComIdlAct
327 OutDig1ComIdlVal
328 OutDigp2PrFltAct
329 OutDig2PrFltVal
330 OutDig2ComFltAct
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Units No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
428 Screen1Param1 1
429 Screen1Param2
430 Screen2Param1
431 Screen2Param2
432 Screen3Param1
50
2
3
51
433 Screen3Param2
434 Screen4Param1
435 Screen4Param2
436 DisplayTimeout
52
38
39
300
437 InAnMod1Ch00Type Disable
438 InAMod1Ch0Format Eng Units
439 InAMod1C0TmpUnit Degrees C
440 InAMod1C0FiltFrq 17 Hz
441 InAMod1C0OpCktSt Upscale
442 InAnMod1Ch0RTDEn 3-Wire
443 InAMod1C0TripDly
444 InAMod1C0TripLvl
1.0
0
445 InAMod1C0WarnLvl 0
446 InAnMod1Ch01Type Disable
447 InAMod1Ch1Format Eng Units
448 InAMod1C1TmpUnit Degrees C
449 InAMod1C1FiltFrq 17 Hz
450 InAMod1C1OpCktSt Upscale
451 InAnMod1Ch1RTDEn 3-Wire
452 InAMod1C1TripDly 1.0
453 InAMod1C1TripLvl 0
454 InAMod1C1WarnLvl 0
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
478
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Commands
Chapter 7
No.
195
Parameter Name
SetOperatingMode
196 InPt00Assignment
197 InPt01Assignment
198 InPt02Assignment
199 InPt03Assignment
200 InPt04Assignment
201 InPt05Assignment
Normal
Normal
202 OutPt0Assignment * Trip Relay
203 OutPt1Assignment Normal
Default
Value
Net
Overload
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
204 OutPt2Assignment Normal
205 StartsPerHour 2
206 StartsInterval
207 PMTotalStarts
600
0
208 PMOperatingHours
209 ActFLA2wOutput
211 SecurityPolicy
212 Language
0
Disable
0x801F
English
213 FeedbackTimeout
214 TransitionDelay
215 InterlockDelay
216 EmergencyStartEn
500
10000
100
Disable
221 ControlModuleTyp
222 SensingModuleTyp
Ignore
Ignore
223 CommsModuleType Ignore
224 OperStationType Ignore
225 DigitalMod1Type
226 DigitalMod2Type
227 DigitalMod3Type
228 DigitalMod4Type
229 AnalogMod1Type
230 AnalogMod2Type
231 AnalogMod3Type
232 AnalogMod4Type
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
233 MismatchAction
239 PLInhibitTime
240 PLTripDelay
241 GroundFaultType
242 GFInhibitTime
243 GFTripDelay
244 GFTripLevel
245 GFWarningDelay
246 GFWarningLevel
247 GFFilter
248 GFMaxInhibit
249 StallEnabledTime
250 StallTripLevel
251 JamInhibitTime
252 JamTripDelay
2.50
0
2.00
Disable
Disable
10
600
10
5.0
0x0000
0
1
Internal
10
0.5
Units
Seconds
Hrs
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Amps
Seconds
Amps
Seconds
%FLA
Seconds
Seconds
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
331 OutDig2ComFltVal Open
332 OutDig2ComIdlAct
333 OutDig2ComIdlVal
334 OutDig3PrFltAct
335 OutDig3PrFltVal
336 OutDig3ComFltAct
337 OutDig3ComFltVal
338 OuDig3ComIdlAct
339 OutDig3ComIdlVal
340 OutDig4PrFltAct
341 OutDig4PrFltVal
342 OutDig4ComFltAct
343 OutDig4ComFltVal
344 OutDig4ComIdlAct
345 OutDig4ComIdlVal
346 CommOverride
347 NetworkOverride
350 PtDevOutCOSMask
352 VoltageMode
353 PTPrimary
354 PTSecondary
355 UVInhibitTime
356 UVTripDelay
357 UVTripLevel
358 UVWarningLevel
359 OVInhibitTime
360 OVTripDelay
361 OVTripLevel
362 OVWarningLevel
363 PhRotInhibitTime
364 PhaseRotTripType
365 VIBInhibitTime
366 VIBTripDelay
367 VIBTripLevel
368 VIBWarningLevel
369 UFInhibitTime
370 UFTripDelay
371 UFTripLevel
372 UFWarningLevel
373 OFInhibitTime
374 OFTripDelay
375 OFTripLevel
376 OFWarningLevel
377 PowerScale
378 UWInhibitTime
379 UWTripDelay
380 UWTripLevel
381 UWWarningLevel
Units
10
ABC
10
1.0
10
1.0
500.0
490.0
0x0000
Delta
480
480
10
1.0
100.0
400.0
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Disable
Disable
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
62 kW
10
1.0
10
1.0
63
0.000
0.000
15
10
10
1.0
57
58
Seconds
Seconds
Volt
Volt
Seconds
Seconds
Volt
Volt
Seconds
%
%
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Hz
Hz
Seconds
Seconds
Hz
Hz
Seconds
Seconds kW kW
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
455 InAnMod1Ch02Type Disable
Units
456 InAMod1Ch2Format Eng Units
457 InAMod1C2TmpUnit Degrees C
458 InAMod1C2FiltFrq 17 Hz
459 InAMod1C2OpCktSt Upscale
460 InAnMod1Ch2RTDEn 3-Wire
461 InAMod1C2TripDly 1.0
462 InAMod1C2TripLvl 0
463 InAMod1C2WarnLvl 0
464 OutAnMod1Type
465 OutAnMod1Select
Disable
Ave %FLA
466 OutAnMod1FltActn Zero
467 OutAnMod1IdlActn Zero
468 InAnMod2Ch00Type Disable
469 InAMod2Ch0Format Eng Units
470 InAMod2C0TmpUnit Degrees C
471 InAMod2C0FiltFrq 17 Hz
472 InAMod2C0OpCktSt Upscale
473 InAnMod2Ch0RTDEn 3-Wire
474 InAMod2C0TripDly
475 InAMod2C0TripLvl
1.0
0
476 InAMod2C0WarnLvl 0
477 InAnMod2Ch01Type Disable
478 InAMod2Ch1Format Eng Units
479 InAMod2C1TmpUnit Degrees C
480 InAMod2C1FiltFrq 17 Hz
481 InAMod2C1OpCktSt Upscale
482 InAnMod2Ch1RTDEn 3-Wire
483 InAMod2C1TripDly 1.0
484 InAMod2C1TripLvl 0
485 InAMod2C1WarnLvl 0
486 InAnMod2Ch02Type Disable
487 InAMod2Ch2Format Eng Units
488 InAMod2C2TmpUnit Degrees C
489 InAMod2C2FiltFrq 17 Hz
490 InAMod2C2OpCktSt Upscale
491 InAnMod2Ch2RTDEn 3-Wire
492 InAMod2C2TripDly 1.0
493 InAMod2C2TripLvl 0
494 InAMod2C2WarnLvl 0
495 OutAnMod2Type Disable
496 OutAnMod2Select Ave %FLA
497 OutAnMod2FltActn Zero
498 OutAnMod2dlActn Zero
499 InAnMod3Ch00Type Disable
500 InAMod3Ch0Format Eng Units
501 InAMod3C0TmpUnit Degrees C
502 InAMod3C0FiltFrq 17 Hz
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
479
Chapter 7
Commands
1.0
100
90
1.0
10
1.0
100
90
35
40
40
1.0
35
40
1.0
35
5
5
10
1.0
35
20
10
5.0
50
70
10
5.0
Default
Value
250
150
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100
90
10
1.0
1.0
1.0
%
%
Seconds
Seconds
%
%
Seconds
%
%
%
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
%
%
Seconds
%
%
%
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Units
%
%
%FLA
%FLA
Seconds
Seconds
%FLA
%FLA
Seconds
Seconds
No.
Parameter Name
253 JamTripLevel
254 JamWarningLevel
255 ULInhibitTime
256 ULTripDelay
257 ULTripLevel
258 ULWarningLevel
259 CIInhibitTime
260 CITripDelay
261 CITripLevel
262 CIWarningLevel
263 CTPrimary
264 CTSecondary
265 UCInhibitTime
266 L1UCTripDelay
267 L1UCTripLevel
268 L1UCWarningLevel
269 L2UCTripDelay
270 L2UCTripLevel
271 L2UCWarningLevel
272 L3UCTripDelay
273 L3UCTripLevel
274 L3UCWarningLevel
275 OCInhibitTime
276 L1OCTripDelay
277 L1OCTripLevel
278 L1OCWarningLevel
279 L2OCTripDelay
280 L2OCTripLevel
281 L2OCWarningLevel
282 L3OCTripDelay
283 L3OCTripLevel
284 L3OCWarningLevel
285 LineLossInhTime
286 L1LossTripDelay
287 L2LossTripDelay
288 L3LossTripDelay
291 Datalink0
292 Datalink1
293 Datalink2
294 Datalink3
295 Datalink4
296 Datalink5
297 Datalink6
298 Datalink7
Units
Seconds
Seconds kVA kVA
%
%
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
%
%
Seconds
Seconds kVAR kVAR
Seconds
Seconds kVA kVA
Seconds
Seconds
%
%
%
%
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds kVAR kVAR
Seconds
Seconds kVAR kVAR
Seconds
Seconds kW kW
Seconds
Seconds kVAR kVAR
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
382 OWInhibitTime
383 OWTripDelay
10
1.0
384 OWTripLevel
385 OWWarningLevel
386 UVARCInhibitTime
387 UVARCTripDelay
0.000
0.000
10
1.0
388 UVARCTripLevel
389 UVARCWarnLevel
390 OVARCInhibitTime
391 OVARCTripDelay
392 OVARCTripLevel
393 OVARCWarnLevel
394 UVARGInhibitTime
395 UVARGTripDelay
0.000
0.000
10
1.0
0.000
0.000
10
1.0
396 UVARGTripLevel
397 UVARGWarnLevel
398 OVARGInhibitTime
399 OVARGTripDelay
400 OVARGTripLevel
401 OVARGWarnLevel
402 UVAInhibitTime
403 UVATripDelay
404 UVATripLevel
405 UVAWarningLevel
406 OVAInhibitTime
407 OVATripDelay
408 OVATripLevel
409 OVAWarningLevel
410 UPFLagInhibTime
411 UPFLagTripDelay
0.000
0.000
10
1.0
0.000
0.000
10
1.0
0.000
0.000
10
1.0
0.000
0.000
10
1.0
412 UPFLagTripLevel
413 UPFLagWarnLevel
414 OPFLagInhibTime
415 OPFLagTripDelay
416 OPFLagTripLevel
417 OPFLagWarnLevel
418 UPFLeadInhibTime
419 UPFLeadTripDelay
420 UPFLeadTripLevel
421 UPFLeadWarnLevel
422 OPFLeadInhibTime
423 OPFLeadTripDelay
424 OPFLeadTripLevel
425 OPFLeadWarnLevel
95
90
95
10
1.0
10
1.0
90
-90
-95
10
1.0
-95
-90
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
503 InAMod3C0OpCktSt Upscale
504 InAnMod3Ch0RTDEn 3-Wire
505 InAMod3C0TripDly
506 InAMod3C0TripLvl
1.0
0
507 InAMod3C0WarnLvl 0
508 InAnMod3Ch01Type Disable
509 InAMod3Ch1Format Eng Units
510 InAMod3C1TmpUnit Degrees C
511 InAMod3C1FiltFrq 17 Hz
512 InAMod3C1OpCktSt Upscale
513 InAnMod3Ch1RTDEn 3-Wire
514 InAMod3C1TripDly 1.0
515 InAMod3C1TripLvl 0
516 InAMod3C1WarnLvl 0
517 InAnMod3Ch02Type Disable
518 InAMod3Ch2Format Eng Units
519 InAMod3C2TmpUnit Degrees C
520 InAMod3C2FiltFrq 17 Hz
521 InAMod3C2OpCktSt Upscale
522 InAnMod3Ch2RTDEn 3-Wire
523 InAMod3C2TripDly
524 InAMod3C2TripLvl
1.0
0
525 InAMod3C2WarnLvl 0
526 OutAnMod3Type Disable
527 OutAnMod3Select Ave %FLA
528 OutAnMod3FltActn Zero
529 OutAnMod3dlActn Zero
530 InAnMod4Ch00Type Disable
531 InAMod4Ch0Format Eng Units
532 InAMod3C0TmpUnit Degrees C
533 InAMod4C0FiltFrq 17 Hz
534 InAMod4C0OpCktSt Upscale
535 InAnMod4Ch0RTDEn 3-Wire
536 InAMod4C0TripDly
537 InAMod4C0TripLvl
538 InAMod4C0WarnLvl 0
1.0
0
539 InAnMod4Ch01Type Disable
540 InAMod4Ch1Format Eng Units
541 InAMod4C1TmpUnit Degrees C
542 InAMod4C1FiltFrq 17 Hz
543 InAMod4C1OpCktSt Upscale
544 InAnMod4Ch1RTDEn 3-Wire
545 InAMod4C1TripDly
546 InAMod4C1TripLvl
1.0
0
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
480
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Commands
Chapter 7
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
Units No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
426 DemandPeriod
427 NumberOfPeriods
15
1
Units
Min
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
547 InAMod4C1WarnLvl 0
548 InAnMod4Ch02Type Disable
549 InAMod4Ch2Format Eng Units
550 InAMod4C2TmpUnit Degrees C
551 InAMod4C2FiltFrq 17 Hz
552 InAMod4C2OpCktSt Upscale
553 InAnMod4Ch2RTDEn 3-Wire
554 InAMod4C2TripDly 1.0
555 InAMod4C2TripLvl 0
556 InAMod4C2WarnLvl 0
557 OutAnMod4Type
558 OutAnMod4Select
Disable
Ave %FLA
559 OutAnMod4FltActn Zero
560 OutAnMod4dlActn Zero
561 FnlFltValStDur
562 OutPt00FnlFltVal
563 OutPt01FnlFltVal
564 OutPt02FnlFltVal
565 OutDig1FnlFltVal
566 OutDig2FnlFltVal
567 OutDig3FnlFltVal
568 OutDig4FnlFltVal
569 NetStrtComFltAct
570 NetStrtComFltVal
571 NetStrtComIdlAct
572 NetStrtComIdlVal
573 NetStrtFnlFltVal
574 VoltageScale
Open
Open
Open
Open
Zero
Open
Open
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Open
Volts
Units
Seconds
Clear Command
Clear Command (Parameter 165) allows you to clear historical logs, operating statistics, and energy data within the nonvolatile memory of the E300 relay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
481
Chapter 7
Commands
482
Table 419 - Clear Command (Parameter 165)
Default Value
Range
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0 = Ready
0 = Ready
1 = Clear Operating Statistics
2 = Clear History Logs
3 = Clear %TCU
4 = Clear kWh
5 = Clear kVARh
6 = Clear kVAh
7 = Clear Max kW Demand
8 = Clear Max kVAR Demand
9 = Clear Max kVA Demand
10 = Clear All
1
USINT
1
Clear Operating Statistics
When the Clear Operating Statistics command is issued, the E300 relay sets the following parameters to a value of zero (0):
•
Operating Time (Parameter 28)
•
Starts Counter (Parameter 29)
Clear History Logs
When the Clear History Logs command is issued, the E300 relay sets the following parameters to a value of zero (0):
•
Trip History 0 (Parameter 127)
•
Trip History 1 (Parameter 128)
•
Trip History 2 (Parameter 129)
•
Trip History 3 (Parameter 130)
•
Trip History 4 (Parameter 131)
•
Warning History 0 (Parameter 132)
•
Warning History 1 (Parameter 133)
•
Warning History 2 (Parameter 134)
•
Warning History 3 (Parameter 135)
•
Warning History 4 (Parameter 136)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Commands
Chapter 7
Clear % TCU
When the Clear %TCU command is issued, the E300 relay sets % Thermal
Capacity Utilized (Parameter 1) to a value of zero (0).
Clear kWh
When the Clear kWh command is issued, the E300 relay sets the following parameters to a value of zero (0):
•
kWh x 10
9
(Parameter 80)
•
kWh x 10
6
(Parameter 81)
•
kWh x 10
3
(Parameter 82)
•
kWh x 10
0
(Parameter 83)
•
kWh x 10
-3
(Parameter 84)
Clear kVARh
When the Clear kVARh command is issued, the E300 relay sets the following parameters to a value of zero (0):
•
kVARh Consumed x 10
9
(Parameter 85)
•
kVARh Consumed x 10
6
(Parameter 86)
•
kVARh Consumed x 10
3
(Parameter 87)
•
kVARh Consumed x 10
0
(Parameter 88)
•
kVARh Consumed x 10
-3
(Parameter 89)
•
kVARh Generated x 10
9
(Parameter 90)
•
kVARh Generated x 10
6
(Parameter 91)
•
kVARh Generated x 10
3
(Parameter 92)
•
kVARh Generated x 10
0
(Parameter 93)
•
kVARh Generated x 10
-3
(Parameter 94)
•
kVARh Net x 10
9
(Parameter 95)
•
kVARh Net x 10
6
(Parameter 96)
•
kVARh Net x 10
3
(Parameter 97)
•
kVARh Net x 10
0
(Parameter 98)
•
kVARh Net x 10
-3
(Parameter 99)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
483
Chapter 7
Commands
484
Clear kVAh
When the Clear kVAh command is issued, the E300 relay sets the following parameters to a value of zero (0):
•
kVAh x 10
9
(Parameter 100)
•
kVAh x 10
6
(Parameter 101)
•
kVAh x 10
3
(Parameter 102)
•
kVAh x 10
0
(Parameter 103)
•
kVAh x 10
-3
(Parameter 104)
Clear Max. kW Demand
When the Clear %TCU command is issued, the E300 relay sets Max kW
Demand (Parameter 106) to a value of zero (0).
Clear Max kVAR Demand
When the Clear %TCU command is issued, the E300 relay sets Max kVAR
Demand (Parameter 108) to a value of zero (0).
Clear Max kVA Demand
When the Clear %TCU command is issued, the E300 relay sets Max kVA
Demand (Parameter 110) to a value of zero (0).
Clear All
When the Clear All command is issued, the E300 relay sets the following parameters to a value of zero (0):
•
% Thermal Capacity Utilized (Parameter 1)
•
Operating Time (Parameter 28)
•
Starts Counter (Parameter 29)
•
kWh x 10
9
(Parameter 80)
•
kWh x 10
6
(Parameter 81)
•
kWh x 10
3
(Parameter 82)
•
kWh x 10
0
(Parameter 83)
•
kWh x 10
-3
(Parameter 84)
•
kVARh Consumed x 10
9
(Parameter 85)
•
kVARh Consumed x 10
6
(Parameter 86)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
•
kVARh Consumed x 10
3
(Parameter 87)
•
kVARh Consumed x 10
0
(Parameter 88)
•
kVARh Consumed x 10
-3
(Parameter 89)
•
kVARh Generated x 10
9
(Parameter 90)
•
kVARh Generated x 10
6
(Parameter 91)
•
kVARh Generated x 10
3
(Parameter 92)
•
kVARh Generated x 10
0
(Parameter 93)
•
kVARh Generated x 10
-3
(Parameter 94)
•
kVARh Net x 10
9
(Parameter 95)
•
kVARh Net x 10
6
(Parameter 96)
•
kVARh Net x 10
3
(Parameter 97)
•
kVARh Net x 10
0
(Parameter 98)
•
kVARh Net x 10
-3
(Parameter 99)
•
kVAh x 10
9
(Parameter 100)
•
kVAh x 10
6
(Parameter 101)
•
kVAh x 10
3
(Parameter 102)
•
kVAh x 10
0
(Parameter 103)
•
kVAh x 10
-3
(Parameter 104)
•
Max kW Demand (Parameter 106)
•
Max kVAR Demand (Parameter 108)
•
Max kVA Demand (Parameter 110)
•
Trip History 0 (Parameter 127)
•
Trip History 1 (Parameter 128)
•
Trip History 2 (Parameter 129)
•
Trip History 3 (Parameter 130)
•
Trip History 4 (Parameter 131)
•
Warning History 0 (Parameter 132)
•
Warning History 1 (Parameter 133)
•
Warning History 2 (Parameter 134)
•
Warning History 3 (Parameter 135)
•
Warning History 4 (Parameter 136)
Commands
Chapter 7
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
485
Chapter 7
Commands
Notes:
486
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Introduction
Device Monitor
Chapter
8
Metering and Diagnostics
This chapter provides detailed information about the metering and diagnostic information that the E300™ Electronic Overload Relay generates. The metering and diagnostic functions are organized into seven sections:
•
Device Monitor
•
Current Monitor
•
Voltage Monitor
•
Power Monitor
•
Energy Monitor
•
Trip/Warning History
•
Trip Snapshot
The E300 relay's device monitor diagnostics provides information on the status of the device, which includes:
•
Thermal overload protection
•
Trip and warning protection functions
•
Digital inputs and relay outputs
•
Operator station
•
Hardware options
•
Time and date
Percent Thermal Capacity Utilized
Percent Thermal Capacity Utilized (Parameter 1) reports the calculated percent thermal capacity utilization of the motor being monitored. When the percent thermal capacity utilization equals 100%, the E300 relay issues an overload trip.
Table 420 - Percent Thermal Capacity Utilization (Parameter 1)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
100
1
%
USINT
1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
487
Chapter 8
Metering and Diagnostics
Time to Trip
When the measured motor current exceeds the trip rating of the E300 relay,
Overload Time to Trip (Parameter 2) indicates the estimated time remaining before an overload trip occurs. When the measured current is below the trip rating, the Overload Time to Trip value is reported as 9,999 seconds.
Table 421 - Overload Time to Trip (Parameter 2)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
9999
0
9999
UINT
2
1
Seconds
Time To Reset
After an overload trip, the E300 relay reports the time remaining until the device can be reset through Overload Time to Reset (Parameter 3). When the %
Thermal Capacity Utilized value falls to or below the Overload Reset Level
(Parameter 174), the Overload Time to Reset value indicates zero until the overload trip is reset. After an overload trip is reset, the Overload Time to Reset value is reported as 0 seconds.
Table 422 - Overload Time to Reset (Parameter 3)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
0
0
9999
UINT
488
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Metering and Diagnostics
Chapter 8
Current Trip Status
Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) reports the status of the current-based protective trip functions.
Table 423 - Current Trip Status (Parameter 4)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Overload Trip
X Phase Loss Trip
Function
X Ground Fault Current Trip
X Stall Trip
X Jam Trip
X Underload Trip
X Current Imbalance Trip
X L1 Under Current Trip
X L2 Under Current Trip
X L3 Under Current Trip
X L1 Over Current Trip
X L2 Over Current Trip
X L3 Over Current Trip
X L1 Line Loss Trip
X L2 Line Loss Trip
X L3 Line Loss Trip
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
489
Chapter 8
Metering and Diagnostics
Voltage Trip Status
Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5) reports the status of the voltage-based protective trip functions.
Table 424 - Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Under Voltage Trip
X
X Over Voltage Trip
Voltage Imbalance Trip
X
X
X
Phase Rotation Mismatch Trip
Under Frequency Trip
Over Frequency Trip
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
490
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Metering and Diagnostics
Chapter 8
Power Trip Status
Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) reports the status of the voltage-based protective trip functions.
Table 425 - Power Trip Status (Parameter 6)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Under kW Trip
Function
X
X Over kW Trip
Under kVAR Consumed Trip
X
X
X
X
Over kVAR Consumed Trip
Under kVAR Generated Trip
Over kVAR Generated Trip
Under kVA Trip
X
X
X
X
X
Over kVA Trip
Under PF Lagging Trip
Over PF Lagging Trip
Under PF Leading Trip
Over PF Leading Trip
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Control Trip Status
Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) reports the status of the control-based protective trip functions.
Table 426 - Control Trip Status (Parameter 7)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Test Trip
X
X PTC Trip
Function
DeviceLogix Trip
X
X
X
X
Operator Station Trip
Remote Trip
Blocked Start Trip
Hardware Fault Trip
X
X
X
X
X
X
Configuration Trip
Option Match Trip
Feedback Timeout Trip
Expansion Bus Trip
Reserved
Reserved
Nonvolatile Memory Trip
Test Mode Trip Enable
Reserved
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
491
Chapter 8
Metering and Diagnostics
Current Warning Status
Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) reports the status of the current-based protective warning functions.
Table 427 - Current Warning Status (Parameter 10)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Overload Warning
X
X
Reserved
Ground Fault Warning
Reserved
Jam Warning
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Underload Warning
Current Imbalance Warning
L1 Under Current Warning
L2 Under Current Warning
L3 Under Current Warning
L1 Over Current Warning
L2 Over Current Warning
L3 Over Current Warning
X
X
X L1 Line Loss Warning
L2 Line Loss Warning
L3 Line Loss Warning
Voltage Warning Status
Voltage Warning Status (Parameter 11) reports the status of the control-based protective warning functions.
Table 428 - Voltage Warning Status (Parameter 11)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Under Voltage Warning
X
X Over Voltage Warning
Voltage Imbalance Warning
X
X
X
Phase Rotation Mismatch Warning
Under Frequency Warning
Over Frequency Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
492
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Metering and Diagnostics
Chapter 8
Power Warning Status
Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) reports the status of the control-based protective warning functions.
Table 429 - Power Warning Status (Parameter 12)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
Function
X Under kW Warning
Over kW Warning
X
X
X
X
Under kVAR Consumed Warning
Over kVAR Consumed Warning
Under kVAR Generated Warning
Over kVAR Generated Warning
X
X
X
X
X
X
Under kVA Warning
Over kVA Warning
Under PF Lagging Warning
Over PF Lagging Warning
Under PF Leading Warning
Over PF Leading Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Control Warning Status
Control Warning Status (Parameter 13) reports the status of the control-based protective warning functions.
Table 430 - Control Warning Status (Parameter 13)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Function
Reserved
PTC Warning
DeviceLogix Warning
Operator Station Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Option Match Warning
Feedback Timeout Warning
Expansion Bus Warning
Number Of Starts Warning
Operating Hours Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
493
Chapter 8
Metering and Diagnostics
Input Status 0
Input Status 0 (Parameter 16) reports the state of the digital inputs on the E300 relay Control Module.
Table 431 - Input Status 0 (Parameter 16)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Input Pt00
X
X Input Pt01
Input Pt02
X
X
X
Input Pt03
Input Pt04
Input Pt05
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Input Status 1
Function
Input Status 1 (Parameter 17) reports the state of the digital inputs on the E300 relay Digital Expansion Modules.
Table 432 - Input Status 1 (Parameter 17)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
Function
X Digital Module 1 Input Pt00
Digital Module 1 Input Pt01
X
X
X
X
Digital Module 1 Input Pt02
Digital Module 1 Input Pt03
Digital Module 2 Input Pt00
Digital Module 2 Input Pt01
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Digital Module 2 Input Pt02
Digital Module 2 Input Pt03
Digital Module 3 Input Pt00
Digital Module 3 Input Pt01
Digital Module 3 Input Pt02
Digital Module 3 Input Pt03
Digital Module 4 Input Pt00
Digital Module 4 Input Pt01
Digital Module 4 Input Pt02
Digital Module 4 Input Pt03
494
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Metering and Diagnostics
Chapter 8
Output Status
Output Status (Parameter 18) reports the state of the relay outputs on the E300 relay Control Module and Digital Expansion Modules.
Table 433 - Output Status (Parameter 18)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
X Output Pt00
Output Pt01
X
X
X
X
Function
Output Pt02
Digital Module 1 Output Pt00
Digital Module 1 Output Pt01
Digital Module 2 Output Pt00
X
X
X
X
X
Digital Module 2 Output Pt01
Digital Module 3 Output Pt00
Digital Module 3 Output Pt01
Digital Module 4 Output Pt00
Digital Module 4 Output Pt01
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
495
Chapter 8
Metering and Diagnostics
Operator Station Status
Operator Station Status (Parameter 19) reports the state of the E300 relay
Operator Station input buttons and output LEDs.
Table 434 - Operator Station Status (Parameter 19)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
Function
X Operation Station I
Operation Station II
X
X
X
Operation Station Local Remote
Operation Station O
Operation Station Reset
Reserved
X
X
X
X
X
Reserved
Reserved
Operation Station I LED
Operation Station II LED
Operation Station Local LED
Operation Station Remote LED
Operation Station O LED
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
496
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Metering and Diagnostics
Chapter 8
Device Status 0
Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) reports the general status of the E300 relay and the sensing capabilities that are present.
Table 435 - Device Status 0 (Parameter 20)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
Function
X Trip Present
Warning Present
X
X
X
X
Invalid Configuration
Current Present
Ground Fault Current Present
Voltage Present
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Emergency Start Enabled
DeviceLogix Enabled
Feedback Timeout Enabled
Operator Station Present
Voltage Sensing Present
Internal Ground Fault Sensing Present
External Ground Fault Sensing Present
PTC Sensing Present
Ready
Reserved
Device Status 0 bit 14, "Ready", is cleared under the following circumstances:
•
Device Status 0 bit 0, "Trip Present", is set
•
The E300 relay has not completed its power-up initialization
•
The processing of data in a configuration assembly is in progress
•
A CopyCat function is in progress
•
A Factory Defaults command has been invoked and is in progress.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
497
Chapter 8
Metering and Diagnostics
Device Status 1
Device Status 1 (Parameter 21) reports the specific features of the E300 relay
Control and Sensing Modules, it reports which Expansion Digital Modules
Analog Modules are present on the E300 relay Expansion Bus.
Table 436 - Device Status 1 (Parameter 21)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X 24V DC Control Module Present
X
X 120V AC Control Module Present
240V AC Control Module Present
X
X
X
X
0.5…30 A Sensing Module Present
6…60 A Sensing Module Present
10…100 A Sensing Module Present
20…2000 A Sensing Module Present
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Digital Module 1 Present
Digital Module 2 Present
Digital Module 3 Present
Digital Module 4 Present
Analog Module 1 Present
Analog Module 2 Present
Analog Module 3 Present
Analog Module 4 Present
Reserved
Firmware Revision Number
Firmware Revision Number (Parameter 22) reports the firmware revision number of the E300 relay system.
Table 437 - Firmware Revision Number (Parameter 22)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
65.535
UINT
2
1000
498
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Metering and Diagnostics
Chapter 8
Control Module ID
Control Module ID (Parameter 23) identifies which specific Control Module is present in the E300 relay system.
Table 438 - Control Module ID (Parameter 23)
Default Value
Range
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0 = Unknown
1 = 193-EIO-63-24D
2 = 193-EIO-43-120
3 = 193-EIO-43-240
4 = 193-EIOGP-42-24D
5 = 193-EIOGP-22-120
6 = 193-EIOGP-22-240
USINT
1
1
Sensing Module ID
Sensing Module ID (Parameter 24) identifies which specific Sensing Module is present in the E300 relay system.
Table 439 - Sensing Module ID (Parameter 24)
Default Value
Range
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
1
1
0 = Unknown
1 = 193/592-EIO-VIG-30A-__
2 = 193/592-EIO-VIG-60A-__
3 = 193/592-EIO-VIG-100A-__
4 = 193/592-EIO-VIG-200A-__
5 = 193/592-EIO-IG-30A-__
6 = 193/592-EIO-IG-60A-__
7 = 193/592-EIO-IG-100A-__
8 = 193/592-EIO-IG-200A-__
9 = 193/592-EIO-I-30A-__
10 = 193/592-EIO-I-60A-__
11 = 193/592-EIO-I-100A-__
12 = 193/592-EIO-I-200A-__
USINT
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
499
Chapter 8
Metering and Diagnostics
Operator Station ID
Operator Station ID (Parameter 25) identifies which specific Operator Station is present on the Expansion Bus of the E300 relay system.
Table 440 - Operator Station ID (Parameter 25)
Default Value
Range
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
0
0 = Unknown
1 = None
2 = 193-EOS-SCS
3 = 193-EOS-SDS
USINT
Expansion Digital Module ID
Expansion Digital Module ID (Parameter 26) identifies which specific
Expansion Digital Modules are present on the Expansion Bus of the E300 relay system.
Table 441 - Expansion Digital Module ID (Parameter 26
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 Unknown
Function
0 0 0 1 None
0 0 1 0 193-EXP-DIO-42-24D
0 0 1 1 193-EXP-DIO-42-120
0 1 0 0 193-EXP-DIO-42-240
Digital Module 1
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
Unknown
None
193-EXP-DIO-42-24D
193-EXP-DIO-42-120
193-EXP-DIO-42-240
Unknown
None
193-EXP-DIO-42-24D
Digital Module 2
Digital Module 3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
193-EXP-DIO-42-120
193-EXP-DIO-42-240
Unknown
None
193-EXP-DIO-42-24D
193-EXP-DIO-42-120
193-EXP-DIO-42-240
Digital Module 4
500
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Metering and Diagnostics
Chapter 8
Expansion Analog Module ID
Expansion Analog Module ID (Parameter 27) identifies which specific
Expansion Analog Modules are present on the Expansion Bus of the E300 relay system.
Table 442 - Expansion Analog Module ID (Parameter 27)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Unknown
0
0
0
1
1 0
0 1 None
1 0 193-EXP-AIO-31
Unknown
None
0 0
0 1
1 0
193-EXP-AIO-31
Unknown
None
193-EXP-AIO-31
0 0
0 1
1 0
Unknown
None
193-EXP-AIO-31
Function
Analog Module 1
Analog Module 2
Analog Module 3
Analog Module 4
Operating Time
Operating Time (Parameter 28) represents the number hours that a motor has been running. This value can be reset to zero using the Clear Command
(Parameter 165) function Clear Operating Statistics.
Table 443 - Operating Time (Parameter 28)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
65535
UINT
2
1
Hours
Starts Counter
Starts Counter (Parameter 29) represents the number of times a motor has been started. This value can be reset to zero using the Clear Command (Parameter
165) function Clear Operating Statistics.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
501
Chapter 8
Metering and Diagnostics
502
Table 444 - Starts Counter (Parameter 29)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
0
65535
UINT
Starts Available
Starts Available (Parameter 30) reports the number of starts currently available based on the blocked start settings and the actual motor starting events.
Table 445 - Starts Available (Parameter 30)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
0
0
120
USINT
Time to Start
Time to Start (Parameter 31) reports the amount of time remaining until a new start can be issued. If the Time to Start time has elapsed, this parameter reports zero until the next Blocked Start trip occurs.
Table 446 - Time to Start (Parameter 31)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
3600
UINT
2
1
Seconds
Year
Year (Parameter 32) reports the year in the virtual real-time clock of the E300 relay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Metering and Diagnostics
Chapter 8
Table 447 - Year (Parameter 32)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
0
12
UINT
Month
Month (Parameter 33) reports the month in the virtual real-time clock of the
E300 relay.
Table 448 - Month (Parameter 33)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
0
12
UINT
Day
Day (Parameter 34) reports the day in the virtual real-time clock of the E300 relay.
Table 449 - Day (Parameter 34)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
0
31
UINT
Hour
Hour (Parameter 35) reports the hour in the virtual real-time clock of the E300 relay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
503
Chapter 8
Metering and Diagnostics
504
Table 450 - Hour (Parameter 35)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
0
24
UINT
Minute
Minute (Parameter 36) reports the minute in the virtual real-time clock of the
E300 relay.
Table 451 - Minute (Parameter 36)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
0
60
UINT
Second
Second (Parameter 37) reports the second in the virtual real-time clock of the
E300 relay.
Table 452 - Second (Parameter 37)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
0
60
UINT
Invalid Configuration Parameter
Invalid Configuration Parameter (Parameter 38) reports the parameter number
that is causing a configuration trip in the E300 relay. See Chapter 4
for more information about a configuration fault.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Metering and Diagnostics
Chapter 8
Table 453 - Invalid Configuration Parameter (Parameter 38)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
0
9999
UINT
Invalid Configuration Cause
Invalid Configuration Cause (Parameter 39) reports the reason for the configuration trip in the E300 relay. See
for more information about a configuration fault.
Table 454 - Invalid Configuration Cause (Parameter 39)
Default Value
Range
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0 = No Error
1 = Value Over Maximum
2 = Value Under Minimum
3 = Illegal Value
4 = L3 Current Detected
5 = CopyCat Error
USINT
1
1
Mismatch Status
Mismatch Status (Parameter 40) reports the module that is causing a mismatch
trip or warning in the E300 relay. See Chapter 4
for more information on a mismatch fault.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
505
Chapter 8
Metering and Diagnostics
Table 455 - Mismatch Status (Parameter 40)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 Match
1 Mismatch
0
1
0
1
Match
Mismatch
Match
Mismatch
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Match
Mismatch
Match
Mismatch
Match
Mismatch
Match
Mismatch
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Match
Mismatch
Match
Mismatch
Match
Mismatch
Match
Mismatch
Match
Mismatch
Function
Control Module
Sensing Module
Communication
Module
Operator Station
Digital Module 1
Digital Module 2
Digital Module 3
Digital Module 4
Analog Module 1
Analog Module 2
Analog Module 3
Analog Module 4
Current Monitor
The E300 relay current monitor diagnostics provides information on the current consumed by the load that the E300 relay is monitoring, and it provides diagnostics for a three-phase current system including imbalance and ground fault current.
L1 Current
L1 Current (Parameter 43) reports the current in Amperes flowing through the
L1 and T1 power terminals of the E300 relay Sensing Module.
Table 456 - L1 Current (Parameter 43)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.00
0.00
20000000.00
DINT
4
100
Amps
506
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Metering and Diagnostics
Chapter 8
L2 Current
L2 Current (Parameter 44) reports the current in Amperes flowing through the
L2 and T2 power terminals of the E300 relay Sensing Module.
Table 457 - L2 Current (Parameter 44)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.00
0.00
20000000.00
DINT
4
100
Amps
L3 Current
L3 Current (Parameter 45) reports the current in Amperes flowing through the
L3 and T3 power terminals of the E300 relay Sensing Module.
Table 458 - L3 Current (Parameter 45)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.00
0.00
20000000.00
DINT
4
100
Amps
Average Current
Average Current (Parameter 46) reports the average current of the monitored current. When single or three phase (Parameter 176) is set to three phase, average current is calculated as follows:
Average Current = (L1 Current + L2 Current + L3 Current) / 3
When single or three phase (Parameter 176) is set to single phase, average current is calculated as follows:
Average Current = (L1 Current + L2 Current) / 2
Table 459 - Average Current (Parameter 46)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.00
0.00
20000000.00
DINT
4
100
Amps
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
507
Chapter 8
Metering and Diagnostics
508
L1 Percent FLA
L1 Percent FLA (Parameter 47) reports the L1 current in comparison to the active Full Load Amps programmed in FLA (Parameter 171) and FLA2
(Parameter 177).
L1 Percent FLA = L1 Current / Full Load Amps
Table 460 - L1 Percent FLA (Parameter 47)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
10
%
0.0
0.0
1000.00
UINT
L2 Percent FLA
L2 Percent FLA (Parameter 48) reports the L2 current in comparison to the active Full Load Amps programmed in FLA (Parameter 171) and FLA2
(Parameter 177).
L2 Percent FLA = L2 Current / Full Load Amps
Table 461 - L2 Percent FLA (Parameter 48)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
10
%
0.0
0.0
1000.00
UINT
L3 Percent FLA
L3 Percent FLA (Parameter 49) reports the L3 current in comparison to the active Full Load Amps programmed in FLA (Parameter 171) and FLA2
(Parameter 177).
L3 Percent FLA = L3 Current / Full Load Amps
Table 462 - L3 Percent FLA (Parameter 49)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
10
%
0.0
0.0
1000.00
UINT
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Metering and Diagnostics
Chapter 8
Average Percent FLA
Average Percent FLA (Parameter 50) reports the average current in comparison to the active Full Load Amps programmed in FLA (Parameter 171) and FLA2
(Parameter 177).
Average Percent FLA = Average Current / Full Load Amps
Table 463 - Average Percent FLA (Parameter 50)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
10
%
0.0
0.0
1000.00
UINT
Ground Fault Current
Ground Fault Current (Parameter 51) reports the ground fault current measured by the internal core balanced current transformer of the E300 relay Sensing
Module or external core balanced current transformer.
Table 464 - Ground Fault Current (Parameter 51)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
99.99
UINT
2
100
Amps
Current Imbalance
Current Imbalance (Parameter 52) reports the percentage of uneven current consumption in the monitored power system. Current Imbalance is defined by the following equation:
Current Imbalance = 100% * (I d
/I a
)
I
I where
a d
= Maximum Line Current Deviation from the Average Current
= Average Current
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
509
Chapter 8
Metering and Diagnostics
Voltage Monitor
Table 465 - Current Imbalance (Parameter 52)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
%
0
0
200
UINT
The E300 relay’s voltage monitor diagnostics provides information on the voltage being supplied to the load. The voltage diagnostics include three-phase voltage, phase imbalance, phase rotation, and frequency.
L1-L2 Voltage
L1-L2 Voltage (Parameter 53) reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T1 and T2 power terminals of the E300 relay Sensing Module.
Table 466 - L1-L2 Voltage (Parameter 53)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
L2-L3 Voltage
L2-L3 Voltage (Parameter 54) reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T2 and T3 power terminals of the E300 relay Sensing Module.
Table 467 - L2-L3 Voltage (Parameter 54)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
510
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Metering and Diagnostics
Chapter 8
L3-L1 Voltage
L3-L1 Voltage (Parameter 55) reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T3 and T1 power terminals of the E300 relay Sensing Module.
Table 468 - L3-L1 Voltage (Parameter 55)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
Average L-L Voltage
Average L-L Voltage (Parameter 56) reports the average voltage of the monitored
L-L voltages. When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Three Phase
,
Average L-L Voltage is calculated as follows:
Average L-L Voltage = (L1-L2 Voltage + L2-L3 Voltage + L3-L1 Voltage) / 3
When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase
, Average L-L
Voltage is calculated as follows:
Average L-L Voltage = (L1-L2 Voltage + L2-L3 Voltage) / 2
Table 469 - Average L-L Voltage (Parameter 56)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
L1-N Voltage
L1-N Voltage (Parameter 57) reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T1 power terminal of the E300 relay Sensing Module.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
511
Chapter 8
Metering and Diagnostics
512
Table 470 - L1-N Voltage (Parameter 57)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
L2-N Voltage
L2-N Voltage (Parameter 58) reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T2 power terminal of the E300 relay Sensing Module.
Table 471 - L2-N Voltage (Parameter 58)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
L3-N Voltage
L3-N Voltage (Parameter 59) reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T3 power terminal of the E300 relay Sensing Module.
Table 472 - L3-N Voltage (Parameter 59)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
Average L-N Voltage
Average L-N Voltage (Parameter 60) reports the average voltage of the monitored
L-N voltages. When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Three Phase
,
Average L-N Voltage is calculated as follows:
Average L-N Voltage = (L1-N Voltage + L2-N Voltage + L3-N Voltage) / 3
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Metering and Diagnostics
Chapter 8
When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase
, Average L-N
Voltage is calculated as follows:
Average L-N Voltage = (L1-N Voltage + L2-N Voltage) / 2
Table 473 - Average L-N Voltage (Parameter 60)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
Voltage Imbalance
Voltage Imbalance (Parameter 61) reports the percentage of uneven voltage being supplied by the monitored power system. Voltage Imbalance is defined by the following equation:
Voltage Imbalance = 100% * (Vd/Va)
where
Vd = Maximum L-L Voltage Deviation from the Average L-L Voltage
Va = Average L-L Voltage
Table 474 - Voltage Imbalance (Parameter 61)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
200
1
%
UINT
2
Frequency
Frequency (Parameter 62) reports the voltage frequency in Hertz of the monitored power system from the E300 relay Sensing Module.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
513
Chapter 8
Metering and Diagnostics
Power Monitor
514
Table 475 - Frequency (Parameter 62)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
10
Hz
0.0
0.0
74.0
UINT
Phase Rotation
Phase Rotation (Parameter 63) reports the voltage phase rotation as ABC or
ACB of the monitored power system from the E300 relay Sensing Module.
Table 476 - Phase Rotation Trip Type (Parameter 63)
Default Value
Range
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0 = No Rotation
0 = No Rotation
1 = ABC
2 = ACB
1
USINT
1
The E300 relay’s power monitor diagnostics provides information on the power being supplied to the load. The power diagnostics include real power (kW), reactive power (kVAR), apparent power (kVA), and power factor.
Power Scale
For large medium voltage-based power systems, it may be more convenient for you to view the real-time power information (Parameters 64-75) in terms of
Megawatts instead of Kilowatts. Power Scale (Parameter 377) allows the E300 relay to display the values of Parameters 64…75 as Kilowatts or Megawatts.
Table 477 - Power Scale (Parameter 377)
Default Value
Range
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
0 = Kilowatts
0 = Kilowatts
1 = Megawatts
USINT
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
Metering and Diagnostics
Chapter 8
L1 Real Power
L1 Real Power (Parameter 64) reports the real power for line 1 in kW or MW depending on the configuration value for Power Scale (Parameter 377). When
Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L1 Real Power is set to 0.
Table 478 - L1 Real Power (Parameter 64)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
-2000000.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kW or MW
L2 Real Power
L2 Real Power (Parameter 65) reports the real power for line 2 in kW or MW depending on the configuration value for Power Scale (Parameter 377). When
Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L2 Real Power is set to 0.
Table 479 - L2 Real Power (Parameter 65)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
-2000000.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kW or MW
L3 Real Power
L3 Real Power (Parameter 66) reports the real power for line 3 in kW or MW depending on the configuration value for Power Scale (Parameter 377). When
Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L3 Real Power is set to 0. When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase
, L3
Real Power is set to 0.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015
515
Chapter 8
Metering and Diagnostics
516
Table 480 - L3 Real Power (Parameter 66)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
-2000000.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kW or MW
Total Real Power
Total Real Power (Parameter 67) reports the total real power of the monitored power conductors in kW or MW depending on the configuration value for
Power Scale (Parameter 377). When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Three Phase
, Total Real Power is calculated as follows:
Total Real Power = (L1 Real Power + L2 Real Power + L3 Real Power)
When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase
, Total Real
Power is calculated as follows:
Total Real Power = (L1 Real Power + L2 Real Power)
Table 481 - Total Real Power (Parameter 67)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
-2000000.000
2000000.000
DINT<